JP2021191342A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the interest for a performance.SOLUTION: Variable display means carries out a plurality of cycle variations as a variable display of a special drawing pattern, and then stops and displays the special drawing pattern. Moreover, the variable display means can give a notification of a determination result in response to an operation of operation means in a predetermined operation effective period, and can display a specific image after the notification of the determination result. The case of the operation at a first timing and the case of the operation at a second timing in the predetermined operation effective period have the different number of times of the cycle variations carried out from a start of the notification to the display of the specific image, but have the same number of times of the cycle variation carried out from a start of the display of the specific image to a stop and display of a performance drawing pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 130

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player and executing the special game according to the result of the determination is general.

Such a gaming machine is provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect related to the game, and a special game is provided in response to the operation of the operation means during the valid period in which the promotion effect for encouraging the operation of the operation means is performed. There was a gaming machine that performed a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the above was executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-158774

However, since the valid period is set over a predetermined time, the operation timing of the player also varies, and there is still room for improvement in improving the production interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of production.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means, and a player. In a gaming machine provided with an operable operating means, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a determination means according to the result of the determination. The variation display means is provided with a variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the effect control means , It is possible to execute the variation effect by the effect symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation. After the start, a stop display for stopping the effect symbol is executed, the result of the determination is notified according to the operation of the operation means in a predetermined operation valid period, and a specific image can be displayed after the notification. The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification to the display of the specific image when the operating means is operated at the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period, and the operating means is the predetermined. The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification to the display of the specific image when the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing during the operation valid period of the specific image is different from that of the specific image. The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of display to the stop display of the effect symbol is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the production interest.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of a part of the front side of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure explaining the details of the low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state). It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a hold icon, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the dialogue notice pattern determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a character advance notice pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout effect pattern determination table, and (c) shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure, and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the determination effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in a sub-display device after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the movable effect device 1 after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the movable effect device 2 after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case that there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a restoration abnormality in a sub-display device after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the movable effect device 1 after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the movable effect device 2 after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after the power failure restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification example when there is a return abnormality in a sub-display device after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the initial operation mode and required time of a movable effect device 1. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect operation mode of the movable effect device 1 and the required time. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the initial operation mode of the movable effect device 2 and the time required for the effect operation mode. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the required time of the initial operation mode and the effect operation mode of a sub-display device. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources while changing a setting. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol display. It is a figure which shows the display effect example for each effect mode. It is a figure which shows the display effect example for each effect mode. It is a figure which shows the display effect example of the hold number. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect starts from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 73. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 73. It is a timing chart when a start prize is won during a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 76. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect is executed continuously. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 78. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 78. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 78. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect is started without receiving the stop command normally. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 82. It is a timing chart when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 84. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 84. It is a timing chart when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 87. It is a timing chart when the loss normal reach fluctuation production ends and the customer waits. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 92. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 92. It is a figure which shows the production example of the icon disappearance effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the icon disappearance effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the modification of FIG. 97 and FIG. 99. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the icon and a start port lamp. It is a figure which shows the timing chart at the time of recovery from the electric power failure which occurred during the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 102. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the start command could not be received normally during a look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 106. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 106. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the power-on designation command is received while displaying a menu image. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 109. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 111. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the variation effect with the symbol promotion effect or the revival effect is completed. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 113. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 113. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variation effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 117. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal background image data (mode A). It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 120. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 120. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart (1/2) when the vibration effect occurs in each scene of the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart (2/2) when the vibration effect occurs in each scene of the variation effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 130. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in a specific variation effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the dialogue notice occurs in the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the dialogue notice and the decision effect occur in the variable effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the operation of the operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 135. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the variable display of a special symbol that the state after the power failure restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the variable display of a special symbol that the state after the power failure restoration. It is a timing chart when the variable production starts during the customer waiting demo production. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 139. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 139. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 139. It is a timing chart when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 143. It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on the command exchange of a normal fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on the command transfer of the loss SPSP reach fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on command transfer of a jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example which concerns on the command exchange during the look-ahead zone production. It is a timing chart when the icon is hidden and then redisplayed. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 149. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 149. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the operation state of the hold icon before and after the icon change effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which a game ball (game medium) flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95, which will be described later, are paid out based on the establishment of grant conditions. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a game ball, and a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become like. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when an abnormality occurs in which the glass frame 4 is opened or the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIGS. 1 or 2) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. See) are provided side by side.

The effect button device 16 has an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. A button drive device 17b provided with a button drive motor for changing to a protruding state located above, and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 into a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode, and The effect button light emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 into a light-off state and a lighting state that emits light in a predetermined mode is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the effect button 17 is vibrated by the button drive device 17b. However, for example, when another operation means (for example, an effect lever) is provided in addition to the effect button 17, the effect lever is also used. It may vibrate.
Further, the cross key 19 may vibrate.
Further, not limited to the operating means, a decorative member (for example, one imitating a character) provided at a position where the player can touch may vibrate.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) juxtaposed to the game machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a full plate detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the occurrence of a plate full error in which the game ball is full is provided in the lower plate 12, and the full plate 12a is provided with a fullness detection switch 32a. While the fullness is detected, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95 described later is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a 15a (see FIG. 5) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in the closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 face the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. ..

The launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member, and launching from the launching member toward the lower left portion of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail are provided. Then, the game ball sent to the launch position by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is opened. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and the game area 5a is launched by the first firing force by the decorative frame 40. It is divided into a left game area where the game ball is flown down and a right game area where the game ball launched by the second launch force stronger than the first launch force flows down, and the left game area and the right game area. Is adapted to communicate below the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced in the above can be rolled and flowed down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 that allow the game ball to always win (win) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, the game One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the game balls that have won (winned) in the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, a first starting port 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) on which a game ball can always win (win) is provided, and the first starting port 45 wins (wins). When the game ball (ball) is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are dispensed by the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning in the collision detection described later). A variable starting portion 46 is provided that can convert a game ball from a difficult closed state to a winning state or an easy open state.

The variable starting portion 46 has a second starting port opening / closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second starting port opening / closing member 48, while the upper surface of the variable starting portion 46 is inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to become a flow path for the game ball. A second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward just below the starting opening opening / closing member 48, and a second game ball that has won (winned) in the second starting opening 47. By moving the start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second start port opening / closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second start port 47 is converted to the closed state and the second start port is closed. A second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) for converting the second starting opening 47 into an open state by moving the opening / closing member 48 toward the rear (winning allowable position) is provided.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 which is opened during the auxiliary game described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied). A predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a normal map gate 44 (normal map starting area) through which a game ball can always pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the normal map gate 44 is a gate detection switch 44a. If it is detected in, the prize ball is not given, but the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (hit judgment) as to whether or not to execute the hit game is given (the general map judgment information described later is stored).

Below the normal gate 44, it is possible or easy to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it was determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment). A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and the first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward just below the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51. By moving the 1st big prize opening detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the 1st big winning opening 50 and the 1st big winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (winning restriction position). To convert the first prize opening 50 to the closed state and to convert the first prize opening 50 to the open state by moving the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 toward the rear (winning allowable position). The first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first big prize opening opening / closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game described later, the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 When the game balls that have flowed down or the game balls that have reached the first prize opening 50 are detected by the first prize opening detection switch 50a when the game balls win the first prize opening 50, a predetermined number of them are detected. The game balls (for example, 10 pieces) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

Below the first variable winning unit 49, it is possible or easy to win a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit by the big hit judgment). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) (one of the bottom surfaces of the first downstream flow path 91e). Along with forming a portion), a second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward just below the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57. And, the 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the 2nd big winning opening 56 and the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing member 57 are moved forward (winning restricted position). By doing so, the second prize opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second prize opening 56 is converted to the open state by moving the second prize opening opening / closing member 57 toward the rear (winning allowable position). A second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57 moves backward and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game, it flows down the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57. When the game ball that has been played or the game ball that has reached the second big prize opening 56 wins the second big winning opening 56 and is detected by the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) The game balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls.

The game ball launched into the left game area is either flowed down as it is along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage portion 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. A prize is won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50) and the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right game area are won (the second major winning opening 56). There is no passing).

Further, the game ball launched into the right game area is passed through the upstream flow path 91a to the central flow path 91b (normal gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first. 2 One general winning opening 43, a variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), a first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), which are provided in the right gaming area by flowing down the downstream flow path 91f or the like. Either a prize is won in any of the second variable winning units 55 (second large winning opening 56), or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area will not be won.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 50 and a second major winning opening 56, and an out opening 39. An out-ball flow path that accepts and collects out-balls made of inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down is provided, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, there is a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold. A hold display device including a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a main information display 59 including a status confirmation display 68 are provided. The main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

The jackpot judgment is special symbol judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random for reach judgment) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. It corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when the jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) in a predetermined cycle (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol. do. When focusing on only one LED, it blinks at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on → 224 ms off). Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50, 2nd big winning opening 56) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode, with a predetermined number of times (with an interval). For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who easily obtains a prize ball by a player who performs the game over 4 times, 10 times, and the like.

The maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won (winning) in the large winning opening, one round game is completed. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player.

Auxiliary game judgment is the normal map judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal map gate 44. Is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired normal map determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) of notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (winning), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first hold (U1), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain second hold number (U2), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold. In addition, although the second hold is stored up to four, it may be less than four or more, or the second hold may not be stored.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal figure determination information (normal figure hold) stored when a game ball wins (passes) at the normal figure gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, but the number may be less than or larger than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and if it is determined to be lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. If it is inside, it is advisable to repeat turning off and "-".

The round number display 66 is composed of 6 LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the number of rounds is 10 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a big hit state (special game) or a time-saving game state. It is for displaying, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The lighting of the LED is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. .. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the gaming machine 1 and may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is recognized which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, in the setting change mode, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked or vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 68 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, and the round number display are displayed. Since 66, the right-handed display 67 and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these displays may be turned on.

Inside the game area 5a, there are a sub-first variation indicator 81, a sub-second variation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-normal map variation indicator 85, and a sub-general. Figure A sub information display 80 including a hold display 86 and a sub right-handed display 87 is provided. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display 80 is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display, and the sub second variable display 82 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the second special symbol is variable. It is for displaying (notifying) whether or not it is inside, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (lights up for 0.5 seconds → turns off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. do.

The sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be used to notify the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this case, it is advisable to turn on the LED in the case of a big hit and turn off the LED in the case of a loss.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information (first hold number) described later, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information described later (the number of second hold information). It is for displaying the second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of holds is "4".

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (the number of normal figure hold), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for urging the game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED is turned on during the big hit state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED is turned off in other game states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is a lower part of the effect space 40a and is a main display device. A sub display device 71 (second image display device) composed of a liquid crystal display having a size and a display area smaller than that of the main display device 70 is provided in front of the 70, and an operation is performed in the upper part of the effect space 40a. A first movable effect device 73 for executing the effect is provided, and a second movable effect device 75 for executing the motion effect is provided on the left side of the effect space 40a.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. The effect display includes a customer waiting demo effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not executed, and a variation display (pre-variation operation, update variation) of the effect symbol 70a performed during the execution of the special symbol variation display. There is a variation effect, a variation display (update variation) of the special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) performed during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, a jackpot effect performed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the like.

Further, the sub display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving the sub display device 71 by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while the fluctuation effect is being executed by the main display device 70. ..

Specifically, it moves (ascends) in the vertical direction between the standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and the effect position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70. , Down) to create a moving effect. In addition, it may be swung up and down at the standby position (lower position) and the effect position (upper position), or may be swung up and down at the intermediate position between the standby position and the effect position. .. Further, it may be positioned (stayed) at the effect position (upper position) for a predetermined time, or a predetermined effect operation (for example, rotation) may be performed at the effect position (upper position). Further, the moving direction of the sub display device 71 (second image display device) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17. The sub-display device 71 does not necessarily have to be provided, and a movable effect device (movable accessory) for ascending and descending may be provided at the position where the sub-display device 71 is provided.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device), a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and a variable display area for variable effects. A mode display area or the like indicating an effect mode related to execution is formed.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect symbol 70a is configured to stop and display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in an mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is another mode.

The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or it may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. good.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the jackpot determination. This raises the player's expectation that the jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The main display device 70 includes a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in a normal gaming state described later, and a first hold icon display area 70B described later. The second hold icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state, and the fact that the variable effect is being executed. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) to be shown, the first hold number display area SA for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and the second hold number (U2) are numerical values. A second reserved number display area SB or the like for display is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B has a first display unit 70B1 (first area), a second display unit 70B2 (second area), and a third display unit 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , 4th display unit 70B4 (4th area), and the 1st display unit 70B1 to 4th display unit 70B4 have a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1). Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays the second hold icon. The first hold icon indicating the first hold information on which the change display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70B3 is the third to execute the change display of the first special symbol. The first hold icon indicating the hold information is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays the first hold icon showing the first hold information on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

The second hold icon display area 70D has a first display unit 70D1 (first area), a second display unit 70D2 (second area), a third display unit 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display unit 70D4 (from the left side). The first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 is displayed with the second special symbol change display executed second. A second hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and rides on or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as shown.

Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is moved toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting) and moving (shifting) the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the icon display area 70C, the icon becomes the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed. The icon disappears (erases) at the end of. In other words, the disappearance effect (erasure effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70C with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). ), The second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed on the main display device 70, but the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed on either or both of the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. May be done.

The first movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the like during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the main display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute the operation effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a has a standby position (first position, "A" in FIG. 59 and the like described later) located near the end (upper side) of the main display device 70, and the main display device 70. The first effect position (second position, "B" in FIG. 59, etc., which will be described later) located closer to the center (lower side), and the first effect position located closer to the center (lower side) of the main display device 70 than the first effect position. It moves (ascends and descends) to and from the two production positions (third position, "C" in FIG. 59 and the like described later). The second movable member 73b is adapted to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position that recedes from the front of the first movable member 73a. .. The first movable member 73a may be swung up and down at a standby position (first position), a first effect position (second position), and a second effect position (third position). Further, instead of swinging the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b is swung left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position or each effect position, so that the first movable member 73a is swung. May appear to be rocking. Further, the position (stay) may be set at the first effect position (second position) or the second effect position (third position) for a predetermined time, or the first effect position (second position) or the second effect may be performed. A predetermined effect operation (for example, rotation) may be performed at the position (third position).

The second movable effect device 75 is capable of executing the motion effect during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the main display device 70. Further, the second movable effect device 75 is provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect.

Specifically, the second movable effect device 75 includes a standby position (first position, "D" in FIG. 61 and the like described later) located near the end (left side) of the main display device 70, and a main display device. It moves to and from the effect position (second position, "E" in FIG. 61 and the like described later) located closer to the center (left side) of 70. The second movable effect device 75 can be moved by a second movable effect device drive solenoid (not shown), and the effect operation is performed at the effect position like the sub-display device 71 and the first movable effect device 73 described above. Or move to the effect position for a predetermined time, but move from the standby position to the effect position and move (return) from the effect position to the standby position. ing.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game supplied from a payout device 95 for paying out a game ball based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), an island facility, or the like. A game ball storage unit 96 that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A having a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are built-in. An effect control device 130A, a power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer), and the like are provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes in the left-right direction around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes a volume of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, a display device (main display device, sub display device), and various lighting devices (frame lighting device). 10. A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the panel lighting device 74) is provided.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the advantage of the game (big hit). RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (of the probability of being determined), and a setting key switch for inputting a signal for shifting to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key. 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the game machine to be grasped, other electronic components, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left, and set by the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information is configured (see FIG. 63). When displaying the set value, static lighting is performed, and when displaying performance information, dynamic lighting is performed.

(Composition of the game board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 constituting the front side of the game board 5 and a back surface unit 501 constituting the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a game plate 500a made of transparent resin in which a game area 5a is formed on the surface of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 described above, and a window portion is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. ..

Then, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the solenoid gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first starting port 45 (first starting port detection switch 45a), and the variable Starting unit 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning unit 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st big winning opening opening / closing member 51, 1st big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b), and 2nd variable winning opening 55 (2nd big winning opening 56, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a, 2nd big winning opening opening / closing A member 57, a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b), a sub information display 80 are provided, and a main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a.

Further, at the lower right of the game plate 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp having identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are provided at the four corners of the 500a.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game plate 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with a fingertip and rotated toward the left side.

The fixture 503a is provided at the operation portion located on the front surface side of the game plate 500a, the shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back surface side of the game plate 500a, and the tip end of the shaft portion, and the back surface of the game plate 500a. It is equipped with an engaging piece located on the side, and by operating the operation unit, the engaging piece changes between the first state (non-engaged posture) and the second state (engaged posture). There is.

The back surface unit 501 has a unit base 501a in which the front surface is formed in a concave chamber shape and a window portion for making the rear view visible is formed. 1 Movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), second movable effect device 75, and the like are provided, and a main display device 70 is provided behind the window portion. Further, an effect control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the main display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the effect control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixed receiving portions 503b for detachably attaching the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixing tool 503a described above are provided.

When the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the board unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side portion of the back surface unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a is in a state of entering the inside of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging piece is set to the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging piece engages with the fixed receiving portion 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 And are fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the board unit 500 is opened. And the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate stamp plate 502. After that, when the engaging piece is set to the first state by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging piece and the fixed receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portion 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the gaming board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of a like-new game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment / detachment of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state where the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the game board mounting frame 3, only the back surface unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, it is possible to replace (like new) only the board unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board unit 500, it is advisable to perform the above-mentioned removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like. It has 110m.

Out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start port detection switch 45a, second start port detection switch 47a, second start port opening / closing are connected to the input / output port of the main control unit 110m. Magnet 48b, 1st prize opening detection switch 50a, 1st prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, 2nd prize opening detection switch 56a, 2nd prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, main Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and effect control. The board 130 is connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

In the "game information", the start opening winning signal, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol variation display, which is output every time the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, is stopped. A symbol confirmation signal output for each, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of a big winning opening), and an output over a time-saving gaming state described later. Examples thereof include a time saving state signal to be executed, a security signal to be output when a problematic (threatening) situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) occurs in the security of the gaming machine 1.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in order. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores the game work area used as the work by the game program, the first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the game program. A game stack area for temporarily evacuating and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the progress of the game, the set value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the game progress. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area temporarily saves the information work area used as the work by the information program, the unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the information program. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for processing based on the information program Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. Further, when performing processing based on an information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the content of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but it can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are used in the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer in the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when the information program returns to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 121 has an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout device 95 for paying out the game ball. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input / output port, and the like.
A ball feed solenoid 11b, a touch sensor 15a, a firing volume 15b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid has a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control board 130 displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command 130 m from the effect control unit 130 m. A display control unit 140 that controls audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of effect control commands from the effect control unit 130m. It is equipped with.

The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

An effect button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc. are performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m to control the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or outputs a predetermined sound or sound to the sound output device 9. Control to make it.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. An image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a voice output device based on reception of a voice control command from the general control unit 141. It includes a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) for controlling 9 and a voice ROM 149 in which sound data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes a centralized CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 (VDP) and a voice control unit 148 (voice). It has an input / output port to which the LSI) is connected.

The integrated CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140 is output from the audio output device 9. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing a production sound and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include a frame lighting device 10, a button drive device 17b (effect button drive motor, effect button vibration motor), effect button light emitting LED 17c, a first movable effect device 73, and a second movable effect device. 75, panel lighting device 74, start port lamp 76, sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84) , Sub-normal map fluctuation indicator 85, sub-normal map hold indicator 86, sub-right-handed indicator 87) are connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the start port lamp 76, the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The start port lamp 76 can emit light according to the icon final display mode determination table (FIG. 28), the icon final display mode determined by the change scenario determination table (FIG. 29), and the change scenario, which will be described later. For example, when the "scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, the light is emitted in "white" at the time of winning, the light is emitted in "white" before one change, and the change is emitted in "blue". That is, the start port lamp 76 can emit light in a color linked to the icon (for example, the icon, the hold icon), and can indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit together with the icon.

Further, the icon or the hold icon may be hidden during the execution of the variable effect (for example, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is being executed) (see FIGS. 96 and 100). As a result, for example, when the color of the icon is changed, the player may forget what color the icon has changed to, but the start port lamp 76 is executing the variation effect (for example, SP). It does not become invisible during the reach effect or SPSP reach effect (during execution) and is not difficult to see, and emits light in the color corresponding to the hidden icon. Therefore, by visually observing the start port lamp 76, it is possible to prevent forgetting what color the hidden icon has changed to.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for operating the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). Supply to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). A disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power supply is disconnected (power failure) are provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 to obtain a voltage drop detection signal. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than the predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage (power outage) after the recovery from the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130 m, the payout control board 120 and the payout control board 120 and the sub RAM 130c are retained so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130 m. Further, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130 m.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special game determination (big hit determination) has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state", and the state relating to the second starting port opening / closing member 48 of the second starting port 47 is "non-time saving". It has a "state" and a "time saving state".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" which is a low-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" which is a low-probability state and time-saving state. , A "high probability time saving game state (probability variation game state)" which is a high probability state and a time saving state is provided.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal gaming state". Further, even during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the gaming state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (of the jackpot probability), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, is "1", the game is played in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. In the special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that the ball has entered, the game state in which the jackpot probability is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, the "high probability state" is a game that is advantageous to the player as compared with the low probability state because the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/60 when the set value is "1". The state. The transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, the "non-time saving state" means that the winning probability is set as low as 1/256 in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, and the average of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set. A gaming state in which the time is set to about 30 seconds and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.180 seconds when it is a hit.

On the other hand, in the "time saving state", the hit probability is set as high as 255/256, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and the second starting port 47 is hit. By setting the opening time to 6 seconds, the game state is advantageous to the player in which the consumption of the game ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving state. The transition from the non-short-time state to the short-time state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

It should be noted that the "time saving state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the hit probability are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state", but the average of the normal symbols. Only one of the fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the hit probability may be set to be advantageous.

Although the hit probability in the non-time saving state is 1/256, the hit probability may be set to 0/256 so that it is not determined as a hit. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time saving state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the details of the above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" will be described.

In conventional gaming machines, it is the mainstream to shift to the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (d). In the present embodiment, in addition to the conventional (a) and (d), a transition route to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the player shifts to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" without going through the jackpot game. Is possible.

As an example, the "satisfaction of a predetermined condition" is that a specific lost symbol is stopped. For example, as a special symbol for loss, as shown in FIG. 8 (b) described later, "special symbol 00" and "special symbol 10" are provided, but a special symbol for loss other than these is provided. In this way (for example, "special symbol 11" etc.), the "special symbol 11" is determined, and the "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed, so that the "low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is changed from the normal gaming state. ) ”.

As a result, the player's attention (whether or not the above-mentioned "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed) can be attracted in the scene where the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the game interest can be improved.
In addition, when playing a normal game state, the player suddenly shifts to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)", so that the player can be given a surprise and the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

In addition, the ratio in which a specific lost symbol is determined may be an arbitrary ratio. For example, the probability may be the same as or close to the probability of being determined as a jackpot for each set value, the probability may be more difficult to determine than the probability of being determined as a jackpot for each set value, or the probability may be easily determined. good.

Another example of "satisfaction of a predetermined condition" is that the number of times of variable display of a special symbol executed from the starting point has reached N times. For example, when the main RAM 110c is provided with an area for counting and storing the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the "low probability non-time saving game state (normal game state)", and the number of times of counting and storing in the area reaches N times, The transition from the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is made.

For "N times", an arbitrary number of times can be set according to the probability of being determined as a big hit for each set value. For example, if the probability of being determined as a big hit is "1/199", about "500" times can be set as N times, and if the probability of being determined as a big hit is "1/319", N. About "900" times can be set as the times.

As an example, the “starting point” may be, for example, a state in which RWM clearing has been performed (for example, a state in which the processes of steps S19 and S24 in FIG. 13 to be described later have been performed).
Further, for example, the state at the end of the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)", that is, the state (e) in FIG. 6 can be mentioned.
Further, for example, although not shown in FIG. 6, the end of the “high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state (probability-changing gaming state)” may be set as the “starting point” according to the game machine specifications.

The upper limit of the number of times of the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is "50" times or "100" times in the present embodiment when the transition is made in (d) of FIG.
On the other hand, in the case of the transition in (b) of FIG. 6, in the case of this embodiment, it is "1000" times.
In other words, the upper limit of the "low probability time-shortening game state (time-saving game state)" is higher in the case of transitioning after the predetermined conditions are satisfied without going through the jackpot game than in the case of shifting through the jackpot game. There are many relationships.

As a result, it is possible to give the player a material for determining whether or not to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who play the game in the dark clouds. Further, for example, when N times is about 900 times, it is possible to give relief measures to the player who has not obtained a big hit for a long time, which leads to prevention of leaving the game. The number of N times may be easily grasped by the player through a magazine or the Internet.

In addition, when the state shifts to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is higher than the case of shifting to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" through the jackpot game. Since the upper limit of the number of times of the "time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" increases, it is possible to make people think that they will actively try to play the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)", and the operation of the gaming machine can be activated. Can be improved.

It should be noted that "satisfaction of predetermined conditions" may include only one of the conditions shown in FIG. 6, may include all conditions, and may include conditions other than those shown in FIG. Conditions may be provided.

Further, the number of rotations up to "N times" may be positively notified. For example, the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71 may be used to perform notification (display) such as "the XX state is entered by rotating XX!". On the other hand, it may be possible to keep the suggestion without actively notifying. For example, when the number of rotations is close to "N times", it may be suggested that the number of rotations is approaching "N times" by setting a special effect mode (background, mode).

Further, when the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" in FIG. 6 is controlled, the "time saving game state 2" is displayed together with the "time saving game state 1". It may be controlled. That is, the "special symbol 11" may be determined based on the ball entering the first starting port 45 or may be determined based on the ball entering the second starting port 47.

For example, if "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed when the remaining number of playable times in "time saving game state 1" is "2", "1000" is set as the number of playable times in "time saving game state 2". In the next game after setting, the remaining number of playable times in "time saving game state 1" may be "1", and the number of playable times in "time saving game state 2" may be "999". Then, in the next game, the remaining number of playable times in "time saving game state 1" is "0", the number of playable times in "time saving game state 2" is "998", and from there, "time saving game state 2". May be controlled only.

As a result, even if the "special symbol 11" is determined in the "time saving game state 1", the player does not lose (so-called loss), and the time saving gaming state can be continuously played. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the entertainment of the game.

On the other hand, when the "special symbol 11" in the above-described example is stopped and displayed while the "time-saving game state 1" is controlled, the "time-saving game state 2" may not be controlled. For example, if the "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed when the remaining number of playable times in the "time-saving game state 1" is "1", the number of playable times in the "time-saving game state 2" is not set. In the next game, the time-saving game state (“time-saving game state 1”) may be terminated and the normal game state may be controlled.
This can prevent the player from becoming significantly more advantageous.

In the above example, the case where the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" is controlled has been described, but the "time saving game state 2" is controlled. When the "special symbol 11" in the above-mentioned example is stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned state, it may be handled in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 7B is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 7A to 7B, the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (big hit, loss). It is attached, and for reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big hit" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7B, and refers to the current set value, the probability state, and the jackpot. Based on the judgment random value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7A, when the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal gaming state, 200 jackpots of "100" to "299" The judgment random value is determined to be a "big hit". Then, the random value for jackpot determination other than the jackpot determination is determined to be "missing".

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 8A is a special symbol determination table for jackpots for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 8B is a special symbol determination table when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8B, the special symbol determination table corresponds to the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result. The stop special figure data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated with each other.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a jackpot special symbol for executing the first jackpot game, the special symbol "02" is a jackpot symbol for executing the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "11" is a jackpot symbol. It is a jackpot symbol that executes the third jackpot game.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the first big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 6 times. ing. In the round game, even before the opening time elapses, one round game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the first large winning opening 50. Further, after the end of the first big hit game, the low probability non-time saving game state (time saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second big hit game", a round game in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Further, after the end of the second big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

In the "third big hit game", a round game in which the second big winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to four times. Further, after the end of the third big hit game, the high-probability time-shortening game state (probability-changing game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost fixed.

Although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. May be good.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 8A to 8B, and the type of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the type of the special symbol is based on the random value for determining the special symbol. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the type of the jackpot special symbol and the type of the lost special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without complicating the game.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various lost symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9A is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 9B is a variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination are used. Random value, first hold number (U1) or second hold number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special symbol change time, special figure It is associated with a special figure fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, and refers to the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number value, the first hold number (U1), or the second hold. The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number (U2) and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. There is.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the content (effect mode) of the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is determined according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "ultra-shortening variation", and "long variation" are three effect symbols 70a that fluctuate at high speed. , Means to stop without reaching.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode (expected production) to be caused. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left side region and the right side region. , The mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not). On the other hand, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a means a mode in which the effect symbol 70a is completely stopped. In addition, it means that the stop display of the special symbol TZ is also completely stopped.

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach (first expected production).

Further, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach productions (second expected productions) in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of normal reach, and are executed after normal reach. For example, the two effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70.

Further, the "SPSP reach" is a special reach production (third expected production) in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the super reach, and is executed after the super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special reach effect than the "SP reach". ing.

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach effect (fourth expected effect) in which a big hit is confirmed, and is executed after the normal reach. For example, the main display device 70 is blacked out from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed, and the "SPSP reach" is used in almost the entire display area of the main display device 70. It has become more special reach production than.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is that the types of the special figure variation patterns to be determined are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. 10 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the pre-judgment table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are displayed. , The special map schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special map schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 10, and is based on a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure variation pattern. The pattern is determined, and the look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Various storage areas of the main RAM)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 11A is a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 and / or the second start opening 47 is stored. It is a figure which shows the determination information storage area, FIG. 11 (b) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 11D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal map determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. The special figure determination information storage area is divided into a first special figure determination information holding storage area and a second special figure determination information holding storage area, each of which is divided into a first storage unit and a fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. It corresponds to the unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4, respectively. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display unit 70D1 and the second display unit 70D2 of the second reservation icon display area 70D. Corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (first reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and these special figure determinations are made. The number of first hold icons corresponding to the information will be displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the number of special figure determination information (second reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and corresponds to these determination information. The number of hold icons will be displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 11B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random value.

Then, when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored most in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the number of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is the smallest in which the special figure determination information is not stored. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

When the start condition of the variation display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The determination information is shifted and will be referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reserved storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), the normal map determination information storage area varies from the normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a normal map determination information storage area in which display is being executed, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. The number of normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the normal map determination information reservation storage area is the number of normal map reservation information.

As shown in FIG. 11D, each storage unit has a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern for storing a random number value for determining a normal map variation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and the normal map determination information is acquired, it is acquired in the storage unit having the smallest number in which the normal map determination information is not stored in the normal map determination information reserved storage area. The normal map judgment information is stored.

When the start condition of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the normal figure judgment information execution storage area, shifts the normal figure judgment information stored in the 1st storage unit of the normal figure judgment information hold storage area. And will usually be referenced to perform variable display of symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, processing for preparing to start control of the game, processing for initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, and the like are performed. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is transferred to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, the power supply can be momentarily dropped in voltage. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is transferred to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is transferred to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt described later, and a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

The main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (power recovery) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S61, and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S17 as if it is a power recovery, and if the backup flag is not saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time or the power is restored irregularly. The process is transferred to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S18 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal as it is the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. Will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the range is appropriate, the process is transferred to step S23, and if it is determined that the range is not appropriate, the process is transferred to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying the error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the main display device 70 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Non-recovery indicating that a display, the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error has occurred from the audio output device 9. Possible error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S31. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" is to display an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on to make the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized. The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. The indicated power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 do not display the initial screen, but the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display a display notifying that the RWM area has been cleared. You may do so.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S26 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process is performed to display the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

The "power recovery notification" is to display the power recovery screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or to display a frame in order to make the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. That the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and that the power is restored from the audio output device 9 (from a power failure). The indicated power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) is output over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure holdings, and the main display device 70 is processed to display the first holding icon and the second holding icon.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, and permits all interrupts in step S33 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of the board 110) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start before the game progress control is started, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the gaming machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing trouble to the gaming store and the player.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the status confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, and the frame are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel, and on the back surface (back surface), it is recognized that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. It is possible. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, although the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including the information indicating the current game state, the current game state is sent after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the RWM area for games and the checksum of the RWM area for information may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting changing signal (security signal) in step S19-1. Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90 starts to output a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and even after the setting change is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is to perform a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or to set the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74. It is a notification that all lights are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the change. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the settings are being changed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a acquires the set value from the set value area in step S19-4, and determines whether or not the acquired set value is within the appropriate range (1 to 4) in step S19-5. If it is determined that the range is appropriate, the process is transferred to step S19-7, and if it is determined that the range is not appropriate, the acquisition setting value is updated to "1" in step S19-6.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a displays the set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the acquisition set value (1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-8 whether or not the set value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-9, and if there is no set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-12.

The main CPU 110a updates the acquisition set value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-10. Specifically, when the acquisition setting value is "5", the process of correcting the acquisition setting value to "1" is performed.

In step S19-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the updated acquisition setting values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the confirmation by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-12, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. 2 Performs processing for initial operation of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-13 whether or not the set value determination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S19-14 assuming that the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process is transferred to step S19-8 as it may be performed.

The main CPU 110a saves the updated acquisition set value in the set value area in step S19-14, ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-15, and in step S19-16. The display of the status confirmation display 68 is terminated.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S19-18, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends due to the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the gaming machine is unexpected. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the inconvenience to the gaming store and the player by performing the operation.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode), the game clerk is on the front (front surface) of the game machine 1 with a status confirmation display 68, a main display device 70, a sub display device 71, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the lighting device 74, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting value confirmation operation was set so that the setting key switch 112a was changed from the ON state to the OFF state, but the RWM clear switch 111a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be OFF. It may be changed from the state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the opening detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be in the ON state.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting change end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear preparation screen for the main display device 70 to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or to notify "Please press the RWM clear switch again" from the voice output device 9. This is a notification that outputs voice over a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. The processing for initial operation of the two major winning opening opening / closing solenoids 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-3 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S24-4 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, step S24-2 is performed. Move the process.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) a region other than the set value region of the game RWM region of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear process.

The RWM clear preparation specification command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear process, and the power-on specification command is transmitted after the RWM clear process is completed. However, the RWM clear specification command is transmitted instead of the power-on specification command. You may try to do it. In this case, the RWM clear designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) in step S27-1. Specifically, the output of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S27-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" is to display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or to confirm the setting of the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74. It is a notification that all lights are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. Become.

In step S27-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (during game) area, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game. 2 Performs processing for initial operation of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S27-6 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S27-7, ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8, and ends the confirmation end operation in step S27-9. As the setting confirmation mode ends, processing is performed to stop the initial operation of various drive sources, and the current setting confirmation processing ends.

The setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the setting confirmation process is completed. However, the setting confirmation start specification command is sent instead of the setting confirmation specification command. Then, instead of the power recovery specification command, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, it is possible to output many types of signals even with a limited number of signal terminals, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

Further, from the start of power supply until the game progress control (timer interruption of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), inputs other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are input. Devices (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first major winning opening detection switch 50a, second major winning opening The presence / absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, and the radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

That is, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if the game ball wins in various winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalid and the gaming ball is not paid out. It has become like. Further, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the special symbol changes in the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. The display is not performed and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalid and the normal symbol display is not displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 62, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the game will be performed by the player before the progress control of the game is started.

Further, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if various errors occur, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that fraudulent acts will be performed before the progress control of the game is started.

The setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal may be output from different output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds). It is executed by that, and it is designed to control the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area in step S100, and performs the time control process (game program) in step S110. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as a stop time of a special symbol and an opening time of a special electric accessory.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process (game program) in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for jackpot judgment, the random number value for special symbol judgment, the random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the random number value for hit judgment, the random number value for normal symbol judgment, and the random number value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new lap initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program) in step S130. Specifically, as in step S30, the process of updating the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program). Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the large winning opening. Processing such as opening / closing (first prize opening 50, second prize opening 56) and setting the game state is performed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the Fuzu-fuden control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the acquired normal map determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44, variable display of the normal symbol, opening / closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal map and electric control process, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, referring to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second). A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the large winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning in the second starting port 47 when not in an auxiliary game, or a game ball winning in a large winning opening when not in a special game, various winnings An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls won in the mouth and the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning ball to flow down do not match, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period, a door opening error that the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and the RWM clear switch 111a while the progress control of the game is being performed. And an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is determined, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs a data creation process (game program) in step S700. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second major winning. Large prize opening / closing data output to the mouth opening / closing solenoid 57b, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, and the first 1 Performs a process of creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, and special symbol. Display output processing that outputs signals such as hold display data and normal symbol hold display data, and a payout status confirmation specification command for checking the payout status of the payout control board 120 can be sent to the payout control board 120, and awards to be described later. With reference to the ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), a process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. .. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of payouts during normal game, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, starting opening of large winning opening) during normal gaming state, and out during normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. Perform processing.

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if the set value is changed (regardless of the set value), so these are the game record information. By counting the numbers, it is possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which is useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a normally performs a base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is initially updated when the total number of outs in the normal game state reaches 300, and then updated every time the total number of outs in the normal game state reaches 60,000. , The base storage area is the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored, the second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, and the game section two times before. A third area for storing the normal base value and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the game section three times before are provided, and the normal base value for the four game sections including the present is provided. Will be saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return time process. Specifically, a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode) before the game progress control is started, so that the payout is performed. Since the number and the number of outs are not counted, the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the general winning opening detection switch input process in step S210. Specifically, for determining whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and paying out the winning ball from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, has the detection signal been input from the first prize opening detection switch 50a or the second prize opening detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball has won the first prize opening 50 or the second prize opening 56. It is determined whether or not the prize ball has been paid out, and a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal map gate 44, and acquiring and storing the normal map determination information. I do. When this process is completed, the current input control process is terminated.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Ends the input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the three prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first hold number (U1) is less than 4. If the first hold number (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the first hold number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch input process this time is performed. To finish.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the first hold number (U1) is set. The corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S230-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving state (normal gaming state) is in progress. If the player is in the non-time saving state, the process is transferred to step S230-9 to perform the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the process is not in the non-time saving state. In this case, the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is not performed, and the present first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is referred to, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (special figure). A process of generating a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the scheduled fluctuation pattern) is performed.

Since this "first look-ahead designation command" is information that can specify the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, the effect control board 130 uses the first look-ahead designation command to determine the type of special symbol, the determination result of jackpot determination, and the special symbol. The type can also be specified.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command generated in step S230-9 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and even before the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started, the jackpot game is over one or a plurality of variation displays. The look-ahead notice (look-ahead continuous effect, icon change effect) that is expected to be executed will be executed.

As for the second start port detection switch input process, the same process as the first start port detection switch input process is performed. Therefore, the first start port detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counters, and the first hold number (U1). ), 1st special figure determination information hold storage area, non-time saving state, 1st look-ahead processing, 1st look-ahead designation command part, 2nd start port detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counters, 2nd hold number (U2) ), The second special figure determination information hold storage area, the time saving state, the second look-ahead process, and the second look-ahead designation command may be read.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the first hold number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the second hold. Further, the first reserved information may not be stored by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the first hold. Further, the second reserved storage may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric control process is completed.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the change display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the hold storage (special figure judgment information), the change time is set, and the start command (special). Performs processing for transmitting the symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) to the effect control board 130, processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and the like. The special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for the purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped according to the passage of the variation time, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (symbol confirmation command) is output. The special symbol variation processing (step S320) for performing the processing for transmitting to 130, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and the like is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is lost due to the passage of the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol, and the big hit special symbol is a big hit. The opening time of the game is set, and the processing for transmitting the opening designation command to the effect control board 130 and the special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the big hit game is based on the end of the final round game. The jackpot game process (step S340) for setting the ending time of the above and transmitting the ending designation command to the effect control board 130, the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", and the like is executed. ..

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing for ending the jackpot game with the passage of the ending time and the gaming state after the jackpot end (low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state, high probability number of times, time saving number of times) ), The special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0", and the big hit game end processing (step S350) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
A special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process is moved to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a updates the second hold number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second hold number (U2) after the subtraction is performed. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, in the second special figure determination information storage area. The stored data is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been played is deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines in step S310-4 whether or not the first hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first hold number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first hold number (U1) after the subtraction. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-8. The shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure judgment information used in the previous game is deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the first hold number (U1) and the second hold number (U2) after subtraction is displayed in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reserved storage area and shifted (the second reserved number is first reserved). Although it was decided to prioritize subtraction over the number, the first special figure determination information reserved storage area or the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted (first) in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. The number of holds and the number of second holds may be subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special figure determination information hold storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure judgment information hold storage area (the first hold number may be set). It may be subtracted in preference to the second reserved number).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the special figure judgment information (random value for big hit judgment) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, is collated with the big hit judgment table shown in FIG. 7, and the big hit is obtained. Judge whether or not. Further, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 and stopped. Performs the process of determining the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is obtained. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output by the output control process of the step S800. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will display the variation of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state means a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is used for producing the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demo effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the information saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching time counter has a display switching value "0". If the display switching value is "0", the process is transferred to step 850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process is performed. , The process is transferred to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmation flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S850-4 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process is transferred to step S850-3 to confirm the lighting of the device 113. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is performed. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a displays information based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value with reference to a display data determination table (not shown). The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in step S850-6 in the output data area of the information RWM area as the display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process of step S880 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. Will be done. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S850-8, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is transferred to step S850-15. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the information display 113 is displayed. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is transferred to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. ..

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S85-13, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, the main RAM 110c is used for the information of the main RAM 110c by the above-mentioned game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is returned, and the performance display data setting process this time is terminated.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the table of display information of FIG. 23, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed on the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, and the second large winning opening 56 by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out ball composed of the game balls that have flowed into the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first major winning opening detection switch 50a, the second major winning opening detection switch. Every time the game ball is detected by 56a, the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) may be added by one.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interruptions in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears 0) the entire RWM area (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step E6, all interruptions are permitted.

The sub CPU 130a performs the sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit)
A timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130 m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs the timer update process in step E200. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary for executing the effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display or the special game (big hit game) is not executed, and the customer waiting time has elapsed. Based on the above, the process for executing the customer waiting effect for stimulating the player's motivation to play is performed.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot notice effect execution process. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed based on the execution information of the jackpot notice effect set in the sub RAM 130c in the jackpot notice effect determination process described later (expecting that the jackpot game is executed). ) Perform processing to execute the jackpot notice effect.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a light emission effect execution process at the time of winning. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed based on the execution information of the flashing effect at the time of winning set in the sub RAM 130c in the process of determining the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which will be described later. (Expect) Perform the process to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E700. Specifically, the update condition (game state) of the effect mode (effect stage) in which the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, main display device 70, sub display device 71, etc. are defined. Change, winning the mode update lottery, executing SP / SPSP reach effect that results in a loss, etc.) is determined, and if the update condition is satisfied, the effect mode is set to one of multiple effect modes. Perform the process to update to.

The "effect mode" includes the effect modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving game state) and the effect modes D to E set in the probability variation game state (high probability time saving game state). An effect mode F that is set in a gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) is provided. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, confirming the setting, etc.), the effect mode initially set is always the effect mode A, and the power supply is used. The effect mode that is set first when controlled to the probabilistic gaming state when it is ON is always the effect mode D, and the effect mode that is set first when it is controlled to the time-saving gaming state when the power is turned on. Is always in the production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, it performs a process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a command has been received. If a command is received, the process is transferred to step E302, and if no command is received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E303, and if it is not a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is transferred to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is transferred to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs the power ON notification process in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power recovery designation command. If this is the case, the process of setting the notification instruction command for executing the power recovery notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification, and the first movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, first). 2 Movable member 73b)), a process for executing an initial operation for operating the second movable effect device 75 and a sub-display device 71 in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the panel lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like are performed. Will be.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error-type designation command, the process is transferred to step E309, and if it is not an error-type specification command, the process is transferred to step E310.

The "error-based specification command" includes an unrecoverable error specification command, an illegal winning error specification command, an abnormal winning error specification command, a magnetic error specification command, a radio wave error specification command, a door open error start specification command, and a door open error end specification. Includes commands, operation error specification commands, dish full error specification commands, payout error specification commands, etc. The order of priority of each error is as follows: payout error = dish full error <operation error <door opening error <radio error = magnetic error <abnormal winning error = illegal winning error <unrecoverable error.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error specification command (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification) , Discharge error notification, payout error notification, etc.), the notification command command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. It should be noted that various error notifications are performed using at least one of the output of an error sound, the error emission of a lamp, and the display of an error image. Specifically, in the dish full error notification, there is no lamp error emission, and in the payout abnormality notification, there is no error sound output, but in other error notifications, the error sound output, the lamp error emission, and the error. All of the image display is done.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E311. If it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, a process of updating the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command is performed.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process is transferred to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of updating the special figure hold number stored in the sub RAM 130c and setting an effect instruction command for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. I do. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icons displayed on the main display device 70 is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a look-ahead designation command. If it is a look-ahead designation command, set the received look-ahead designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) in the look-ahead storage area described later in the sub RAM 130c, and then move to step E315. If it is not a look-ahead designation command, The process is transferred to step E318.

The "look-ahead storage area" sequentially stores the first look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing the look-ahead information (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, etc.) based on the first look-ahead designation command, and the hold information based on the second look-ahead designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing the look-ahead information (0th storage unit) for storing the look-ahead information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) during execution, and the first look-ahead storage unit and the first The two look-ahead storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned first special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the first look-ahead storage unit corresponds to the first to fourth storage units. The look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to one reserved number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) one number to a younger storage unit each time the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second look-ahead designation command is received, the second look-ahead storage unit corresponds to the first to fourth storage units. 2 Look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reserved numbers. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to move (shift) one number to a younger storage unit each time the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special figure determination information execution storage area, and is the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. To.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect determination process in step E315. Specifically, the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by displaying the hold icon displayed on the main display device 70 or the icon in a special display mode (special icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon) (special display mode). Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect suggesting (possibility), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316-A, the sub CPU 130a performs a light emission effect determination process at the time of winning. Specifically, when the game ball is awarded to the starting port, the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is made to emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode. Performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which suggests the degree of expectation to be executed, and the effect mode of the light emitting effect at the time of winning to be executed.

In step E316-B, the sub CPU 130a performs a vibration effect determination process at the time of winning. Specifically, by driving the button drive device 17b for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second) at the time of winning the game ball to the starting port, a vibration effect at the time of winning suggesting the expectation that the special game is executed is executed. Performs processing to determine whether or not.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols (suggesting the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the look-ahead continuous effect and the type of the look-ahead continuous effect to be executed are determined, and an effect instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to execute the look-ahead continuous effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs the symbol data determination process in step E319. Specifically, a process of determining an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variation effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line is performed.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process is transferred to step E321, and if it is not a special map variation pattern designation command, the process is transferred to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs the variation effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the main display device 70, is determined, and the variation effect pattern is shown. The process of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the jackpot advance notice effect determination process in step E322. Specifically, whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (expected that the jackpot game will be executed) based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E321. Further, the effect mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and the execution information of the jackpot advance notice effect is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The details of the jackpot notice effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon display mode update process in step E323. Specifically, a process for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, or changing the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a symbol determination command (stop command). If it is a symbol confirmation command (stop command), the process is transferred to step E326, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command (stop command), the process is transferred to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the temporarily stopped state and ending the variable effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variation effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designated command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process is transferred to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes an opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like.

In step E328, the sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the jackpot game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the round specification command. To determine the round effect of the round game and set the effect instruction command for executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and in the case of the ending designation command, determine the ending effect of the jackpot game. Then, a process of setting an effect instruction command for executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process is moved to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E315-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a non-time saving state (normal game state) when the jackpot game is not being executed and the first look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first start port 45 is received. When the second look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the second start port 47 is received, the time saving state (probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state) may be mentioned.

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance hold (holding storage corresponding to the previously received look-ahead designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the look-ahead information storage area. Is determined. If there is a change scenario, the process is transferred to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process is transferred to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and steps E315-5. In, the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, with reference to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 28, a plurality of icons are based on the type of the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from the final display modes. When the icon final display mode is determined in the process, the emission color (final emission color) of the start port lamp 76 is determined according to the determined icon final display mode. For example, if the icon final display mode is "red", the emission color (final emission color) of the start port lamp 76 is also "red".

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (white icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is a special icon (any of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 29) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the final disappearance of the icon.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 29, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Determine one change scenario from multiple change scenarios. When the change scenario is determined in the process, the change mode of the emission color of the start port lamp 76 is determined according to the determined change scenario. For example, when the "scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, it emits light in "white" at the time of winning, emits light in "white" before one fluctuation, and emits light in "blue" in the fluctuation.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is a display mode of the icon first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device) from the determined change scenario, and the winning icon. The icon display command (and the start port lamp light emission command) of is set in the transmission buffer, and the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or the start port. The start port lamp 76 emits light in a display mode corresponding to the lamp light emission command (for example, blue or red), or is displayed as a predetermined sound (when displayed by a normal icon, the first winning sound or a special icon). In that case, the second winning sound) will be output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or the start port. The start port lamp 76 emits light in a display mode (for example, white) corresponding to the lamp light emission command, or a predetermined effect sound (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the case where the advance hold does not include the one that performs the reach effect is the case where the reach effect is performed. It is also possible to make the icon change effect easier to be executed (executed at a higher rate) than the case where the icon change effect is included. In addition, the icon change when the advance hold does not include a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) than when a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.) is included. The effect may be easy to execute (executed at a high rate), or vice versa.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 28 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of special symbol corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final The display mode is associated with the display mode, and as a reference, the effect content of the scheduled fluctuation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead designation command is described.

In the final display mode of the icon, a normal icon (a white icon whose shape is set for each effect mode) that does not suggest a jackpot expectation and a special icon that suggests a jackpot expectation (common to a plurality of effect modes). The shape blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) is set. In addition, the expectation of a big hit related to the special icon is higher in the order of blue icon <red icon (SP reach or higher confirmed) <rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 29 is a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state (icon of the first special symbol) or the specific game state (icon of the second special symbol). For example, the specific game is determined. In the case of a state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate of change of the icon due to the change is higher than the rate of change of the icon due to the advance change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). You may. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher in the specific gaming state (icon of the second special symbol) than in the normal gaming state (icon of the first special symbol). You may.

(Change pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a change pattern determination table for determining the hold / change pattern of the icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above.

FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern of a hold icon, and FIGS. 30B to 30C are change patterns of the icon. It is a figure which shows the change pattern determination table for the said icon which is referred when determining.

The change pattern determination table corresponds to the mode of hold / icon change in this variation effect, variation effect pattern, selection rate of each hold / icon change pattern, and selected hold / icon change pattern type. It is attached, and for reference, each hold / hold in the icon change pattern / change effect occurrence timing and change stage of the icon are described.

The hold / icon change pattern is a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect, or a trigger for the hold / icon to change depending on the character A displayed on the main display device 70. An opportunity effect is performed to hold / the icon is changed by the character A action change pattern and the character B displayed on the main display device 70. The display mode of the icon is changed by performing a trigger effect that triggers the change of the icon by the character B action change pattern in which the display mode of the icon is held / changed and the character C displayed on the main display device 70. A character C action change pattern and a character D action change pattern in which the display mode of the icon changes by performing a trigger effect that triggers the change of the icon by the character D displayed on the main display device 70 are set. ..

The change timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and is classified into the pre-reach effect period that is executed at the beginning of the variable effect. There are during and after normal reach, which are classified into reach production periods that may be performed after.

As a change mode of the hold icon, "1UP" means that the jackpot expectation degree such that the white icon changes to a blue icon or the blue icon changes to a red icon changes to a display mode one step higher. It means that. "2UP" means that the jackpot expectation degree, for example, the white icon changes to a red icon or the blue icon changes to a rainbow icon, changes to a display mode two levels higher. Further, the "SP suggestion" means that the suggestion effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is executed by the character who performed the trigger effect is executed.

The first feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that in the normal reach variation effect, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the SP reach variation effect, the icon change effect targeting this normal reach variation effect is executed. The point that the jackpot expectation is higher when the icon change effect targeting this normal reach variation effect is executed than when it is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when the jackpot game is executed, the ratio of the normal reach variation effect being executed without the icon change effect (hold notice) being executed. However, the ratio of the normal reach variation effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher, and the ratio of the normal reach variation effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the ratio of the icon change effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed. The rate at which the SP reach effect is executed is higher, and the rate at which the SP SP reach effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the SP reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed. When the jackpot game is not executed, the rate at which the SP reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the normal reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed. The point is that the ratio of the SP SP reach effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed is lower than the ratio of the SP reach effect being executed after the icon change effect is executed. Be done. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the look-ahead effect (here, the icon change effect) is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when the normal reach variation effect, the SP reach variation effect, or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the pre-reach effect period is more than the reach effect period. The point is that the icon change effect is executed (prone to occur) at a higher rate. By doing so, the reach effect and the icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the SP reach fluctuation effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach effect, during the SPSP reach effect) (during the SP reach effect). It is easy to occur), but the icon change effect may not be executed after the normal reach.

The fourth feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when the normal reach variation effect, the SP reach variation effect, or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the pre-reach effect period is more than the reach effect period. The point is that the hold icon change effect is executed (prone to occur) at a higher rate. By doing so, the reach effect and the hold icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. When the SP reach fluctuation effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach effect, during the SPSP reach effect) (during the SP reach effect). It is easy to occur), but the icon change effect may not be executed after the normal reach.

The fifth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that the type of suggestive effect (character as an opportunity to change the hold icon) suggesting that the hold icon changes is the hold icon. There are different points depending on the content of the change (character A in the case of white → blue, character B in the case of blue → red). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that the type of suggestive effect (character as an opportunity to change the icon) suggesting that the icon changes is the type of the icon. Different points depending on the content of change (character A in the case of white → blue, character B in the case of blue → red, character C in the case of white → red, character D in the case of blue → rainbow) Be done. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, the SP reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) that suggests, but if the icon is a red icon, the SP reach effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) has been executed. There are points. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the delight of the player for the execution of the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Pre-reading continuous production determination process of the production control unit)
A look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E317-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the read-ahead designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled fluctuation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the feasible period of the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the runnable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the process is moved to step E317-4, and if it is not the runnable period of the look-ahead zone effect, the look-ahead zone effect based on the read-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E317-6.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is a zone-in-zone effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image or a red thermal zone image, output of a zone BGM or a thermal zone BGM) over one or a plurality of variable effects. This is a production that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by the background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of pre-reading continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead zone effect" includes that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the advance hold, and that the jackpot game is not in progress. In the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed, and the look-ahead zone effect may not be executed except in the normal game state. In the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed, and the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed except in the normal game state. The zone effect may be made feasible.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 31) for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario. The details of the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled fluctuation pattern), and the selection rate of each advance notice scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading zone effect scenario determined in step E317-7 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the look-ahead effect effect. If it is the pre-reading effect effect executable period, the process is moved to step E317-9, and if it is not the pre-reading effect effect executable period, the pre-reading effect effect based on the pre-reading specification command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E317-11.

The "look-ahead effect effect" is an effect effect (display of a light emitting effect image or an effect sound effect around the three effect symbols 70a that start the variable display) over one or more variable effects (including a variable effect that becomes a big hit). It is an effect that intermittently suggests the expectation that the special game will be executed by executing the output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) by the light emission effect image and sound information (light emission display effect at the start of fluctuation). , It is a kind of look-ahead continuous production.

The "executable period of the look-ahead effect effect" includes that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead effect effect in the advance hold, and that the jackpot game is not being executed. In the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect can be executed, and the look-ahead effect effect may not be executed except in the normal game state. In the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect cannot be executed. The effect effect may be made executable.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table. The details of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the look-ahead effect effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each effect scenario. Based on (%), one look-ahead effect effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead effect effect scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead effect effect as an effect scenario in which the look-ahead effect effect is not executed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the pre-reading effect effect scenario determined in step E317-12 in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the hold number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead effect effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead effect effect is performed. When this process is completed, the pre-reading continuous effect determination process is terminated.

(Look-ahead zone production scenario determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the effect scenario of each look-ahead zone effect, and the selected look-ahead. The effect scenarios of the zone effect are associated with each other, and as a reference, the pre-variation in each effect scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect in the change are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "zone" means that the normal zone effect (displaying the look-ahead zone background image, displaying the blue zone image, and outputting the zone BGM) is executed, and the "heat zone" means that the normal zone is used. The effect in the heat zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the red heat zone image, output of the heat zone BGM), which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect, is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), and a scenario in which the zone-in-zone effect is not executed during the pre-variation and the zone-in-zone effect is executed during the change (for example). For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which the effect in the zone is executed during the pre-variation and the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is an effect scenario in which the effect mode of the effect in the zone does not progress (change) to an effect mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high, and an effect of the effect in the zone. One point is that a production scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a production mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the production mode of the production in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the change is more likely to develop (change) the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect than the pre-variation. By doing so, it becomes easy to maintain the expectation of the player for a long period of time, and the expectation of the player can be climaxed in the fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the advance variation may make it easier for the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect to progress (develop) than the variation.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead effect effect effect scenario in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

In the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the effect scenario of each look-ahead effect effect, and the selected look-ahead. The effect scenario is associated with the effect effect, and as a reference, the pre-variation in each effect scenario and the effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect in the variation are described.

"Preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

The "blue effect" means that a blue light emitting effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a and a blue effect sound effect is output, and the "red effect" means that the blue effect is displayed around the effect symbol 70a. A red light emitting effect image with a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect image is displayed, and a red effect sound effect is output.

The look-ahead effect effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead effect effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), or a scenario in which the effect effect is not executed during the pre-variation and the effect effect is executed during the change (for example). A scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which the effect effect is executed during the pre-variation and the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33 is an effect scenario in which the effect effect effect mode does not progress (change) to an effect mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high, and an effect effect effect effect mode. One point is that a production scenario that progresses (changes) to a production mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high is set. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the production mode of the effect effect progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead effect effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the change is more likely to develop (change) the effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect than the pre-variation. By doing so, it becomes easy to maintain the expectation of the player for a long period of time, and the expectation of the player can be climaxed in the fluctuation, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the pre-variation may make it easier for the effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect to progress (develop) than the variation.

Further, as an effect mode of the look-ahead effect effect, an effect image of a type in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed (for example, a rainbow effect) may be provided, or an effect image of a type in which the expectation of a jackpot is lower than that of the blue effect image (for example). , White effect) may be provided.

In addition, while the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed. You may do it.

Further, in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead effect effect is executed. May be good.

Further, in the look-ahead effect effect, the light emission effect image is not displayed around the three effect symbols 70a, but only around the effect symbol 70a in one of the left middle right columns (for example, the center column). May be displayed.

Further, when displaying the light emission effect image in the look-ahead effect effect, the frame lighting device 10 is made to emit light in an effect light emission mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light emission effect image displayed around the effect symbol 70a). You may do it.

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
The jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step E322-1, and in step E322-2, the notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal variation). The dialogue advance notice pattern is determined using the dialogue advance notice effect determination table (see FIG. 35) for determining. Specifically, the dialogue advance notice pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern with reference to the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35.

The "speech notice effect" suggests a jackpot expectation to the main display device 70 in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach effect period (normal fluctuation). This is a kind of jackpot notice effect in which the dialogue image is displayed and the voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the voice output device 9. The dialogue notice effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is supposed to be done.

In step E322-3, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue advance notice pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this dialogue advance notice effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the dialogue advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the dialogue notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-4, the sub CPU 130a provides a character advance notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 36 (a)) for determining a notice pattern of the character advance notice effect executed during the pre-reach effect period (during normal fluctuation). Use to determine the character notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the character advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36 (a), the character advance notice is based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each character advance notice pattern. Determine the pattern.

The "feature notice effect" means that the first movable member 73a performs a predetermined operation (small descent or large descent, which will be described later) at a predetermined timing during the pre-reach effect period (normal fluctuation) to obtain a jackpot expectation. It is one of the suggested jackpot notice productions.

In step E322-5, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the bonus advance notice effect according to the bonus notice pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of the character advance notice effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the character advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the character advance notice pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing the blackout effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is a variable effect pattern in which a reach effect equal to or higher than the normal reach is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern in which the blackout effect can be executed, the process is transferred to step E322-7, and if it is not a variable effect pattern in which the blackout effect can be executed, step E322 is assumed that the blackout effect is not executed. Move the process to -9.

In step E322-7, the sub CPU 130a is black using a blackout effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36B) for determining an effect pattern of the blackout effect executed during the reach effect period (normal reach). Determine the out effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the blackout effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36B, the blackout effect is based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern. Determine the pattern.

The "blackout effect" means that the main display device 70 is darkened during the reach effect period (normal reach) and the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (for example, 2 seconds) that occurs during the darkening period. , It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which a development production suggesting whether or not to develop into an SP reach production is executed. The blackout effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed after the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is supposed to be done.

In step E322-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the blackout effect according to the blackout effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this blackout effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing the cut-in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the SP reach effect is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. If the cut-in effect is a variable effect pattern that can be executed, the process is transferred to step E322-10, and if the cut-in effect is not an executable variable effect pattern, the cut-in effect is not executed in step E322. Move the process to -12.

The sub CPU 130a uses a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36 (c)) for determining an effect pattern of the cut-in effect executed during the SP reach effect in step E322-10. To determine. Specifically, referring to the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36 (c), the cut-in effect is based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern. Determine the pattern.

The "cut-in effect" is a development suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during the SP reach effect. Is a kind of jackpot notice production that is executed. The cut-in effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed after the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It is supposed to be done.

In step E322-11, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this cut-in effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the cut-in effect is executed. The details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

It is said that "Serif notice effect", "Blackout effect", and "Cut-in effect" will be executed after the valid period has passed even if the effect button 17 is not operated. There is no problem.

In step E322-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing the determined effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the SPSP reach effect is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute the determined effect, the process is transferred to step E322-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute the determined effect, it is assumed that the determined effect is not executed and the process is set to step E322-15. Move the process.

In step E322-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the determined effect pattern using the determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36 (d)) for determining the effect pattern of the determined effect executed during the SPSP reach effect. .. Specifically, the decision effect pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each decision effect pattern with reference to the decision effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36 (d). do.

The "decision effect" is a result of suggesting (notifying) whether or not the jackpot game is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (for example, 4 seconds) that occurs during the SPSP reach effect. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which the suggestion production is executed. The determined effect is a button operation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and is executed after the valid period elapses even if the effect button 17 is not operated. It has become so. Further, the deciding effect may be performed not only during the SPSP reach effect but also during the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, etc. In that case, the normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect may be performed in this order. It is advisable to increase the execution rate of the deciding effect.

Further, in the determination effect, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are lowered to the effect position (a large lowering described later), and the second movable member 73b is moved in the left-right direction to form the frame lighting device 10 and the like. The lighting device 74 for the board, the effect button light emitting LED, etc. emit light in rainbow colors, and the success image (image including the rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, which suggests that the jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is executed by the success effect and the failure image (the image not including the rainbow color) is displayed on the main display device 70 without the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descending to the effect position. There is a decision failure production that suggests that it will not be done.

In step E322-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the determined effect according to the determined effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this decision effect is referred to in the jackpot notice effect execution process of step E500, and the decision effect is executed. The details of the decision effect pattern decision table will be described later.

In step E322-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern capable of executing a definite effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that can execute the final effect, the process is moved to step E322-16, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that can execute the final effect, it is assumed that the final effect is not executed. The decision process ends.

In step E322-16, the sub CPU 130a determines the final effect pattern using the final effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 37) for determining the effect pattern of the final effect executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect. .. Specifically, the definite effect pattern is determined with reference to the definite pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37, based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each definite effect pattern.

The "fixed effect" is a big hit notice effect in which a definite sound (cueinkyuin) that deterministically notifies that a big hit will be made during the execution of a variable effect that becomes a big hit is output, and the firing handle 15 emits a rainbow color. It is a kind of.

In step E322-17, the sub CPU 130a sets the execution information of the definite effect according to the definite effect pattern in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this final effect is referred to in the jackpot advance notice effect execution process of step E500, and the final effect is executed at various timings. The details of the finalized effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 35 is a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table for determining a dialogue advance notice pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The dialogue notice pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variation effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and an effect content (valid period, dialogue advance notice effect content) of each dialogue advance notice pattern. The serif notice pattern 01 is a serif notice pattern in which the serif notice effect is not executed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
The "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the operation-promoting light emission is performed in which the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue content column indicates that one of a plurality of normal dialogues for which it is unknown whether or not a jackpot game may be executed is displayed in black characters. ..
"Chance (black)" indicates that one of a plurality of chance lines suggesting that a jackpot game may be performed is displayed in black.
"Reach (black)" indicates that one reach line that confirms that the reach effect is executed is displayed in black characters.
"Reach (red)" indicates that one reach line that confirms that the reach effect is executed is displayed in red letters.
"Hot (red)" indicates that one hot line suggesting that the jackpot game is likely to be performed is displayed in red.
"Fever (gold)" indicates that one fiery line is displayed in gold letters, which suggests that the jackpot game is likely to be performed.
"Confirmation (rainbow)" indicates that one definite line that confirms that the jackpot game is executed is displayed in gold characters.

The jackpot expectation of each line is in the order of normal line <chance line <reach line (black letters) <reach line (red letters) <hot lines (red letters) <hot lines (gold letters) <confirmed lines (rainbow letters) It is set to be large in.

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
"Weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: weak for only 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
"Medium vibration (1 second)" means that the effect button 17 vibrates in intensity: medium for only 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: strong for only 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each vibration is set so as to increase in the order of weak vibration <medium vibration <strong vibration.

(Character notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 36 (a) is a character advance notice pattern determination table for determining the accessory advance notice pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The character notice pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each character notice pattern, and the character notice content (execution timing, operation mode) of each character notice pattern. ing. It should be noted that the character advance notice pattern 01 is a character advance notice pattern in which the character advance notice effect is not executed.

The "small descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable effect device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position and then returns to the standby position.
"Large descent" means that the movable effect device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to the effect position below the intermediate position, and then returns to the standby position.

The jackpot expectation of each operation mode is set so as to increase in the order of small descent <large descent. Although the execution timing of the character advance notice effect is only at the start of the fluctuation, the character advance notice effect may be executed at other timings as well.

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
“Yes (1 second)” in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates for 1 second with the operation of the movable effect device 73 at the start of fluctuation.

(Blackout production pattern determination table)
FIG. 36B is a blackout effect pattern determination table for determining the blackout effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot judgment result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern, and the effect content (valid period, blackout effect content) of each blackout effect pattern. ing. The blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which the blackout effect is not executed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
The "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the operation-promoting light emission is performed in which the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

The "development failure" in the column of the effect image indicates that the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect fails and ends with the normal reach is executed.
The "weak development effect" indicates that the weak development effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
The "strong development effect" indicates that a weak development effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
“Yes (3 seconds)” in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each production image is set to increase in the order of development failure <weak development production <strong development production.

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 36 (c) is a cut-in effect pattern determination table for determining a cut-in effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot judgment result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the effect content (valid period, cut-in effect content) of each cut-in effect pattern. ing.

"None" in the button image column indicates that the operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 is not displayed during the valid period.
The "non-protruding (dark)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 does not emit light in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.

The "weak cut-in" in the column of the effect image indicates that a weak cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed is displayed.
The "strong cut-in" indicates that a strong cut-in image is displayed, which suggests that a jackpot game may be performed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each production image is set so as to increase in the order of weak cut-in <strong cut-in.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 36D is a determination effect pattern determination table for determining the determination effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The determined effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and an effect content (valid period, determined effect content) of each determined effect pattern. The deciding effect patterns 01 to 02 are deciding effect patterns in which the deciding failure effect is executed, and the deciding effect patterns 11 to 12 are deciding effect patterns in which the deciding success effect is executed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed.
The “protruding (white)” indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light during the effective period is displayed.
The “protruding (rainbow)” indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in the protruding state (specific mode) that emits rainbow light during the valid period is displayed.

The "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that the operation-promoting light emission is performed in which the effect button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) during the valid period.
The “protruding (white)” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation-promoting light emission is performed in which white light is emitted.
The “protruding (rainbow)” indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) during the valid period, and operation-promoting light emission is performed.

The jackpot expectation of each button image and button state is set to increase in the order of non-projection (white) <projection (white) <projection (rainbow).

The "failed image" in the column of the effect image indicates that the determined failure image suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed (≈ lost) is displayed.
The "success image" indicates that a determined success image is displayed to notify that the jackpot game is executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.
“Yes (5 seconds)” indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates with intensity: strong for 5 seconds when the success image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the lapse of the valid period.

Even if the failed image is displayed, it may be notified that the revival effect is executed and the jackpot game is executed after that, so the display of the failed image does not mean that the game is lost. It has become.

(Final production pattern decision table)
FIG. 37 is a final effect pattern determination table for determining a final effect pattern in the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The final effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each final effect pattern, and an execution timing of the final effect in each final effect pattern. The final effect pattern 01 is a final effect pattern in which the final effect is not executed. In addition, the shaded part in the execution timing column of the final effect (for example, the hatched part in the column of (for example, at the start of the normal reach of the (super) shortened fluctuation line, during the effect, effective 2, development effect, etc.)) is applicable. It is an effect content that is not executed (does not exist) in the variable effect pattern.

Further, "effective 1" in the column of the execution timing of the final effect indicates the effective period in the dialogue advance notice effect that may be executed during the normal fluctuation (pre-reach effect).
“Valid 2” indicates the valid period in the blackout effect that may be executed during the normal reach effect.
“Effective 3” indicates the effective period in the cut-in effect that may be executed during the SP reach effect.
“Effective 4” indicates the effective period in the determined effect executed during the SPSP reach effect.
“○” indicates the timing at which the final effect is executed.

As the first feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in the variable effect, the determined success effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 is executed after the execution of the final effect (after the output of the final sound). (The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate), and the decision success effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 is executed without executing the final effect (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a). There are cases where the movable member 73b operates). By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and a feeling of excitement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is the SP reach variation effect in which the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect, and the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect and then the SPSP reach. The execution mode (execution ratio, execution timing) of the finalized effect is different from the SPSP reach variable effect in which the effect is executed, and the finalized effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect. There is a point that the final production is not executed during the valid period of the accompanying jackpot notice production (line notice production, blackout production, cut-in production, decision production). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the final effect is executed when the effect button 17 is to be operated and the motivation to operate the effect button 17 is lowered, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The third feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in the variable effect, the effect button 17 is operated depending on whether the first movable member 73a operates or does not operate due to the accessory advance notice effect. The execution mode of the jackpot notice effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, decision effect) and the execution ratio of the final effect are different, and the final effect can be executed at multiple timings during the variable effect. The point that the final effect is not executed during the valid period of the above-mentioned jackpot advance notice effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, decision effect) can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the final effect is executed when the effect button 17 is to be operated and the motivation to operate the effect button 17 is lowered, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

In addition, among the above-mentioned jackpot notice effects (line notice effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, decision effect), the final effect is executed during the valid period of the cut-in effect in which the operation promotion effect is not executed. May be good.

The fourth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in the variable effect, the final effect can be executed before the decision effect is executed, and the dialogue notice effect with a low jackpot expectation is made. There is a point that it is easier to execute the bonus notice effect for operating the first movable member 73a when the dialogue notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed than when is executed. By doing so, it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the character advance notice effect may be executed not only at the start of the variable effect but also at the start of the reach effect, or may be executed at the timing between the start of the variable effect and the start of the reach effect. In this case, it is advisable to determine at what timing the character advance notice effect is executed by lottery (character advance notice pattern).

The fifth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in the variable effect that is a big hit, the reach effect is in progress rather than the case where the effective period (valid period of the dialogue notice) occurs before the reach effect. There is a point that the effect button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (second state) when the effective period (effective period of the determined effect) occurs. By doing so, it becomes easier to raise the expectation of the player during the reach production than before the reach production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 is not in the protruding state during the valid period of the dialogue advance notice effect executed before the reach effect, but the effect button 17 is in the protruding state at a rate lower than the valid period of the determined effect. You may do so. In this case, the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state at a predetermined ratio only when a big hit occurs, or the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than in the case of a big hit when a loss occurs. You may do it.

The sixth feature of the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that the blackout effect executed during the first period of the reach effect (during the normal reach effect) is later than the first period of the reach effect. The point that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state during the valid period is higher in the determined effect executed during the second period (during the SPSP reach effect). By doing so, it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player in the second period after the first period of the reach production, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect button 17 does not protrude during the effective period of the blackout effect executed in the first period of the reach effect, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a rate lower than the effective period of the determined effect. It may be in a state. In this case, the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state only when a big hit occurs, or the effect button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than in the case of a big hit when a loss occurs. good.

The seventh feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that the jackpot notice effect that can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect is a specific effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17. The first effect (which can be executed at multiple timings during the variable effect and is executed by the operation of the effect button 17), including (line notice effect, blackout effect, cut-in effect, and decision effect). A specific reach variation effect (SP reach variation effect) is being executed, including a cut-in effect) and a second effect (line notice effect, blackout effect, decision effect) that is executed without operating the effect button 17. At another timing (from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach effect) before the execution timing of the specific effect in the above, the execution of the first effect is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the specific reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as the above-mentioned specific effect, the operation of the effect button 17 such as the cut-in effect must be performed separately from the operation non-requested effect that is executed without the operation of the effect button 17 such as the dialogue notice effect and the decision effect. If there is an operation request effect that is not executed, another timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the development effect such as the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect that develops from the normal reach effect (for example, the development effect is in progress but the decision effect is decided). Before the execution of It may be possible to execute a specific effect as an operation request effect at another timing before the execution timing. Further, the execution of the operation request effect may be restricted by a predetermined lottery at another timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the development effect.

The eighth feature relating to the effect using the table shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is a plurality of line advance notice effects having different effect modes (line contents, button vibration mode), and the second jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player. When (full rotation reach effect) is executed, the dialogue advance notice effect of a special mode (the intense heat (gold) of the dialogue advance notice pattern 7) may be executed, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second jackpot game. When one big hit game (SPSP reach effect) is executed, there is a point that the special aspect of the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the second big hit game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the control CPU 141a.

First, the integrated CPU 141a prohibits all interruptions in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial settings such as built-in register settings, access permission to the central RAM 141c, initialization of the entire RWM area of the central RAM 141c (0 clear), and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts. ), Etc., and in step T3, all interruptions are permitted.

The control CPU 141a performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) and display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71) of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. ) Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight, and the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the amount of light). A process for switching the initial value (any of 0 to 5), the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) is performed.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed if the gaming machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is started).

The control CPU 141a performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, it is output from the voice output device 9 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the production sound.

The control CPU 141a performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the display device (main display device 70) is based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. , Sub-display device 71) performs processing for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is restricted (regulated / restricted) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a). It has become. Further, between the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and the time when the progress control of the game is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, the setting confirmation mode, and various types of the board unit 500. An important (high security level) abnormality (power supply) that should be notified in preference to a dish full error or a payout error until the timer interruption is started on the main control board 110 during the initial operation of the drive source. Restrictions occur (regulated / restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound) of turning on, power restoration, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error).

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various production sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction.

The control CPU 141a performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70, sub-display device 71) is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process is transferred to step T9.

The control CPU 141a performs the animation pattern setting process in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of the type corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

The general CPU 141a performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

In step T11, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71) is set in the control RAM 141c. do. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag sets the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing / display of the production image for one frame is scheduled to be completed) is controlled by the control unit 141. Is set by the V blank interrupt process that is executed every time it is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The control CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the control RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the above-mentioned V blank interrupt processing are referred to, and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in the above step T9. , Performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The control CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer. The process of displaying on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71) will be performed. That is, the frame update timing is the start timing or end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable effect, jackpot notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. It has become like. The frame is updated for the effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130 m and the lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84, and the effect operation of the movable effect device 73). It may match the timing, or it may not match the frame update timing.

The control CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI).

As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the effect symbol 70a), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the player can operate it. The volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted (regulated / restricted). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook important points such as the start of the variable effect and the end of the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error, During the notification (output of the notification sound) of the door opening error), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch 22 which can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 which can be operated by the player. Is becoming restricted (regulated / restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store side regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience that the player who is trying to adjust the volume and the light amount does not notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds output from the voice output device 9 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. The volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various production sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormal notification sound due to various production sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that during the notification of abnormality (output of the notification sound), the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, and the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be disabled. May be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit)
FIG. 39 will be used to describe the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit 150. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a has an initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process of the accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17). Set "1" to execute the home return processing.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R103 whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, the return operation to the origin position of the accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) is executed based on the input signal from the position detection sensor. Or perform processing such as setting the initial processing number to "2". The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is “2”. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , End the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 39, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission can be confirmed separately. ..

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 39, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a has a board accessory processing number of "0" indicating a transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71). It is determined whether or not it is. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target for returning to the origin is set in step R105-2. 1 Set in the movable effect device 73, and move the process to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. It is set in the sub display device 71, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “2”. If the board accessory processing number is not "2", the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the board accessory processing number is "2", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-6. It is set in the second movable effect device 75, and the process is transferred to step R105-7.

In step R105-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-8, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-13.

The lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position in step R105-8, and the board accessory in step R105-9. Does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time. Updates the board accessory abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality.

In step R105-10, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-11 assuming that a return error has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value. Moves the process to step R105-14.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a has return abnormality information (first movable effect device return error information, second movable effect device return error information, sub-display device) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven. (Return abnormality information) is set in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-13. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-display device 71 is driven, and the board bonus processing number is "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" so that the second movable effect device 75 can be driven, and if the board accessory processing number is "2", the board role The board accessory processing number is updated to "3" in order to complete the process of returning the object (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) to the origin.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R105-15, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-22.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R105-15 whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-16, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-21.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-17, the effect button 17 is within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-18, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-19 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, and if the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. The origin return processing of is finished.

The lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c in step R105-19, and clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer in step R105-20.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-21. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "3" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R105-23, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-23, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R105-24. Set "2" and end the origin return processing this time.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, the origins of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 whose effect positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on. If they are not in the position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable effect device 73 → sub display device 71 → second movable effect device 75). It is designed to return to the origin position in the order of). Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 are in contact with each other due to difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent both accessories from exerting a load on each other. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the accessory is damaged at the same time.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the frame accessory (frame accessory). It is possible to execute the return operation of the effect button 17) to the origin position at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are performing a return operation and the effect operation is not performed even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 40, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) to the origin position and the frame accessory (frame accessory). When both the return operations to the origin position of the effect button 17) are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separately check the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories. ..

The origin positions of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 are in a predetermined order (first movable effect device 73 → sub display device 71 → second movable effect device 75). However, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started at the same time. By doing so, the time required for the return operation of the first movable effect device 73, the sub-display device 71, and the second movable effect device 75 can be shortened, and the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next can be smoothly performed. It will be possible to migrate.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board bonus processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board bonus is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. .. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 to perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board bonus initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the board bonus initial operation pattern. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable effect device 73, sub-display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42, one initial operation pattern is selected from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine the operation pattern.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-9, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has been completed in all steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the processes, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the processes, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "1", the board bonus processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON time command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is “1”. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. ..

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) and the frame accessory (effect button). It is possible to execute the initial operation of 17) at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various characters, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the various characters from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 constituting the board accessory, the first movable effect device 73 is formed. The initial operation of the effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely damaged or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the effect button 17 is completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the effect button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the above occurs is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71) and the frame accessory (effect button 17). The initial operation process ends when both of the initial operations of are completed. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, it may be unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is such that the other performs the effect operation. Will disappear.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table for determining an initial operation pattern of a board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71). In FIG. 42, for convenience, the first movable effect device 73 is described as the movable effect device 1, and the second movable effect device 75 is described as the movable effect device 2.

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation. The number of steps of is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 04, which are determined when a power-on designation command is received, or when a first power recovery designation command indicating that a customer is waiting is received. Pattern 05-08, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 09 to 12 are set.

"Moveable effect device 2" means that the second movable effect device 75 tilts from the standby position to the effect position, and "return to the origin of the movable effect device 2" means that the second movable effect device 75 stands by. It is an operation to return to the position.

"Movable effect device 1 small descent" is an operation in which the first movable effect device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and "movable effect device 1 large descent". Is an operation in which the first movable effect device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to the effect position below the intermediate position, and "movable effect device 1 return to the origin" means the first movable effect device. 73 is an operation of returning to the standby position.

"Move sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "return to the origin of the sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-display device 71 returns to the standby position. It has become.

The "movable effect device 1LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided in the first movable effect device 73, and the "movable effect device 2LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided in the second movable effect device 75. That is, the "sub-display device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-display device 71.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 10, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73a. This is because 1LED blinks red for abnormality notification.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 07, and the initial operation pattern 11, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described, but in this respect, the sub display device LED is caused by the return abnormality of the sub display device 71. This is because it flashes red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 04, the initial operation pattern 08, and the initial operation pattern 12, the lighting color of the movable effect device 2LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the second movable effect device 75. This is because the 2LEDs blink red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the board accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. (The first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71) have the same operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the panel accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is at least the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, if the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. Alternatively, the operation modes (number of processes, operation of each process) of all the initial operations of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

Further, the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and / or the second movable effect device 75 and / or the sub display device 71 is set when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. When making a difference, the operation that is not in the initial operation when the power is turned on is executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or the operation that is not in the initial operation when the power is restored is executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. You may do it. By doing so, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation due to the power restoration (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, first 2 The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable effect device 75 and the sub display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect devices 1 and 2 LEDs when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. However, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial light emission modes of the movable effect devices 1 and 2 LEDs are the same, but the initial light emission modes of the sub-display device LEDs are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. However, on the contrary, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable production devices 1 and 2 LEDs differs depending on whether the power is turned on or the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the sub-display device LED The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect devices 1 and 2 LEDs and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. (The first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub-display device 71) are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. Therefore, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration that restores the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device 1 and 2 LEDs and the sub display device LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. The sub-display device LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as when the power supply is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the first movable effect device 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If there is no return abnormality in the second movable effect device 75 and the sub display device 71, the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the sub display device 71 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73. If there is a return abnormality in the second movable effect device 75 and there is no return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73 and the sub display device 71, the first movable effect is performed without performing the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75. When the initial operation of the device 73 and the sub display device 71 is performed and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality and the first movable effect device 73 and the second movable effect device 75 have no return abnormality, the sub display device 71 The point is that the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the second movable effect device 75 is performed without performing the initial operation of. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of the command when the power is turned on and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "effect button large rise" is an operation in which the effect button 17 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the effect position (upper position), and the "effect button origin return" means that the effect button 17 is in the standby position. It is an operation to return to.

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the frame accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of (effect button 17) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that it is designed to make it. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is in initial operation during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) at the time of turning on the power and at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the above. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the frame accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the (effect button 17). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 at the time of turning on the power is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that the emission color that is not included in is included. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is produced during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is whether or not the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which is not detected whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 17 is overlaid with the initial operation of the effect button 17 to be detected. Therefore, the operation confirmation of the effect button 17 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 44 is a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. It is a figure which shows. In FIGS. 44 to 62, for convenience, the first movable effect device 73 is referred to as a movable effect device 1, and the second movable effect device 75 is described as a movable effect device 2.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in which 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 emits an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". It is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission (light emission). )do.

When the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 starts.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED, and the lights are waiting for customers (white). When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T9, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the change, and the sub first hold display is displayed. The device 83 has a display mode indicating “0”.

(Specific example when there is a return error in the sub display device after the power is turned on)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. , And the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Will be done.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return error occurring in the sub display device 71, the sub display device LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return error (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process is performed. Is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (light-emitting) in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 starts.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When the process is completed, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the sub-display device 71, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED is completed, and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub display device LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button are started. The LED is turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73 after the power is turned on)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable effect device 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. , And the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Will be done.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable effect device 73, the movable effect device 1LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (light-emitting) in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends. The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 2LED and the sub display device LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 1LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button are started. The LED is turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable effect device 75 after the power is turned on)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. , And the first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Will be done. Since it is assumed that the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality in FIG. 47, the movable effect device 2LED blinks red (abnormality notification) in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality after the light is turned off. Aspect).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

Although a return abnormality has occurred in the second movable effect device 75, the return operation to the origin position of the first movable effect device 73 starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable effect device 75, the movable effect device 2LED continues to blink red (abnormality notification). Aspect) is maintained, and the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (light-emitting) in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends. The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 1 LED and the sub display device LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 2LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button are started. The LED is turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after turning on the power)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the effect symbol 70a. , The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". ..

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the effect button 17 having a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormal notification mode), and the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission.

It should be noted that not starting the initial operation of the effect button 17 corresponds to not executing the "large rise" in the initial operation shown in FIG. 43, and the "continuous vibration (2 seconds) in the initial operation shown in FIG. 43". ) ”And“ intermittent vibration (2 seconds) ”are not included. That is, even if the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and the "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed. In other words, the above-mentioned "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are predetermined regardless of the position of the effect button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the large rise position). When the timing is reached, it can be said that it is executed over a predetermined time.
For example, if "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" or "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" is executed in conjunction with the operating position of the effect button 17 (large ascending position, origin position returned from the large ascending position). Although the effect button 17 can be vibrated without any problem, the effect button 17 vibrates without any problem due to the fact that the effect button 17 cannot move to the large rise position and the origin position returned from the large rise position. There is a concern that even what can be done cannot be confirmed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, even if the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, only "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" in the initial operation are predetermined. The above concern can be resolved by executing the timing over a predetermined time.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends. , Movable effect device 1LED, Movable effect device 2LED, and sub-display device LED end the initial light emission and turn on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T7, the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds). ) Elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are started. Is lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 49 shows a specific case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c. It is a figure which shows an example.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the second movable effect device 75, and The return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED and the movable effect device 2 LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, the sub display device LED is lit in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in blue as the initial light emission. Light.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED, and the lights are waiting for customers (lighting while waiting for customers). Lights up in white).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the change, and the sub first hold display is displayed. The device 83 has a display mode indicating “0”.

(Specific example when there is a return error in the sub display device after power restoration)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the second movable effect device 75, and The return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return error occurring in the sub display device 71, the sub display device LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return error (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process is performed. Is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When the process is completed, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the sub-display device 71, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED is completed, and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "1" is displayed from the voice output device 9. "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub display device LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button are started. The LED is turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device after power restoration)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable effect device 73 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the second movable effect device 75, and The return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable effect device 73, the movable effect device 1LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 2 LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the sub-display device LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends. The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 2LED and the sub display device LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "1" is displayed from the voice output device 9. "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 1LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button are started. The LED is turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable production device after power restoration)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the second movable effect device 75, and The return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence. Since it is assumed that the second movable effect device 75 has a return abnormality in FIG. 52, the movable effect device 2LED blinks red (abnormality notification) in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality after the light is turned off. Aspect).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

Although a return abnormality has occurred in the second movable effect device 75, the return operation to the origin position of the first movable effect device 73 starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable effect device 75, the movable effect device 2LED continues to blink red (abnormality notification). Aspect) is maintained, and the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED is alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the sub-display device LED and the effect button LED are lit (light-emitting) in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5, the initial light emission ends at the effect button LED and lights up while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends. The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75, the initial light emission of the movable effect device 1 LED and the sub display device LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "1" is displayed from the voice output device 9. "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 2LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button are started. The LED is turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the second movable effect device 75, and The return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the effect button 17 having a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormal notification mode), and the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED and the movable effect device 2 LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the sub display device LED is lit in blue as the initial light emission.
Since the point that the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not started is the same as the content described in the description of FIG. 48, the description here will be omitted.

When the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends. , The movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting) after the initial light emission is completed.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are started. Is lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the variable display (loss variable display) of the special symbol and there is hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the second movable effect device 75, and The return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 is being restored including the characters "Please restart the game". The screen is displayed and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the return-returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70, so that the first hold is displayed. The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the number display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating “3”, and the sub second hold display 84 has a display mode indicating “0”.

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5 and the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and the sub at the timing of T7. When the initial operation of the display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed on the main display device 70 (. The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the static display state is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image (). The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the change, and the sub first hold display is displayed. The device 83 has a display mode indicating “2”.

When the state after the power is restored is the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) of the special symbol and there is no hold storage, "0" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the fluctuation effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power is not supplied to the main control board 110. From the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. There are cases where the command communication line of the above is disconnected, cases where the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and the like.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110. Upon receiving the hold number = 0), the main display device 70 keeps the initial screen displayed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED keep off. ..

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T3, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70. However, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the effect symbol of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is displayed on the main display device 70. After the second standby screen in the state where the 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, the variable effect (the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or the corresponding) Change to icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the change, and the sub first hold display is displayed. The device 83 has a display mode indicating “0”.

The specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is the same as the specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received.

(Specific example when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 56 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, the customer is already waiting after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the main display device 70 has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device are displayed. The 2 LEDs, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the main display device 70 The standby screen in which the lost effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed. Sub information display 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold The display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state specification command is received while the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished). Later, or after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), when the demo waiting time has elapsed, the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, The sub-first hold display 83, the sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 is displayed on the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen. Instead, the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the first standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays. An initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission. (Light emission).

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED, and the lights are waiting for customers (lighting while waiting for customers). When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

It should be noted that the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, or the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) are being executed. ) Is executed, and even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted, the main display is performed by the time the power-on specification command as the power-on command is received at the timing of T4. Waiting for customers except that the screen displayed on the device 70 is a variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) and a big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). This is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the initial operation of the various accessories is performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 45 to 48.

Next, a case where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued and the supply of the main power supply is restarted will be described.

When the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, the main display device 70 has the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display are displayed. The device LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the main display device 70 is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (Sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86) Maintain the displayed contents.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, The sub-first hold display 83, the sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the origin of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 is replaced with the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen. , The effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

Then, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission. (Light emission).

After that, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and when the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is completed, the sub display device 71 The initial operation is started.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). It becomes.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already being executed, that is, the variation effect on the main display device 70. When the power recovery designation command is received while the screen is displayed, the timing is the same as after the timing of T2 in the specific example shown in FIG. 54.

Further, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, that is, the opening effect screen on the main display device 70. When a power recovery designation command is received while any of the round effect screen and the ending effect screen is displayed, the timing of T2 of the specific example shown in FIG. 54 is excluded except for the display contents of the main display device 70. The same applies to the following.

Specifically, on the main display device 70, a special jackpot effect screen is displayed instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and a special jackpot effect screen is displayed until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. To maintain. The display of the special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game is completed.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the initial operation of the various accessories is performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 45 to 48.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70. It is possible to display the specific display mode (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the main display device 70 after the restoration to the customer waiting state, and to the variable display of the special symbol and to no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display during restoration) displayed on the main display device 70 after restoration is different. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to display the hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute the hold display when the main display device 70 is performing the specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply, but the sub hold display can execute the hold display. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to grasp the number of reserved memories before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demo effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed. By doing this, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demo production, and the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the sub-variation display (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82) has a special symbol after the control state of the game is restored. Even when the fluctuation display of is executed (the screen being restored is displayed), the fluctuation display (blinking display) is not performed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the returning screen is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70 for the sub hold display (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84). From the time when it is set (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode indicates the number of pending numbers. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of reservations immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In some cases, the sub-variation display (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82) displays fluctuations (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70. Alternatively, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may be set to a display mode indicating the number of holdings in accordance with the start of this variation display. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case of the damage, that is, from the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various accessories is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the return operation of the various accessories without complicating the control related to the return operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) are in the process of returning. The light emitting unit (movable effect device 1 LED, movable effect device 2 LED, sub display device LED, effect button LED) of various accessories is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the character with the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is being continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to surely notify the character having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70. From the timing after the display (when the return operation is completed immediately, the effect symbol 70a is displayed), various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71). , The effect button 17) is initially operated, but when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70. The initial operation of various accessories is performed from the previous timing (displaying the screen during recovery). By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at an appropriate timing according to the state when the power supply is generated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the main display device 70 is used for the board accessory (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17). When the returning screen is displayed (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the number of hold indicators (sub 1st hold indicator 83, sub 2nd hold indicator 84) is held. The initial operation is performed after the display mode is set to indicate. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the board after having the player grasp the number of holdings (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, for the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (during the variable display of the special symbol and the effect). Before the display of the symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) is set to the display mode indicating the number of holdings, and then the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory after letting the player grasp the number of holdings (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Various accessories from the same timing as when the effect is displayed, that is, the timing after the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (when the return operation is completed immediately, the effect symbol 70a is displayed). The initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored only by displaying the initial screen. The operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the main screen is displayed. When a special symbol memory designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the control board 110 to the starting port is received, the winning sound is output. By doing so, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the main screen is displayed. When a fluctuation start command is received from the control board 110, the fluctuation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing so, the start of the variable effect can be executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the main screen is displayed. When a fluctuation start command is received from the control board 110, the fluctuation effect is executed without executing the return operation or the initial operation of various accessories. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation or the initial operation during the execution of the variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the main control board is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the 110 is stopped, the recovery operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. (Including initial emission) is to be executed. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

In addition, during the return operation of various characters and the variation effect (loss effect, jackpot variation effect) after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, or during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). Even so, if the power-on designation command or power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, various accessories are used again. The return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, even during the fluctuation effect (loss effect, jackpot variation effect) or the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is finished, the main control board 110 is reached. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply of the above is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the voice output device 9 does not execute the return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) of various accessories, but the initialization notification sound. May just output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, power is supplied to the main control board 110 even after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on specification command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is supplied again from the main control board 110. When the recovery designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, even during the fluctuation effect (loss effect, jackpot variation effect) or the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is finished, the main control board 110 is reached. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, when only the power supply of the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 is displayed. When the power recovery designation command is received again from, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

(Modification example when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 57 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, the customer is already waiting after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the main display device 70 has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device are displayed. The 2 LEDs, the sub-display device LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the main display device 70 The standby screen in which the lost effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed. Sub information display 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold The display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state specification command is received while the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished). Later, or after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), when the demo waiting time has elapsed, the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the characters "loading", and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the like. The sub-display device LED and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub) The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 is an initial symbol when the power is turned on instead of the initial screen. The first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "135" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 gives an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". The initialization notification sound is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission. (Light emission).

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is performed. When finished, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED, and the lights are waiting for customers (lighting while waiting for customers). When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

It should be noted that the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, or the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) are being executed. ) Is stopped and then restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped. Mainly while waiting for customers, except that the screens displayed in are the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) and the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). This is the same as the case where only the power supply to the control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Next, a case where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued and the supply of the main power supply is restarted will be described.

When the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, the main display device 70 has the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display are displayed. The device LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the main display device 70 is lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (Sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86) Maintain the displayed contents.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the initial screen including the characters "reading" is displayed on the main display device 70, and the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub) The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the origin of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration instead of the initial screen. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

Then, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission. (Light emission).

After that, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and when the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends at the timing of T8, The initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). It becomes.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already being executed, that is, the variation effect on the main display device 70. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped while the screen is displayed and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main display device 70 still has the power supply to the main control board 110. When the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110 after the initial screen including the characters "reading" is displayed, the recovery operation of various accessories is performed. And the initial operation is executed. At this time, on the main display device 70, the returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed instead of the initial screen, and the returning screen is displayed until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. To maintain.

Further, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various characters have already been completed, that is, the opening effect screen on the main display device 70. , Only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped when any of the round effect screen and the ending effect screen is displayed, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted. Even in this case, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and then a power restoration designation command as a power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110 is produced on the control board. When the 130 is received, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are executed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays a special jackpot effect screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot effect screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. do. The display of the special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game is completed.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed is changed to the initial screen different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, and the sub display are displayed from the initial screen display. The device LED and the effect button LED are turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of various accessories from the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, the various accessories are not started from the timing when the initial screen is switched or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen. The initial operation of may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when the power-on designation command is received. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen, or the initial screen is changed to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching.

Also, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (receives the power-on specification command), the initial screen is displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen. You may do it. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching to.

(Modification example when there is a return error in the sub display device after the power is turned on)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a modified example when the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the main display device 70 is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable effect device 75 and the effect button. The return operation to the origin position of 17 is started.

At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the main display device 70 has the effect symbol "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in which 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 emits an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". It is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold of the main display device 70 are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the second movable effect device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 to the origin position starts.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable effect device 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. It blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights (lights) in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub The initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the display device 71.

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED ends, the variation display is started by the sub first variation display 81, and the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect. The device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 has a display mode indicating “0”.

Even when the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, or the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device LED are restored. It flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, and the initial operation processing ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71. It has become like.

Further, even when the power is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, or the sub display device 71, the movable effect device 1LED, the movable effect device 2LED, and the sub display device The LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71. Is supposed to end.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality, only the movable member having the return abnormality is found. Not only that, the initial operation is not executed even for the movable member that has no return abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the movable member having no return abnormality collides with the movable member having the return abnormality and fails. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member on which the return abnormality has not occurred) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (variable effect, jackpot game), and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality, the movable effect device 1LED and the movable effect device 2LED are found. , And the sub-display device LED blinks red to notify the return abnormality. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable member as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided on the movable member having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality, the first movable effect device The initial operation is executed for the effect button 17 that does not collide with the 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to grasp the abnormality of the effect button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality, the effect button 17 is provided. The effect button LED is designed to perform initial light emission without blinking red for notifying the return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that there is no return abnormality in the effect button 17.

When any of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process of the effect button 17 is completed without executing the initial operation. You may do it. In this case, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED may be set to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process of the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be completed without executing the initial operation. good. In this case, the movable effect device 1 LED, the movable effect device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the effect button LED may be set to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Next, using FIGS. 59 to 62, the initial operation of the various accessories (first movable effect device 73, second movable effect device 75, sub-display device 71, effect button 17) described in FIGS. 42 to 58. The mode of the above, the mode of the effect operation, and the like will be described.

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of the first movable member)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode of initial operation and the required time of the first movable effect device 73 (movable effect device 1).
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable effect device 73, "B" indicates the first initial operation position of the first movable effect device 73, and "C". Indicates the second initial operation position of the first movable effect device 73. The first initial operation position of "B" is the same as the first effect position in FIG. 78, which will be described later, and the second initial operation position of "C" is the same as the second effect position in FIG. 60, which will be described later. The position. In the following, it is simply referred to as "A", "B", and "C".
Note that FIG. 59 describes, as an example, the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 (movable effect device 1) when the variable display is performed at the time of power restoration.

(A) shows the aspect of "movable effect device 1 small descent" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 1 small descent", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "B" over about "0.25 S (seconds)" (= about 1 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is said that it will move from "A" to "B" at once without stopping in the middle.
In (a) to (f), the movable effect device 1LED of the first movable effect device 73 is turned off (see FIG. 42).
The "cycle fluctuation" described in FIGS. 59 to 62 is a line on the special symbol display during "0.25S (seconds)" when the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "B". It is a variable display, and the details will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

(B) shows a mode in which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) for about "1S" (= about 4 cycle fluctuations) at the "B".

(C) shows the aspect of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 1 return to origin", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "B" to "A" over about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycle fluctuations). In the movement, it is said that it will move from "B" to "A" at once without stopping in the middle.

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 makes a small descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it moves from "B" to "A" rather than the time to move from "A" to "B". The relationship is that the time to do is longer. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "B" to "A" is larger than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "B". It has become a relationship.
In particular, since the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that can move downward (vertically) from "A", in particular, "B" that moves against the vertical direction. By making the time related to the movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time related to the movement from "A" to "B", the initial operation without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable effect device 73. Can be executed.
Also, when comparing including the time stopped at "B", the time stopped at "B" is the longest, then the time to move from "B" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such as the time to move from to "B".
As a result, for example, by using the time when the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "B", the worker (worker, game shop clerk) is informed whether the first movable effect device 73 has a problem or the like. You can check it.

(D) shows the mode of "movable effect device 1 large descent" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 1 large descent", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "C" over about "0.8 S" (= about 3 cycle fluctuations).

(E) shows a mode in which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) for about "2S" (= about 8 cycle fluctuations) at the "C".

(F) shows the aspect of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 1 return to origin", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over about "1.6S" (= about 6 cycle fluctuations).

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 makes a large descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it moves from "C" to "A" rather than the time to move from "A" to "C". The relationship is that the time to do is longer. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "C" to "A" is larger than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "C". It has become a relationship.
In particular, since the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that can move downward (vertically) from "A", it is particularly a movement that opposes the vertical direction. By making the time related to the movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time related to the movement from "A" to "C", the initial operation without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable effect device 73. Can be executed.
Also, when comparing including the time stopped at "C", the time stopped at "C" is the longest, then the time to move from "C" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such as the time to move from to "C".
As a result, for example, by using the time when the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C", the worker (worker, amusement shop clerk) is informed whether the first movable effect device 73 has a problem or the like. You can check it.

Note that FIG. 59 describes the example of power restoration, but the same can be said when the power is turned on. Further, if the above-mentioned momentary power failure occurs during the fluctuation display, the return operation or the initial operation is not executed. In this way, all "power outages" do not result in the event shown in FIG. 59, but the case of a momentary power outage is excluded.

(Specific example of the effect operation mode and required time of the first movable effect device)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode of the effect operation and the required time of the first movable effect device 73.
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable effect device 73, "B" indicates the first effect position of the first movable effect device 73, and "C" indicates the first effect position. , The second effect position of the first movable effect device 73 is shown. The first effect position of "B" is the same as the first initial operation position in FIG. 59 described above, and the second effect position of "C" is the same as the second initial operation position in FIG. 59 described above. The position. In the following, it is simply referred to as "A", "B", and "C". Further, it is assumed that the operation of the moving process is the same as the initial operation mode of FIG. 59.

(A) shows the production mode of the above-mentioned "advancement notice". That is, it indicates that the "movable effect device 1 small descent" was performed when the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ were displayed in a variable manner.
In this "feature notice", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "B" over about "0.5S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycle fluctuations).
In (a) to (c), the movable effect device 1LED of the first movable effect device 73 is alternately lit (light-emitting) in red and white.

(B) indicates that the first movable effect device 73 has moved to "B". Then, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "B", it stays in the "B" for about "3S" (= about 12 cycles fluctuation).
By such an effect operation mode, the expectation that the big hit game is given is improved.

(C) shows the mode of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" in "advance notice". That is, when the position is located between "B" and about "3S", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "B" to "A" over about "0.8S" (= about 3 cycles fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 makes a small descent related to the effect operation and returns to the origin position, it moves from "B" to "A" rather than the time to move from "A" to "B". The relationship is that the time to do is longer.
In particular, since the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that can move downward (vertically) from "A", in particular, "B" that moves against the vertical direction. By making the time related to the movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time related to the movement from "A" to "B", the effect operation without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable effect device 73. Can be executed.

Also, when comparing including the time stopped at "B", the time stopped at "B" is the longest, then the time to move from "B" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such as the time to move from to "B".
As a result, the first movable effect device 73 located at "B" can be focused on, and the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be given can be improved.

Further, as compared with the initial operation of FIG. 59, the movement time from "A" to "B", the stop time at "B", and the movement time from "B" to "A" are all from the initial operation. The production operation takes longer time.
The reason for such a time relationship is to consider the situation in each operation scene.
For example, when the initial operation is performed, the worker (worker, game clerk) needs to pay attention only to the initial operation, so that the worker (worker, game clerk) can operate the operation in a shorter time than the production operation. ) Is unlikely to overlook the initial operation.
On the other hand, when the effect operation is performed, for example, in addition to the character advance notice, various jackpot advance notice effects may be performed at the same time, and the range of attention of the player on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed in the same time as the initial operation or in a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it may be delayed to notice that the jackpot advance notice effect using the first movable effect device 73 is being executed.
Therefore, in the initial operation, the time related to the initial operation is shortened by operating in a shorter time than the effect operation, and in the effect operation, the first movable effect device is operated in a longer time than the initial operation. It solves the concern that it will be delayed to notice that the jackpot notice effect using 73 is being executed.

Further, as compared with the initial operation of FIG. 59, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from “A” to “B”, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the stop time at “B”, and “B”. In any of the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from to "A", the effect motion has a larger number of cycle fluctuations than the initial motion.
Therefore, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 performs the initial operation during the variation display, the player may misunderstand this as the effect operation, but due to the difference in the cycle variation as described above, the special symbol By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed on the display, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the initial operation is performed or the effect operation is performed. This makes it possible to eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

From the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the effect operation has more cycle fluctuations to be executed than the initial operation, and the initial operation has more cycle fluctuations to be executed than the effect operation. It may be said that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable that the initial operation is longer than the effect operation for each movement time and stop time.

(D) shows the production mode of the jackpot notification in the above-mentioned "decision effect". That is, it indicates that the "movable effect device 1 large descent" was performed.
In the jackpot notification in this "decision effect", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "A" to "C" over about "1S (seconds)" (= about 4 cycle fluctuations).
Further, at the position (main display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable effect device 73 moved to "C", the effect image EF that was not displayed at the time of the initial operation (FIG. 59) is displayed. It emphasizes that it was a big hit.
Further, when the movement of the first movable effect device 73 from "A" to "C" is started, the movable effect device 1LED is lit (light-emitting) with a rainbow. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the movable effect device 1 drive motor, which is a part of the panel drive device 75, to move the first movable effect device 73 from "A" to "C", and the panel lighting device 74. The movable effect device 1LED (full color), which is a part of the above, is turned on (lights) with a rainbow. The lighting (light emitting) mode of the rainbow is a lighting (light emitting) mode that deterministically notifies that a big hit has occurred.

(E) shows the mode in which the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C". That is, when the first movable effect device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) for about "5S" (= about 20 cycles fluctuation) at the "C".
Even when the "stop" is performed, the movable effect device 1LED of the first movable effect device 73 is lit (light-emitting) with a rainbow, and the position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable effect device 73 (main). The effect image EF is displayed on the display device 70).

(F) shows the mode of "movable effect device 1 return to origin" in the jackpot notification of "decision effect". That is, when the stop between "5S" is completed at "C", the first movable effect device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over about "2S" (= about 8 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable effect device 73 makes a large descent related to the effect operation and returns to the origin position, it moves from "C" to "A" rather than the time to move from "A" to "C". The relationship is that the time to do is longer.
In particular, since the first movable effect device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that can move downward (vertically) from "A", it is particularly a movement that opposes the vertical direction. By making the time related to the movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time related to the movement from "A" to "C", the effect operation is performed without imposing a load on the drive source of the first movable effect device 73. Can be executed.

Also, when comparing including the time stopped at "C", the time stopped at "C" is the longest, then the time to move from "C" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such as the time to move from to "C".
As a result, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C", the player can be satisfied with the big hit and move from "C" to "A". When you are, by moving it over time rather than moving from "A" to "C", you can immerse the player in the afterglow of becoming a big hit and give further satisfaction. Can be done.

Further, as compared with the initial operation of FIG. 59, the movement time from "A" to "C", the stop time at "C", and the movement time from "C" to "A" are all from the initial operation. The production operation takes longer time.
The reason for such a time relationship is almost the same as the contents described in the above-mentioned points (a) to (c), but since (d) to (f) are jackpot notifications, in particular, " By making the stop time at "C" and the movement time from "C" to "A" longer than the initial operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with the big hit, and the player. There is also the point that you can immerse yourself in the afterglow of becoming a big hit.
In FIGS. 60 (d) to 60 (f), the scene of the jackpot notification of the “decision effect” has been described as an example, but the scene is not limited to this and may be applied to other scenes. For example, it may be applied to a scene for notifying that a high-probability gaming state is given, or it may be applied to a scene for notifying that a time-saving gaming state is given.

Further, as compared with the initial operation of FIG. 59, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from “A” to “C”, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the stop time at “C”, and “C”. In any of the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from to "A", the effect motion has a larger number of cycle fluctuations than the initial motion.
Therefore, for example, when the first movable effect device 73 performs the initial operation during the variation display, the player may misunderstand this as the effect operation, but due to the difference in the cycle variation as described above, the special symbol By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed on the display, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the initial operation is performed or the effect operation is performed. This makes it possible to eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

From the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the effect operation has more cycle fluctuations to be executed than the initial operation, and the initial operation has more cycle fluctuations to be executed than the effect operation. It may be said that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable that the initial operation is longer than the effect operation for each movement time and stop time.

The required time shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 is only an example and may be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time relationship shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time of "A" → "B" may be the same as the travel time of "B" → "A", or "A" → "A" rather than the travel time of "B" → "A". The travel time of "B" may be longer.
Further, although the stop (stay) time is the longest at "B" or "C", it may be the shortest, or it may not be stopped (stay) at "B" or "C".

(Specific example of the initial operation mode of the second movable effect device and the time required for the effect operation mode)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode of the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 and the required time of the mode of the effect operation.
First, "D" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the second movable effect device 75, and "E" indicates the initial operation position (= effect position) of the second movable effect device 75. In the following, it is simply described as "D" and "E".
Note that (first a), (first b), and (first c) in FIG. 61 are examples of the initial operation of the second movable effect device 75 (movable effect device 2) when the fluctuation display is performed at the time of power restoration. Explain to.

(First a) shows an aspect of "moving the movable effect device 2" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movement of the movable effect device 2", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "D" to "E" over about "0.5 S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycle fluctuations). In the movement, it is said that it moves from "D" to "E" at once without stopping in the middle.
In (first a) to (first c), the movable effect device 2LED of the second movable effect device 75 is turned off (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows an embodiment in which the second movable effect device 75 is positioned (stopped) at "E" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the second movable effect device 75 moves to "E", it is positioned (stopped) for about "0.25S" (= about one cycle fluctuation) at the "E".

(First c) shows an aspect of "movable effect device 2 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable effect device 2 return to origin", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "E" to "D" over about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycle fluctuations). In the movement, it is said that it will move from "E" to "D" at once without stopping in the middle.

In this way, when the second movable effect device 75 moves according to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time for moving from "D" to "E" and the time for moving from "E" to "D". And the same time (both about 0.5S). Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "E" to "D" are the same number of times ( Both have a relationship of about 2 cycles).

(Performance a) shows the production mode of the "weak development production" of the above-mentioned "blackout production". That is, it indicates that the "movable effect device 2 movement" was performed when the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ was variablely displayed.
In this "weak development effect", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "D" to "E" over about "0.5 S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycle fluctuations).
In (Acts a) to (Acts c), the movable effect device 2LED of the second movable effect device 75 is lit (light-emitting) in green.

(Performance b) indicates that the second movable effect device 75 has moved to "E". Then, when the second movable effect device 75 moves to "E", it is positioned (stayed) at the "E" for about "0.25S" (= about one cycle fluctuation).

(Performance c) shows the mode of "movable effect device 2 return to origin" in "weak development effect". That is, when the position is located between "E" and about "0.25S", the second movable effect device 75 moves from "E" to "D" over about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the second movable effect device 75 moves related to the effect operation and returns to the origin position, the time for moving from "D" to "E" and the time for moving from "E" to "D". And the same time (both about 0.5S). Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "E" to "D" are the same number of times ( Both have a relationship of about 2 cycles).

Further, comparing (first a) to (first c) with (act a) to (act c), the movement time from "D" to "E" is the same in both the initial operation and the production operation. The time (stop time) located at "E" is the same, and the travel time from "E" to "D" is the same. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "D" to "E" becomes the same for the initial operation and the effect operation (both are about 2 cycle fluctuations), and the stop time at "E" is reached. The number of cycle fluctuations is the same for the initial operation and the production operation (both are about 1 cycle fluctuation), and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "E" to "D" is the initial operation and the production operation. The number of times is the same (both vary by about 2 cycles).

As described above, unlike the first movable effect device 73, the second movable effect device 75 has a movement time and a stop time (and the number of cycle fluctuations executed between them) in the initial operation and the effect operation. It will be the same.
In particular, the second movable effect device 75 is smaller in size and narrower in the movable range than the first movable effect device 73, and is an effect device that can be operated by "decision effect" like the first movable effect device 73. is not it.
Therefore, it can be said that the player has a lower degree of attention than the first movable effect device 73. As a result, it can be said that the first movable effect device 73 is less affected by giving the player a misunderstanding (whether it is an initial operation or an effect operation). In such a movable effect device, the data for driving the second movable effect device 75 can be shared by standardizing the initial operation and the effect operation.

Although the initial operation of FIG. 61 is described by taking power restoration as an example, the same can be said when the power is turned on. Further, if the above-mentioned momentary power failure occurs during the fluctuation display, the return operation or the initial operation is not executed. In this way, all "power outages" do not result in the event shown in FIG. 61, but the case of a momentary power outage is excluded.

(Specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode and the effect operation mode of the sub display device)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of the required time of the mode of the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 and the mode of the effect operation.
First, "F" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the sub display device 71, and "G" indicates the initial operation position (= effect position) of the sub display device 71. It is simply described as "F" and "G".
Note that (first a), (first b), and (first c) in FIG. 62 will be described by exemplifying the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 when the variable display is performed at the time of power restoration.

(First a) shows an aspect of "movement of sub-display device" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "sub-display device movement", the sub-display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" over about "0.6S (seconds)" (= about 2.5 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is said that it moves from "F" to "G" at once without stopping in the middle.
In (first a) to (first c), the sub display device LED of the sub display device 71 is turned off (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows an embodiment in which the sub-display device 71 is positioned (stopped) at "G" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the sub-display device 71 moves to "G", the sub-display device 71 is positioned (stopped) for about "3S" (= about 12 cycle fluctuations) at the "G".

(First c) shows the aspect of "returning to the origin of the sub-display device" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "sub-display device origin return", the sub-display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" over about "0.3S" (= about 1.25 cycle fluctuation). In the movement, it is said that it moves from "G" to "F" at once without stopping in the middle.

In this way, when the sub-display device 71 moves according to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time for moving from "F" to "G" is longer than the time for moving from "G" to "F". The relationship is that it is longer. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "F" to "G" is larger than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "G" to "F". , And so on.
In particular, since the sub-display device 71 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that can move upward (direction opposed to the vertical direction) from "F", the movement is particularly against the vertical direction. By making the time related to the movement from "F" to "G" longer than the time related to the movement from "G" to "F", the initial operation is performed without imposing a load on the drive source of the sub-display device 71. Can be executed.
Also, when comparing including the staying time at "G", the time stopped at "G" is the longest, then the time to move from "F" to "G", and then from "G" to "G". The relationship is such as the time to move to "F".
As a result, for example, by using the time when the sub display device 71 is stopped at "G", the worker (worker, game shop clerk) can be made to confirm whether the sub display device 71 has a problem or the like. can.

(Performance a) shows the production mode of the "strong development production" of the above-mentioned "blackout production". That is, it indicates that the "sub-display device movement" was performed when the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ was variablely displayed.
In this "strong development effect", the sub-display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" over about "0.8S (seconds)" (= about 3 cycles fluctuation).
In (Acts a) to (Acts c), the sub-display device LED of the sub-display device 71 is lit (light-emitting) in green.

(Performance b) indicates that the sub-display device 71 has moved to "G". Then, when the sub-display device 71 moves to "G", it is positioned (stayed) at the "G" for about "4S" (= about 16 cycle fluctuations).

(Performance c) shows the aspect of "returning to the origin of the sub-display device" in the "strong development effect". That is, when the sub-display device 71 is located between "G" and about "4S", the sub-display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" over about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycle fluctuations).

In this way, when the sub-display device 71 moves related to the effect operation and returns to the origin position, the time for moving from "F" to "G" is longer than the time for moving from "G" to "F". The relationship is that it is longer. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "F" to "G" is larger than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "G" to "F". , And so on.

Comparing (first a) to (first c) with (act a) to (act c), the travel time from "F" to "G", the stop time at "G", and "G" In any of the movement times from to "F", the production operation takes longer than the initial operation.
The reason for such a time relationship is to consider the situation in each operation scene.
For example, when the initial operation is performed, it is only necessary to make the worker (worker, game clerk) pay attention to the initial operation, so even if the worker (worker, game clerk) is operated in a shorter time than the production operation, the worker (worker, game clerk) ) Is unlikely to overlook the initial operation.
On the other hand, when the effect operation is performed, for example, in addition to the blackout effect, various jackpot notice effects may be performed at the same time, and the range of attention of the player on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed in the same time as the initial operation or in a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it may be delayed to notice that the jackpot notice effect using the sub display device 71 is being executed.
Therefore, in the initial operation, the sub-display device 71 is operated in a shorter time than the initial operation to shorten the time related to the initial operation, and in the initial operation, the sub-display device 71 is operated in a longer time than the initial operation. It solves the concern that it will be delayed to notice that the jackpot notice effect used is being executed.

Comparing (first a) to (first c) with (act a) to (act c), the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the travel time from "F" to "G" and "G" In both the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the stop time in and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "G" to "F", the production operation is executed more than the initial operation. The relationship is such that the number of cycle fluctuations is large.
Therefore, for example, when the sub display device 71 performs the initial operation during the variable display, the player may mistake this for the effect operation, but due to the difference in the cycle fluctuation as described above, the special symbol display device By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed in, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the initial operation is performed or the effect operation is performed. This makes it possible to eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

From the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the effect operation has more cycle fluctuations to be executed than the initial operation, and the initial operation has more cycle fluctuations to be executed than the effect operation. It may be said that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable that the initial operation is longer than the effect operation for each movement time and stop time.

The required time shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is only an example and may be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time relationship described in FIG. 62 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time of "F" → "G" may be the same as the travel time of "G" → "F", or "G" → "G" rather than the travel time of "F" → "G". The travel time of "F" may be longer.
Further, although the stop (stay) time is set to the longest with "G", it may be the shortest, or it may not be stopped (stay) with "G".

Although the initial operation of FIG. 62 is described by taking power restoration as an example, the same can be said when the power is turned on. Further, if the above-mentioned momentary power failure occurs during the fluctuation display, the return operation or the initial operation is not executed. In this way, all "power outages" do not result in the event shown in FIG. 62, but the case of a momentary power outage is excluded.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated while the setting is changed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started. At the same time, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RWM clear is being prepared is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "solenoid operation are confirmed" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please do" (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started. At the same time, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being confirmed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also completed. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of normal figure hold, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started. At the same time, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57). Therefore, the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the game store (including the replacement of the game board 5 only and the board unit 500 only). ), It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display Since 65, the round number display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Setting change notification for (RWM clear preparation notification for prompting RWM clear preparation and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification for setting confirmation and setting confirmation notification for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode). It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the set value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation time of various drive sources is immediately before elapse. Since the operation of various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is no longer performed in a game-enabled state, and it may be confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the like are used. Since the opening signal is not output even though the second big winning opening is open, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and the gaming machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the turning on of the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In this embodiment, "during the initial operation of the drive source" or "check the operation of the solenoid" that prompts the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change notification, the RWM clear preparation notification, and the setting confirmation notification. Etc. were not displayed, but such characters may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Modification example when various drive sources are initially operated)
Hereinafter, a modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification is different from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation processing is performed after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is displayed. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started. At the same time, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the main display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable effect device 75, sub display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control board 130 are started. At the same time, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit on the information display 113, and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57). Therefore, the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the game store (including the replacement of the game board 5 only and the board unit 500 only). ), It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display Since 65, the round number display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the result of the game is affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since various drive sources for operating the given movable body are initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , It is possible to properly check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since the operation is started, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the RWM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode is completed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the number (shortening the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the like are used. Since the opening signal is not output even though the second big winning opening is open, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and the gaming machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the turning on of the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed in the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode. However, by not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, since the set value and the performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 113 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement shop, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

(Display example of special symbol display)
A display example of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61) will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the special symbol display shows a lost special symbol in which the LED at the right end is lit as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the display mode is such that the two LEDs are lit from the left end, and after that (after 32 ms), FIGS. 69 (c) to (i). ), The lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the cycle of timer interruption, and by continuing this for 8 times of timer interrupt, the same LED is turned on for 32 ms.

Then, cycle fluctuations are performed a plurality of times with the change in the display mode of FIGS. 69 (b) to (i) as one cycle (= 256 ms), and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, FIGS. 69 (j) to (m). ) (Loss special symbol, 1st jackpot special symbol, 2nd jackpot special symbol, 3rd jackpot special symbol) is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Further, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started after the stop time has elapsed, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times from the display mode of FIG. 69 (b), and any one of FIGS. 69 (j) to (m). The special symbol of is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In the cycle fluctuation, two LEDs are turned on and the lighting position is changed (moved). However, one LED may be turned on and the lighting position may be changed, or three or more LEDs may be turned on. The LED may be turned on and the lighting position may be changed.

Further, in the cycle variation, eight types of display modes are set as one cycle, but two types of display modes (for example, all lighting and all turning off) may be set as one cycle, and three or more types of display modes may be set as one cycle. May be good. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle is shorter than the stop time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the variable winning portion is opened for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but in the case of executing the small hit game, after performing the cycle fluctuation a plurality of times. It is advisable to stop and display the small hit special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small hit special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Example of production for each production mode)
An example of display effect (operation before fluctuation, etc.) for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

In the effect mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the first mode (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), and the special symbol TZ is in a common mode (number image) common to all effect modes. Is displayed.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the first aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.75 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first mode (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first aspect causes the main display device 70 to perform a swaying motion (directing motion) in which the first posture tilted to the left (initial posture) is changed to the first posture again via the second posture tilted to the right. During the display, it is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In the effect mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the second mode (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), and the special symbol TZ is a common mode (number image) common to all effect modes. Is displayed.

The effect symbol 70a of the second aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed as a pre-variation operation before the scroll display (update operation) is started. Is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle type). Then, the normal icon of the second aspect causes the main display device 70 to perform a swaying motion (directing motion) that becomes the first posture again from the first posture tilted to the left (initial posture) via the second posture tilted to the right. During the display, it is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In the effect mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the third mode (R chamfered rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by R chamfered hexagonal image), and the special symbol TZ is common to all effect modes. It is displayed in the common mode (numerical image) of.

The effect symbol 70a of the third aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the effect symbol 70a is enlarged and displayed as a pre-variation operation before the scroll display (update variation) is started. Is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), if it is a normal icon, it is displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the specific top moves (effect). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In the effect mode D (probability change game state), as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a side-scrolling or scene change (effect operation) state while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black dot is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the black dot moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In the effect mode E (probability change game state), as shown in FIG. 70 (e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a side-scrolling or scene change (effect operation) state while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black dot is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the black dot moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In the effect mode F (time saving game state), as shown in FIG. 70 (f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a side-scrolling or scene change (effect operation) state while being displayed on the main display device 70. The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is 0 as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. It is designed to last for 4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth mode (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the specific top moves (effect). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

When a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C) in the effect modes A to F, the special icon is a common mode common to all the effect modes (the second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C). It is displayed as a circle). The special icon of the common mode is a rotation operation (directing operation) in which the specific part rotates from the first posture (initial posture) located at the upper part and becomes the first posture again via the second posture in which the specific part moves. ) Is always repeated in one cycle of 2.5 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

Further, in the effect modes A to F, the special symbol TZ displayed in the common mode (numerical image) is scrolled downward (update variation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the variation effect. Therefore, the update operation of repeatedly updating the numerical images 1 to 9 is repeated in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. As for the special symbol TZ, it is suggested that the variation effect is being executed by performing the update variation.

In this way, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) of the hold icon is performed by the LED on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It is repeatedly executed in a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the change cycle (32 ms) of the lighting mode or the cycle of one cycle (256 ms). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing the effect operation, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) of the hold icon is performed by the blinking cycle of the LED on the sub first fluctuation display 81 (sub second fluctuation display 82). It is designed to be repeatedly executed in a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from (1 second). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing the effect operation, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a is configured to execute any of a plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the time until the effect symbol 70a performs the scroll display (update variation) differs depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect. There are cases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, regardless of which of the plurality of types of pre-variation movements (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update) of the three effect symbols 70a. The start order of (variation) may be the same (left → middle → right).

Further, depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update variation) of the three effect symbols 70a are performed. The start order may be different (floating display: left → middle → right, enlarged display: middle → left → right, reduced display: right → middle → left, etc.).

Further, a plurality of types of pre-variation operation modes of the effect symbol 70a may be provided for each effect mode so that the jackpot expectation degree is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the hold icon may be one type for each effect mode so as not to have a big hit expectation.

(Example of production for each production mode)
An example of a display effect (operation before stopping, etc.) for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The description of the part overlapping with FIG. 70 will be omitted.

In the effect mode A (normal game state), the effect symbol 70a of the first aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scroll display ends. The character image CG of the effect symbol 70a is displayed to shake its head at the symbol stop position (see FIG. 79) for 0.9 seconds.

In the effect mode B (normal game state), the effect symbol 70a of the second aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but before the stop before the scroll display (update operation) is finished. As an operation, the effect symbol 70a is reduced → normal display is performed for 0.5 seconds at the symbol stop position.

In the effect mode C (normal game state), the effect symbol 70a of the third aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but before the stop before the end of this scroll display (update variation). As an operation, the rotation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed for 0.7 seconds at the symbol stop position.

In the effect mode D (probability variation game state), the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scroll display ends. , After rising upward from the symbol stop position, the bound display that descends downward is performed for 0.4 seconds. The bound display is similar to the floating display described above, but the bount display has a faster moving speed of the effect symbol 70a and a lower floating height.

In the effect mode E (probability variation game state), the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scroll display ends. , The rotation (small) display of the effect symbol 70a is performed for 0.4 seconds at the symbol stop position.

In the effect mode F (time saving game state), the effect symbol 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scroll display ends. , The bounce (small) display that rises upward from the symbol stop position is displayed for 0.4 seconds.

In this way, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a performs one of a plurality of types of pre-stop operations (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display). It is designed to run. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, which of the multiple types of pre-stop operations (head-shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display) was executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect. Depending on the situation, the time required for the effect symbol 70a to display the stop may differ. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the effect symbol 70a executes any of a plurality of types of pre-stop operations (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display) in the variable effect. Even so, the order of the pre-stop operation and the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a may be the same (left → right → middle).

In addition, which of the multiple types of pre-stop operations (head-shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display) was executed by the effect symbol 70a in the variable effect. Depending on the situation, the order of the pre-stop operation and the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a may be changed (head-shaking display: left → right → middle, rotation display: left → middle → right, etc.).

Further, a plurality of types of pre-stop operation modes of the effect symbol 70a may be provided for each effect mode so that the jackpot expectation degree is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the hold icon may be one type for each effect mode so as not to have a big hit expectation.

(Example of displaying the number of pending items)
An example of displaying the number of holdings in the main display device 70 will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

First, when the number of holds is "0" and the customer is waiting, the icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C as shown in FIG. 72 (a), and the first hold number. “0” is displayed in the display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB, respectively.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the first holding number becomes "1", it is normally displayed on the first display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. 72 (b). The hold icon HI of the embodiment is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animation of one frame, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" in a non-animation of one frame. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is started from there.

Then, when the number of first hold is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the hold displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is as shown in FIG. 72 (c). A 20-frame animation that shifts the icon HI toward the icon display area 70C (decrease display, change display) is started, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is set to "0" by one frame of non-animation. It is updated (decreased display). At this time, the hold icon HI changes from opaque to transparent and is displayed semi-transparently, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is continuously performed.

After that, when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the hold icon HI and is opaque, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is performed. ) Is continued.

In this state, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the first holding number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 72 (e), the first display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B is displayed. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the held number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" (increased display) in a non-animation of 1 frame. Will be done. At this time, the hold icon HI that is additionally displayed starts an effect operation (swaying operation) so as to synchronize with an icon of another normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is translucently minimized with an effect image. It is enlarged from the size to the normal size. That is, in the state where the special symbol is variablely displayed, the hold icon HI may not be displayed from the first posture (initial posture).

Then, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the hold icon HI in the additionally displayed normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque as shown in FIG. 72 (f). And the production operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45, the first holding number becomes "2", and it is determined that the icon change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 72 (g). A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI of the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) is started in the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the hold number display area SA of the first hold icon display area SA is started. The reserved number is updated (increased) to "2" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI additionally displayed has an effect operation (rotational operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the upper part. It starts and is magnified from the semi-transparent tiny size to the normal size with the effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI of the first special mode (blue) is completed, the hold icon HI of the first special mode (blue) additionally displayed is displayed as shown in FIG. 72 (h). It is a normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the effect operation (rotational operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 72 (i), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. The animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with the effect image gradually increasing in transparency, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is performed even during the erase display.

After that, when the number of first hold is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, it is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. 72 (j). An animation of 20 frames for shifting (decreasing display) one hold icon HI toward the icon display area 70C is started, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" with one frame of non-animation. (Reduced display). At this time, the two hold icons HI are displayed semi-transparently with the transparency changing from opaque, but the effect operation (swaying operation, rotating operation) is continuously performed.

Then, when the shift display of the two hold icon HIs is completed, as shown in FIG. 72 (k), the hold icon HI of the normal display mode displayed in the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B is the corresponding hold icon HI. The icon TI has a size larger than that of the hold icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed. Further, the hold icon HI of the first special display mode displayed in the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed in the first display portion in a normal size and opaquely, and the icon changes accordingly. The effect changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon), but the effect operation (rotational operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the first holding number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. 72 (l), the second display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B is displayed. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the held number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "2" (increased display) in a non-animation of 1 frame. Will be done. At this time, the hold icon HI that is additionally displayed starts an effect operation (swaying operation) so as to synchronize with an icon of another normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is translucently minimized with an effect image. It is enlarged from the size to the normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the hold icon HI in the additionally displayed normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque as shown in FIG. 72 (m). And the production operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 72 (n), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. The animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with the effect image gradually increasing in transparency, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is performed even during the erase display.

After that, when the number of the first hold is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the effect displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. 72 (o). A 20-frame animation of shifting (decreasing display) the two operating hold icon HIs toward the icon display area 70C is started, and the hold number of the first hold number display area SA is a non-animation of 1 frame. 1 ”is updated (decreased display). At this time, the two hold icons HI are displayed semi-transparently with the transparency changing from opaque, but the effect operation (swaying operation, rotating operation) is continuously performed.

At this time, if the condition for switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 72 (p), the main display device 70 has a shield image (blackout image, whiteout image) on the entire screen. Etc.) is displayed, and the icons of the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C can be visually recognized while the hold numbers of the first hold number display area SA and the second hold number display area SB are visible. Be regulated.

Then, in the rear layer of the shielded image, as shown in FIG. 72 (q), the hold icon HI is normally displayed corresponding to the effect mode B while the display mode and the effect operation (rotation operation) of the icon TI are maintained. It is switched to the hold icon HI of the mode. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is started from there.

Then, when the shielded image is erased, as shown in FIG. 72 (r), the hold icon HI of the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI in the special display mode can be visually recognized.

Even when a plurality of hold icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display is performed in the same manner as when the effect operation is performed so that the hold icon in the normal display mode and the icon in the normal display mode are synchronized with each other. The effect operation is performed so that the plurality of hold icons of the mode are synchronized.

Further, although the hold display example in the effect mode A has been mainly described here, basically the same number of hold displays (effects) are displayed except that the display mode and the operation effect mode of the hold icon are different in the other effect modes. (Including the display when switching modes) will be performed.

The first feature of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of holds increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold numbers and hold icons are not animated. The point is that the increase display is executed in the period of one frame which is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to immediately perform a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and decrease display of the hold icon) so as not to be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the production examples of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of reserved numbers decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the reserved numbers are displayed in a non-animated manner (1 frame). Further, the change display (decrease display) by the animation (20 frames) of the hold icon to the icon is executed (started at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing when the decrease display of the hold number starts (frame update timing) rather than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) starts (frame update timing). It may be ahead (for example, one frame before).

The third feature according to the production example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is the timing (frame update timing) at which the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) is completed. However, the timing at which the reduction display of the reserved number is completed (frame update timing) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of holds has decreased due to the hold number while producing a change in the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update timing) is earlier than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) is completed (frame update timing). (For example, one frame before) may be set.

The fourth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of hold numbers increases during the variable display of the special symbol, the hold number is increased by non-animation (1 frame) and the hold icon. The point is that the increase display by the animation (20 frames) of is executed (starts at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the timing at which the increase display of the hold number starts (frame update timing) and the timing at which the increase display of the hold number ends (frame update timing) precedes the timing at which the increase display of the hold icon starts (frame update timing) (for example, one frame before). ) May be.

The fifth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the increase display of the hold number is completed rather than the timing (frame update timing) when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon is completed. There is a point that the timing of becoming (frame update timing) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of holds has increased due to the hold number while producing a change in the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of holds increases during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol, the number of holds increases while the customer is waiting. Therefore, the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon is executed for a long period (long number of frames). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is the effect operation mode (operation while enlarging) at the start (display start) of the increase display of the hold icon, and the completion (display) of the increase display of the hold icon. There is a point that it is different (partially different) from the effect operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that not only a part of the operations may be different but all the operations may be different between the start of the increase display of the hold icon and the completion of the increase display.

The eighth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is a display mode (semi-transparent) at the start of the increase display of the hold icon and a display mode (opaque) after the completion of the increase display of the hold icon. There are some differences (some are different). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that not only the transparency but also the shape and the like may be different between the start of the increase display of the hold icon and the completion of the increase display.

The ninth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is the effect operation in which the hold icon and the icon are repeatedly changed into the first posture and the second posture during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) (the effect operation). It is possible to perform shaking motion, rotation motion, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by the hold icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the hold icon and the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) in which the icon repeatedly changes between the first posture and the second posture are performed from the first posture. The point that the time for changing to the second posture is constant each time is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the hold icon and the icon becoming difficult to see, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. If the hold icon and the icon change from the first posture to the second posture and the control load of the drawing process is large and the processing fails (drawing for one frame could not be performed), the drawing process is started from the first posture. The time for changing to the second posture is not constant but substantially constant only at that time.

The eleventh feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is a plurality of icons (hold icons, hold icon and the icon) displayed in the normal display mode during the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol. The point is that the effect operation is executed in synchronization with each other. By doing so, it is possible to improve the appearance of the effect of the icon and improve the effect of the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The timing at which the effect operation of the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode based on the new start prize is synchronized with the effect operation of the other hold icon may be at the start of the display, or a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. It may be at the time, at the start of the shift display, or at the completion of the shift display.

The twelfth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased and displayed, but after the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, the next The hold icon has a point that the effect operation is repeatedly executed until the variation display (variation effect) is started. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the number of holds is not "0" by the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the transparency of the effect symbol does not change when the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the icon is erased after the transparency of the icon becomes high. There are some points. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when erasing the icon and to erase the icon naturally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the time (scale) of one cycle of the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon) is the first effect mode and the second effect mode (effect). It can be mentioned that the mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect modes C to F are the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to see the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72, the cycle in which the hold icon (the icon) changes from the first posture to the first posture again via the second posture is defined as the first effect mode. The point that it is the same as the second effect mode (between the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect modes C to F) can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to see the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the size (area) of the area where the number of holds is displayed does not change due to the increase or decrease of the number of holds in the hold number display area, but in the hold icon display area. The size (area) of the area where the hold icon is displayed changes depending on the increase or decrease in the number of holds (when the number of holds is singular, the hold icon is displayed in the first area, and when the number of holds is multiple. The hold icon is displayed in the second area, which is larger than the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the increase / decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 17th feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72, the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) performs the effect operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture in the first cycle. The hold icon that can be repeatedly executed in (2 seconds or 3 seconds) and is displayed in the special display mode (special icon) with a higher expectation of big hit than the normal display mode changes between the first posture and the second posture. It is possible to repeatedly execute the effect operation to be performed in the second cycle (2.5 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it becomes easy to distinguish between the hold icon in the normal display mode and the hold icon in the special display mode, and it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

The eighteenth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the special symbol executes the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) from 1 to 9 of the numerical image in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). It is possible, and the hold icon has a point that the effect operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture can be executed in the second cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the update fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect operation of the hold icon are linked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72, a decrease display of the number of holds is performed with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the hold displayed in the hold number display area in this decrease display is performed. The number does not move, but the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area moves (before the hold number decreased, the hold icon was displayed in the second area larger than the first area, and the hold number decreased. After that, the hold icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the decrease in the number of holds while recognizing the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 70 to 72 is the movement direction (downward) in the update operation of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the operation direction (horizontal direction) in the effect operation (swaying operation) of the hold icon. Etc.) and different points. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the update fluctuation of the production symbol (special symbol) and the production operation (swaying operation) of the hold icon, and it is possible to enhance the production effect in the fluctuation production. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, when the number of holds increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold icon is increased and displayed in one frame without animation, but the hold number is increased. It may be increased and displayed by animation of a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a longer period of time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon is set to perform the effect operation even while the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the hold icon stops the effect operation while the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the effect operation is performed. The effect operation of the hold icon may be restarted after the shift display of the hold icon accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol (decrease in the number of holds). By doing so, it is possible to make the player know whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on the presence or absence of the effect operation of the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the effect operation of the hold icon is restarted after the shift display of the hold icon, the hold icon may resume the effect operation from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (hold icon display area, the icon display area). good. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the variable display of the special symbol has been newly started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed and the icon is erased, the icon continues to perform the effect operation, but the stop display of the special symbol (effect symbol) produces the effect. The operation may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load related to the display control.

In addition, although multiple icons displayed in the normal display mode (hold icons, hold icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the effect operation, the effect operation is not performed in perfect synchronization. , The production operation may be performed substantially in synchronization. It should be noted that the timing at which the effect operation of the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode based on the new start prize is substantially synchronized with the effect operation of the other hold icon may be at the start of the display or at a predetermined time from the start of the display. It may be at the lapse of time, at the start of the shift display, or at the completion of the shift display.

(Specific example when variable production starts from waiting for customers)
A specific example of the case where the variation effect starts from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 74 to 75 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 73. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 73, there is a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol has not been executed since the power was turned on, and the effect mode A and the volume value “3” are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 60 displays the lost special symbol (only the LED at the right end is lit), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the main display device 70 waits for the execution of the variation effect. The variable standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation), and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are in a state of being stopped and displayed as the initial symbol "135" when the power is turned on (the effect). See FIG. 74 (a)). The mode A background image is side-scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 73, when the up button or the down button of the cross key 19 is operated for volume adjustment, a part of the main display device 70 overlaps with the front side of the right effect symbol 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value “3” is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value “3” (see FIG. 74 (b)). ).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 73, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to raise the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the voice output device 9 emits a confirmation sound (0.5 seconds) of the volume corresponding to the volume value "4". It is output (see FIG. 74 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 73, when an operation for lowering the volume is performed by the changeover switch 22, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but the audio output device 9 responds to the volume value "3" because the volume is adjusted by the changeover switch 22. No confirmation sound is output (see FIG. 74 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 73, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first holding number becomes "1" and the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1". A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 74 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 73, when the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, a start command (special symbol) is given from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 is displayed as "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol (FIG. 74 (f)). reference).

Further, since a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "1", and the first hold icon display area is displayed. The hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed on the first display unit of the 70B in a non-animated manner, and the output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 74 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 73 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area The SA and the sub 1st hold indicator 83 are displayed as “0”, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub 1st variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 75 (g)).

Further, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display). Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audible output of the variable BGM is started from the audio output device 9 (FIG. 75 (FIG. 75). g) See).

In addition to the start of the audible output of the variable BGM at the start of the ascending display as the pre-variation operation of the effect symbol 70a, the variation start sound (start sound output every variation, start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You may do so.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 73 (at the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 75 (h)), and the timing of T8 in FIG. 73 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation). ), When the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed, and then the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 75 (i)). At the timing of T9, high-speed fluctuations of all the effect symbols 70a start (see FIG. 75 (j)). When outputting the fluctuation start sound, it is preferable to end the output of the fluctuation start sound at this timing (after the output of the winning sound ends).

If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command during the display of the volume value image OG, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the variation effect is not executed, so that the volume value image is displayed. The display period is extended without erasing the OG, and the state in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained.

Also, when the light intensity value image is displayed by operating the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, it is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

In this way, when the variable effect is started in the customer waiting state (the period during which the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the cross key 19), the volume adjustment and the light amount by the cross key 19 are performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Adjustments are being regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player overlooks the important aspect of starting the fluctuation effect by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is visually recognized even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Is regulated (erased). Therefore, the fluctuation effect is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, even if the volume value is adjusted by the operation of the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed, but if the volume value image OG is being displayed, the cross key 19 is operated. Regardless of whether the volume is adjusted or the volume is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22, the volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the newly set volume value, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a performs the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) and then starts the scroll display (update display), but the special symbol TZ is updated without performing the pre-variation operation. (Scroll display, switching display) is started. Therefore, the effect of the variation effect can be enhanced by the pre-variation operation of the effect symbol 70a, and the player can be made aware that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol TZ. It will be possible to improve.

Further, in the variation effect, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variable display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84) is updated according to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variation effect, the shift display (change to the icon TI) of the hold icon is started before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation). Therefore, the player can detect that the reserved memory has decreased at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, the shift display (change to the icon TI) of the hold icon ends. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game in which the variable effect (scroll display of the effect symbol 70a) is performed by reducing the reserved memory, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even before the effect symbol 70a starts the scroll display (update fluctuation) (during the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and during the operation before the change), the hold icon HI now performs the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a, the icon TI performs the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable effect is started by turning the player's eyes to the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect symbol 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, horizontal scrolling, Scene changes, movements of characters included in the background image, etc.) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect together with the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is included in the effect operation (horizontal scroll, scene change, background image). The movement of the character to be performed, etc.) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect together with the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) starts at the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect symbol 70a. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, at the start of the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a, the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode) is already audibly output. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect even before the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , After the end timing of the first cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (2 to 3 cycle fluctuations). After the start timing and before the start timing of the fourth cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a in the variation effect is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started after the end of the first cycle variation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It has become like. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbol and the scroll display of the effect symbol 70a in stages, the effect of the game effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main and the effect symbol 70a is in a subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. It will be possible.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation). Before, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the special symbol TZ update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) match, the start timing of the special symbol variation display is the special symbol TZ update fluctuation ( It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is the start of scroll display and switching display).

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the update fluctuation (scroll display) of the special symbol TZ is started. , Switching display) is started, that is, it is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timing of the first display change in the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden are reduced. Is possible. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main and the special symbol TZ is in the subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2nd hold display 84) Updates are started, that is, they are intentionally started out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the update start timing of the hold display becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation). Before, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2nd hold display 84). The update of the LED hold display) is started. Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations with the update start timing of the hold display, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the update start timing of the hold display. It becomes possible.

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is started, the hold display (on the main display device 70). The update of the hold icon, the hold number, and the LED hold display on the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2nd hold display 84) is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. .. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the update start timing of the hold display becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold display has been updated since the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the start time of the shift display of the hold icon HI. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI is terminated after the end of the first cycle fluctuation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold icon HI is shifted and displayed because the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. Become.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI match, the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is set to the icon TI of the hold icon HI. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is the start of the shift display.

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is completed, the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon TI. The display is finished. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon TI since the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , After the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the audible output of the predetermined game sound (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, both start without intentionally synchronizing. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). The audible output of a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started before the end timing of the second cycle variation. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations coincides with the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound, the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). , The start timing of the first cycle variation is also later), and the audible output of the effect BGM (variation BGM for each effect mode) starts, that is, both are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the effect BGM becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the effect BGM (variation BGM for each effect mode) is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the audible output of the effect BGM match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the effect BGM. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (the display start of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the time, before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image) starts. That is, they are intentionally started out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (on the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the start of display, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image), etc. ) Is to be started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the effect operation of the background image. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, before the start of the first cycle fluctuation (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), The effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each effect mode, zone background image) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored in the customer waiting state before the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, depending on the type of pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variable effect, the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display) before the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update display). The number of cycle fluctuations executed by the vessel 61) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production according to the type of pre-variation movement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, depending on the type of pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variable effect, the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display) before the effect symbol 70a starts scroll display (update display). The number of display changes in the cycle fluctuation executed by the device 61) may be different. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production according to the type of pre-variation movement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the effect symbol 70a instead of hiding the volume value image OG. By changing to the state of being displayed (set) on the lower layer of, the visual recognition of the volume value image OG may be restricted by displaying the effect symbol 70a so as to overlap the rear of the effect symbol 70a.

(Specific example when starting a prize during variable production)
A specific example of a start winning prize during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart in the case of starting and winning a prize during the variable effect, and FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 76. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 76, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Yth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. It is displayed and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 77 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 76, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first holding number becomes "1" and the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1". A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 77 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the winning command, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub first reserved indicator 83 display "1". Become. Further, the additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode to the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B by animation and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 77 (c)). reference).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 77 (d)).

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is executed over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize at the starting port during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and outputs the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the fluctuation effect by the winning sound and improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example when continuously performing variable effects)
A specific example of the case where the variation effect is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

FIG. 78 is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing the variable effect, and FIGS. 79 to 81 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 78. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 78, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, the central effect symbol 70a is scrolled at a low speed (update change), and the special symbol TZ is updated change (scroll). Display, switching display). Further, the first hold icon display area 70B displays two hold icon HIs in the normal display mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, so that the variable BGM is displayed. It is audibly output (see FIG. 79 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the left effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated fluctuation) starts a temporary stop (FIG. 79 (b)). reference). Then, when the left effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the voice output device 9 starts outputting the temporary stop sound, and the character of the left effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (a pre-stop operation that shakes the head) (FIG. 79 (Fig. 79). c) See).

The "pre-stop operation" may be any effect as long as it is an effect performed between the temporary stop and the stop display.
Further, not only after the temporary stop, but also the effect performed immediately before the temporary stop may be the operation before the stop.

Next, at the timings T1 to T2 in FIG. 78 (after the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation ... at the start of the cycle fluctuation), the effect symbol 70a on the right, which was scrolled (updated fluctuation), temporarily stops. Start (see FIGS. 79 (b)-(c)). Then, when the right effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the voice output device 9 starts outputting the temporary stop sound, and the character of the right effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (a pre-stop operation that shakes the head) (FIG. 79 (Fig. 79). b) to (c)).

Next, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the N + 16th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the effect symbol 70a in the scroll display (update fluctuation) starts a temporary stop (FIG. 79 (c)). reference). Then, when the effect symbol 70a inside is temporarily stopped, the output of the temporary stop sound is started from the voice output device 9, and the character of the effect symbol 70a inside performs an effect operation (a pre-stop operation that shakes the head) to perform all the effects. The symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (see FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 78, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) is started (. See FIG. 80 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 80 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 78, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 81 (g). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 78 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display are displayed. The device 83 is displayed as “1”, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (see FIG. 81 (h)).

Further, the two hold icon HIs displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 81 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 78 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the floating display of the effect symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect effect (light emission effect at the start) is executed only by the current variation effect. ) Is started, and a blue light emitting effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 81 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 78 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), when the shift display of the two hold icons HI ends, the first hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). .. At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 81 (i)).

In this way, the variable BGM that was audibly output before the start of the pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect symbol 70a (during the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) is being output even during the execution of the pre-variation operation. It is designed to continuously (uninterruptedly) produce audible output. Therefore, it is possible to perform a production as if a plurality of variable productions were spun, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the icon display mode is not changed from the start of the icon shift display, but the icon shift. The display mode of the icon is changed at the time of completion (after). Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the display mode of the icon conspicuous and enhance the effect of the icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable effect, the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a (for example, the effect symbol 70a on the left side) that is temporarily stopped first depending on the type of the variable effect pattern is performing the effect before stopping, the effect symbol 70a that temporarily stops next (for example, the effect symbol 70a on the right side) is performed. ) May be used for pre-stop production and for update fluctuation (scroll display). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the effect mode of the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped first and the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped next are the same as the effect mode before the stop, but different effect modes may be used. Further, in the case of shortened fluctuation, the pre-stop effect may not be performed.

Further, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 (sub-first) 2 The fluctuation display (update fluctuation) of the fluctuation display 82) is terminated. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the disappearance display of the icon is started. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. It has become like. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed in the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 (sub-first) 2 The variation display (update variation) of the variation display 82) ends, and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character shaking his head), but the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed without executing the pre-stop effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know the end of the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol TZ while enhancing the effect of the variation effect by the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after performing the pre-stop operation (the action of the character shaking the head), but the background image (each) is displayed even during the pre-stop operation or the stop display of the effect symbol 70a. The background image corresponding to the effect mode) is designed to continuously execute the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the operation before the stop of the effect symbol 70a or after the stop display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, but the effect symbol 70a and the special Even during the stop display of the symbol TZ, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode) continuously executes the effect operation. Therefore, even after the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (before and the last timing of the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). Before the end timing of the cycle fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, and after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a predetermined mode (temporary stop display, stop display). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed before the final cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61) is completed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game in which the variable display of the special symbol ends after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation and the last) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). After the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect related to the stop display of the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, the last in the case where the hold icon HI is operated (swaying operation, rotation operation) during the execution of the variation effect and the change display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). Even after the end of the cycle fluctuation of, the effect operation of the hold icon HI is continuously performed. Therefore, the hold icon HI makes it possible for the player to know that the number of holds is not "0" and does not give the player a feeling of boredom even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation and the last) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (the second special symbol display 61). After the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol), the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect related to the disappearance display of the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, after the cycle fluctuation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is completed, the disappearance display of the icon TI is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game that the icon TI is deleted because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle fluctuation (during execution of the fluctuation effect) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). The audible output of (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is output at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation). , It is possible to finish after the stop display timing of the special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of production when the predetermined game sound is audibly output, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle fluctuation (during execution of the fluctuation effect) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It is possible to end the audible output (temporary stop sound, etc.) before the cycle fluctuation ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being dragged to the next variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) output before the last cycle fluctuation in the case where the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to continuously output audible sound even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the background image effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene) that was output before the last cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is used to display the variation of the special symbol. Changes, etc.) are continuously executed even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) executed with the start of the variation effect is executed after the end of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbol. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game that the look-ahead effect is executed because the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example when the variable effect is started without receiving the stop command normally)
A specific example of a case where the variable effect is started without normally receiving the stop command will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 83. Although (a) to (c) are omitted in FIG. 83, they are the same as those in FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c).

FIG. 82 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started without normally receiving the stop command, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 82. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T2 in FIG. 82 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T2 in FIG. 78, the description here will be omitted, and the timings after T3 will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T3 in FIG. 82, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80 (d)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, etc. should be started at the timing of T4 in FIG. 82, but the effect symbol 70a should be started. And the stop display of the special symbol TZ, etc. will not be started, and the fluctuation display period on the sub-first variation display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, and the variation display period of the special symbol TZ. Will be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 82, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 is displayed as "0", and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 83 (e). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 82 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display are displayed. The device 83 is displayed as “0”, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started from the first (off) (see FIG. 83 (f)).

Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased by non-animation, and the hold icon HI displayed in the first display unit starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. do. Further, after the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variation effect is started is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment, the ascending display as the operation before the change is started, and the special symbol that has been scrolled (updated and changed) is started. The scroll display is continued without the TZ being stopped and displayed (see FIG. 83 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 82 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). After that, the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 83 (g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variation effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variation effect is ended. When the third command (the command at the time of the next start) is received in the state where the current variation effect is not set, the current variation effect is forcibly terminated and the next variation effect is started. That is, the variation effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variation effect ends even if the third command (next start command) is received without receiving the second command normally. It has become like. In other words, in both the case where the second command is received and the case where the second command is not received, the previous variation effect ends during the execution of the next variation effect. Therefore, by starting the next variable effect, it is possible to appropriately end the previous variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if a start command is received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment (same as when the stop command was normally received). (In the embodiment), the variable effect (here, the floating display) is started. Therefore, the variable effect can be started in the same manner as when the start command is received during the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, and the game when the variable effect is started from the state where the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. It is possible to reduce the discomfort of the person and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is erased and displayed in a shorter time than the non-animation, that is, the erase display in the animation. Therefore, when the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon display area 70C next time, the shift display is not obstructed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect.

If the start command is received by the effect control board 130 in a state where the command is garbled due to a wiring abnormality or noise, the content of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 (for example). In some cases, the content of the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed by the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach variation of 13.5 seconds. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where a variable effect (specifically, SP reach effect) is executed, and the next start is performed in this state. When the hour command is received, the current variation effect is forcibly terminated and the next variation effect is started. Regarding this point, the same operation is performed for a gaming machine that sends / receives a start command but does not send / receive a stop command.

(Specific example when the normal fluctuation production ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of a case where the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits state will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart when the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits state, and FIGS. 85 to 86 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 84. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, the central effect symbol 70a is scrolled at a low speed (update change), and the special symbol TZ is updated change (scroll). Display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output. Further, the volume value image OG is displayed so that a part of the effect symbol 70a on the right overlaps with the front side (see FIG. 85 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 84 (during the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the central effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated and displayed) temporarily stops, the voice output device 9 emits a temporary stop sound. Output is started, and the character of the central effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (movement before stopping to shake the head), and all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 85 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 84 (during the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated for volume adjustment, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", and the voice output device 9 starts outputting the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" ( See FIG. 85 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 84 (during the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 85 (d)). ..

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 84 (during the N + 16th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop command (symbol confirmation) from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Command) is sent. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 85 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 84, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display in the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) is started. .. Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 10 are regulated for a predetermined period (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the output of the confirmation sound continues (see FIG. 85 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 84, the output of the confirmation sound ends when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses (see FIG. 86 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 84, the icon TI disappears in the animation. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display, the erase display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 86 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the waiting period is set to the customer waiting state and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 waits for the customer from the effect control board 130. A status specification command is sent.

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 84, when the stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at the audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 86 (i)). (See), when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo production for appealing the game to the player is started.

If the effect symbol 70a (special symbol TZ) is stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the stop command during the output of the confirmation sound, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound is output. The output is continued until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but this is also the case at the start of the variable effect, and the start command is received during the output of the confirmation sound. Even when the execution of the corresponding variation effect is started, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period elapses.

In addition, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute) when a predetermined period elapses after receiving the customer waiting state specification command, but if the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the variable BGM is changed. The audible output is not stopped, and for example, when a customer waiting state designation command, a jackpot game opening designation command, or the like is received next, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute).

In this way, when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the variable effect (the period during which the volume can be adjusted or the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19), the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 for a predetermined period (1 second). Light intensity adjustment is now regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player overlooks the important aspect of the stop display of the effect symbol 70a by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

When the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. In order to ensure the visibility of 70a, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the visibility of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed by the volume value image OG is not hindered, and the player can confirm the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed, which can improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, when the variable effect starts or the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the cross key 19 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound is output during the output period (0. The output is continued until 5 seconds) elapses. Therefore, the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal fluctuation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state, the audible output of the fluctuation BGM is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, compared to the case where the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (mute) immediately after the normal fluctuating effect is completed, it is less likely that the player is willing to stop the game, and the operation of the gaming machine is improved. Is possible.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a performs the pre-stop operation and then the stop display is displayed, but the audible output of the effect BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) continues even during the pre-stop operation or the stop display of the effect symbol 70a. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the operation before the stop of the effect symbol 70a or during the stop display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, after the pre-stop effect (the action of the character of the effect symbol 70a shaking its head, the output of the temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, but the effect symbol 70a and the special Even after the symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, the audible output of the effect BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the normal variation effect, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed after performing the pre-stop operation (the action of the character shaking the head), but when a predetermined time elapses after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the effect BGM (for each effect mode) is displayed. The audible output of BGM) is stopped. Therefore, since the audible output of the production BGM is continued for a long time, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a performs the pre-stop operation and then the stop display is performed. Is adjustable. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player for adjusting the volume of the effect BGM, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the notification sounds of various errors are output during the operation before the stop of the effect symbol 70a, the output of the effect BGM is limited (volume reduction or mute).

When the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the effect symbol 70a. It may be changed to the state displayed (set) in the lower layer of the symbol 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the effect symbol 70a, so that the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the effect symbol 70a is ensured and the display is stopped. It becomes possible for the player to confirm the effect symbol 70a.

In addition, the volume confirmation sound is output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, and the volume confirmation sound is not output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect. , The volume confirmation sound may not be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, and the volume confirmation sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variable effect. ..

Further, the volume value image OG is displayed when the volume is adjusted by the operation of the cross key 19 regardless of whether the customer is waiting or the variable effect is being produced. However, the operation of the cross key 19 while waiting for the customer is performed. The volume value image OG may be displayed when the volume is adjusted by, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when the stop display of the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the reception of the stop command is performed during the output of the confirmation sound, or when the execution of the variable effect according to the reception of the start command is started during the output of the confirmation sound. Even so, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but when the effect symbol 70a is stopped or displayed, the execution of the variable effect is started. In that case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. By doing so, it is difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound, the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound can be easily heard, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally)
A specific example of a case where the stop command cannot be normally received and the end of the normal variation effect is delayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 88.

FIG. 87 is a timing chart in the case where the stop command cannot be normally received and the end of the normal variation effect is delayed, and FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 87. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T3 in FIG. 87 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T3 in FIG. 84, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 87 (during the N + 16th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is issued from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Will be sent. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 88 (e)).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, etc. should be started at the timing of T5 in FIG. 87, but the effect symbol 70a should be started. And the stop display of the special symbol TZ etc. will not be started. Then, the variation display period on the sub first variation display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the variation display period of the special symbol TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the cross key 19 are used. The possible period for adjusting the volume and the amount of light will be extended (see FIG. 88 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 87, when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 88 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 87, the stop time of the special symbol elapses. Then, the customer waiting state is entered, and the waiting period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is reached, and the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the non-animated disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is performed, and the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) are displayed at the symbol stop position. (= Stopped display state). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 88 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 87, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the operation of the cross key 19 for the previous volume adjustment) elapses, the volume value image OG is hidden (FIG. 88 (FIG. 88). i)) At the timing of T10 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at the audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 88 (Fig. 88). j)), and after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is started.

Even when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command transmitted from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the main control board is basically displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed. Similar to the case where the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command sent from 110, the variable effect is not executed, so the state where the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image. The OG will not be erased.

If the stop command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the variation display on the sub-first variation display 81 is stopped, the icon TI disappears in a non-animated manner, the effect symbol 70a and the special. Since the stop display of the symbol TZ is not performed, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased.

Further, if the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be normally received, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not performed, so that a predetermined period (30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting state was entered. Even if it has elapsed, the audible output of the variable BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variation effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variation effect is ended. If a third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received in a state where the current fluctuation effect is not set, the current fluctuation effect is forcibly terminated and the customer waiting state is set. That is, the variation effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variation effect ends even if the third command (customer waiting state specification command) is received without receiving the second command normally. It has become like. In other words, in both the case where the second command is received and the case where the second command is not received, the variation effect ends when the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately end the variable effect by starting the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command or stop command transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc.) ), The volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are not restricted, and the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are possible is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command or the stop command transmitted from the main control board 110 (disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, disconnection of the connector, etc.). Is designed to maintain the display of the volume value image OG until the display period of the volume value image OG elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the start command is received by the effect control board 130 in a state where the command is garbled due to a wiring abnormality or noise, the content of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 (for example). In some cases, the content of the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed by the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach variation of 13.5 seconds. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, the main display device 70 is in a state where a variable effect (specifically, an SP reach effect) is executed, and a customer waiting state is in this state. When the specified command is received, the current fluctuation effect is forcibly terminated and the state of waiting for customers is entered. Regarding this point, the same operation is performed for a gaming machine that sends / receives a start command but does not send / receive a stop command.

(Specific example when the loss normal reach fluctuation production ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of a case where the loss normal reach fluctuation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart when the loss normal reach fluctuation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state, and FIGS. 90 to 91 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 89. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 89, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “0” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, three effect symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 90 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 89, when the normal reach effect in which the central effect symbol 70a scrolls and displays at a low speed is started with the left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the audible output of the variable BGM is started. Is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 90 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 89, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the effect button 17 is displayed. The validity period of the promotion effect and the effect button 17 for prompting the operation is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and the promotion sound of "press" from the voice output device 9 is displayed. Is output (see FIG. 90 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 89, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect fails and ends with the normal reach effect is executed. .. Specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "Chin" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 90 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 89, when the execution period of the blackout effect elapses, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach effect is resumed, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see FIG. 90 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 89, when the central effect symbol 70a, which has been scrolled at low speed (update fluctuation), temporarily stops at "6", the voice output device 9 starts outputting the temporary stop sound, and the center. The character of the effect symbol 70a performs an effect operation (a motion before stopping to shake the head), and the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the reach loss result (“565”). Further, although the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped, the audible output of the variable BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 90 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 91 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 89, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 91 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display in the effect symbol 70a (“565”) and the special symbol TZ (“565”) is started. (See FIG. 91 (i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 91 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 89, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the waiting period is set to the customer waiting state and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 waits for the customer from the effect control board 130. A status specification command is sent. After that, when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo production for appealing the game to the player is started.

In this way, when the normal reach effect is executed, when the normal reach effect is started, the variable BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach effect can be effectively excited. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the customer waits after the loss normal reach fluctuation effect, the effect BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output from the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a before the normal reach variation effect ends. Since it is in a state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the normal reach production has ended and that it has been lost, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Instead of stopping the output of the effect BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a, the variable BGM is audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM by the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 70a. You may do it. By doing so, when the normal reach fluctuation production with a low jackpot expectation is lost, the player will not be extremely discouraged.

(Specific example when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed)
A specific example of a case where the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

FIG. 92 is a timing chart when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed, and FIGS. 93 to 94 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 92. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 92, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “2” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, three effect symbols 70a (display mode including the character image) are scrolled (updated) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, and the special symbol TZ is updated (scrolled, switched). )is doing. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 92, when the normal reach effect in which the central effect symbol 70a scrolls and displays at a low speed is started with the left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the audible output of the variable BGM is started. Is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 92, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the main display device 70 is displayed. The promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 are started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the promotion sound of "press" from the voice output device 9 is displayed. Is output (see FIG. 93 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, the development success effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed. Will be done. Specifically, the development success image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound "I did it" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 93 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the blackout effect elapses, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SP reach effect is started. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is changed to the display mode of only numbers, and the left and right effect symbols are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size (see FIG. 93 (c)).

Then, when the execution period of the SP reach effect elapses at the timing of T5 in FIG. 92, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the three effect symbols 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size, and the first hold icon display area 70B is hidden together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 93 (d)). ..

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 92, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 Is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the voice output device 9 promotes "press". Sound is output (see FIG. 93 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "Chin" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at "6", so that the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the reach loss result ("565") (FIG. 93 (f). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect elapses, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shield image (for example, an eye-catching image including a model name, a model-specific character, etc. (see FIG. 131)) that shields a background image, an effect symbol 70a, or the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP reach effect and returned to the first mode to be temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 94 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 92, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 94 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display in the effect symbol 70a (“565”) and the special symbol TZ (“565”) is started. (See FIG. 94 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 94 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 92, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 94 (k). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 92 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold The display 83 becomes a “1” display, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started from the first (off) (see FIG. 94 (l)).

Further, the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variation BGM is restarted. (See FIG. 94 (l)).

Although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the same applies to the SP reach variation effect, the normal reach BGM reproduction is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the normal reach BGM output is resumed in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. It is designed to output SP reach BGM without using it.

Further, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the case where the SP reach variation effect is lost is the same as the case where the SPSP reach effect is lost, and the effect symbol 70a which is lost in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted. , The effect symbol 70a returns to the normal size and the first aspect, and is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the look-ahead zone effect is executed and the look-ahead zone background is displayed and the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the reach state, it is normal as in the mode A background image. It is the same as the case where the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are executed in the reach state with the background image displayed, but the effect pattern 70a that is lost in the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the normal background image before becoming the look-ahead zone background image ( For example, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image) is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a returns to the normal size and the first mode and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the first variable effect (normal reach variable effect) in which the blackout effect (suggestion effect) suggesting whether or not the SP reach effect is executed is executed, the normal reach BGM continues to be played during the blackout effect. The blackout effect (suggestion effect) that suggests whether or not the SP reach effect is executed by muting (silence) while keeping it, returning the normal reach BGM that was muted in the normal reach effect after the blackout effect to the audible output, In the second variation effect (SP / SPSP reach variation effect) to be executed, the reproduction of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

Further, when the SP reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is a normal background image) or the second background image (look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, it is normal. Along with changing to a third background image (SP reach background image) that indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the background image, the effect symbol 70a that forms a reach state and is temporarily stopped is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. do. Then, when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped due to loss, the first background image (normal background image, mode A background image) is changed, and the three effect symbols 70a are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the SP reach effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, even during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the display mode of the effect symbol 70a changes, the mode of the effect operation (content of operation, cycle of operation, etc.) of the hold icon HI or the icon TI does not change. ing. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the SP reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon HI is hidden while the icon TI is displayed. Therefore, the player can be concentrated on the SPSP reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, after the end of the SPSP reach effect, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable effect is executed again after the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed, while the SPSP reach effect is executed. In some cases, the special symbol TZ is hidden, but the display is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SP reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is completed, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the SPSP reach effect is finished and that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed to restore the display mode of the effect symbol 70a to the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the display mode of the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed to return the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed during the blackout effect, at least one of the hold icon HI and the icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP reach effect is started. You may.

Further, when the effect period is generated during the blackout effect and the effect button 17 is operated or the effect period elapses, the development success effect or the development failure effect is executed, but the effect period should not be generated. You may. In this case, the development success effect or the development failure effect may be executed, or the normal reach effect may be restored or the SP reach effect may be developed without executing the development success effect or the development failure effect. good.

Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are kept displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, and the hold icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is kept displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. May hide the hold icon HI and keep the icon TI displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, and hide the hold icon HI and the icon TI during the execution of the SP SP reach effect.

(Specific example of disappearance display in animation of the icon TI)
A specific example of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.

As described in FIGS. 28 and 29, there are "white icon", "blue icon", "red icon", and "rainbow icon" as the icon final display mode of the icon TI, and these icons are the relevant ones. FIG. 95 shows a specific example of the disappearance display in the animation when the icon TI is displayed.

As an example, FIG. 95 shows a specific example of the disappearance display of the icon TI of the “white icon” and the “blue icon” in the animation. Since the “white icon” is the same as in FIG. 94 (i), the description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, in the case of the "blue icon", as shown in (h-2) to (j-2), the disappearance display is performed using the same animation as the animation for extinguishing the "white icon". As a result, since the disappearance display is performed with the same animation for both the "white icon" and the "blue icon", it is possible to make it easier for the player to know that the icon has disappeared and the variation effect has ended.

The "blue icon" may be read as "red icon" or "rainbow icon". Also, the "white icon", "blue icon", "red icon", and "rainbow icon" all use the same animation to display the disappearance, but even if they use different animations to display the disappearance. good. Further, when an icon (for example, a character icon) not illustrated in FIGS. 28 and 29 is provided, such a character icon is also displayed disappearing by using the same animation as the "white icon". Alternatively, the disappearance display may be performed using different animations only for the character icon.

Further, in the example of FIG. 95, the "blue icon" has a round shape and is different in shape from the hexagon of the hold icon HI, but the "blue icon" also has the same shape as the hold icon HI (FIG. 95). In the example of, it may be displayed as a hexagon).

FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating that there are cases where animation is used and cases where animation is not used for the disappearance display. Specifically, FIG. 96 (b) shows FIG. 92 (b), and when the development image SEG indicating that the SP reach effect has been developed is displayed, the icon TI and the hold icon HI are hidden. It becomes. In this case, the icon TI and the hold icon HI are extinguished (hidden) without using the animation shown in FIG. 95 or the like. As a result, the player can recognize that the variation effect still continues because the icon TI is hidden without animation.

Then, in FIG. 96 (i), the animation shown in FIG. 95 and the like is used to display the disappearance. As a result, the player can recognize that the variation effect has ended because the icon TI is hidden with the animation.

The case where the icon TI is hidden without animation is not limited to the time of development, for example, when the power supply is stopped, as shown in FIG. 103. The extinction mode of FIG. 96 (b) is the same as the extinction mode of FIG. 103 (b), but may be different. That is, only the extinction mode at the end of the variable effect differs between the end of the variable effect, the development, and the stop of the power supply, and the extinction mode at the development and the stop of the power supply may be the same. However, the extinction mode may be different at the end of the variable effect, at the time of development, and at the time of stopping the power supply.

For example, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a is different between the lost normal reach described in FIG. 89 and the lost SPSP reach described in FIG. 92. Specifically, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in the lost SPSP reach is longer than the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in the lost normal reach. Therefore, in the temporary stop period, the period during which the icon TI performs the effect operation is also longer for the lost SPSP reach. In this way, even if the period during which the icon TI performs the effect operation is different between the lost normal reach and the lost SPSP reach, the disappearance display of the icon TI is performed with the same animation, and the disappearance display of the icon TI is performed at the same disappearance time. I try to do. This makes it easier for the player to know that the icon has disappeared and the variable effect has ended, although the variable effect and the temporary stop period are different.

(Specific example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
A specific example of a case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99.

FIG. 97 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. 98 to 99 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings of FIG. 97. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timing of T0 to T5 in FIG. 97 is basically the same as the timing of T0 to T5 in FIG. 92, the description here is omitted, and the timing after T6 will be described.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 97, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 Is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the voice output device 9 promotes "press". Sound is output (see FIG. 98 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the success image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at "5", so that the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the jackpot ("555") (FIG. 98 (f). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect elapses, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shield image (an eye-catching image including a model name) that shields a background image, an effect symbol 70a, or the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect symbol 70a is returned to the position before the start of the SP reach effect and returned to the first mode to be temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 98 (g)).

In addition, a second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a big hit. Specifically, the light emission display effect in which the light emission effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect symbol 70a and disappears is repeated twice in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds). At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 for a predetermined period (for example, until the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) (see FIG. 98 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 97, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Further, the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 99 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. Further, when the second stop suggestion effect is completed, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by the animation is started, and the effect symbol 70a (“555”) and the special symbol TZ (“555”) are started. The stop display at ()) is started (see FIG. 99 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 99 (j)).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T12 in FIG. 97, the opening designation command of the jackpot game is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 99 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command of the jackpot game, the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Specifically, an opening effect screen including the characters "big hit" is displayed, and it is suggested that the game ball is launched aiming at the right area (large winning opening) of the game area 5a in the right corner of the screen. The right-handed image UG is displayed.

In this way, in the variable effect that becomes a big hit, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, it is hidden, but the display of the special symbol TZ is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SP reach effect is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the variable effect that becomes a big hit, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained even when the SP reach effect does not develop after the normal reach effect. There is.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, is completed, the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect in which the light emission effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect symbol 70a and disappears) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the SPSP reach effect is completed and that the jackpot effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, one effect time (0.75 seconds) and cumulative effect time (1.5 seconds) of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is the cycle of the hold icon effect operation (sway operation, rotation operation) (sway operation, rotation operation). It is different from 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and it is possible to emphasize that the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the effect mode of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is such that the light emission effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the effect symbol 70a and disappears, but the part of the numerical image of the effect symbol 70a The light emitting effect image EF may move from one end to the other end and disappear, or the light emitting effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear.

Further, although the cumulative production time of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the period of the effect operation of the hold icon (2 seconds or 3 seconds), for example, one effect time of the light emission display effect is set. By setting it to 2 seconds, the cumulative effect time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the hold icon HI.

Further, in the case of a normal variable effect in which three effect symbols are stopped and displayed due to a loss without executing various reach effects, the light emission display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed. However, every time the three effect symbols on the left, middle, and right are temporarily stopped, a light emission effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, a part of the effect symbol 70a) is superimposed on the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a. An image that emits light) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds), and a light emission display effect at the time of temporary stop may be sequentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of sequentially executing the light emission effect at the time of temporary stop in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, probabilistic game state), the light emission effect at the time of temporary stop can be sequentially executed in the normal game state, and it is specified. In the gaming state (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state), the light emission effect at the time of temporary stop may not be sequentially executed.

Further, in the case of a shortened variation effect in which three effect symbols are stopped and displayed due to a loss without executing various reach effects, the light emission display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed. However, when the three effect symbols on the left, middle, and right are temporarily stopped at the same time, a light emission effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, the effect symbol 70a) is superimposed on each of the three temporarily stopped effect symbols 70a. An image in which a part of the image emits white light may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) to execute the light emission display effect at the time of simultaneous temporary stop. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of executing the simultaneous temporary stop light emission effect in the normal game state and the specific game state (time saving game state, probabilistic game state), in the normal game state, the simultaneous temporary stop light emission effect can be executed and specified. In the game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state), the light emission effect at the time of simultaneous temporary stop may not be executed.

Further, in the case of the reach variation effect in which various reach effects are executed and the three effect symbols 70a are stopped and displayed due to the reach loss, the light emission display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed. However, when the central effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed at the end is temporarily stopped, the second stop suggestion effect is superimposed on the effect symbol 70a (excluding the left and right effect symbols 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier). A light emission effect image different from the above (for example, an image in which a part of the effect symbol 70a emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) to execute the light emission display effect at the time of reach loss. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the game is a reach loss, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of executing the light emission display effect at the time of reach loss in the normal game state and the specific game state (time saving game state, probabilistic game state), the light emission display effect at the time of reach loss can be executed in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be executed. In (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state), the light emission display effect at the time of reach loss may not be executed.

Further, when the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped and the normal reach effect is executed, it is different from the second stop suggestion effect around the left and right effect symbols 70a (excluding the central effect symbol 70a that is changing). A light emission effect image (for example, an image that emits white light so as to shield at least a part of the effect symbol 70a and restrict visual recognition) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1.2 seconds), and light emission display when reach is established. You may try to perform the production. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of times the light emission display effect is executed in the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed, as compared with the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, instead of executing the light emission display effect when the reach is established in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variation game state), the light emission display effect when the reach is established can be executed in the normal game state, and is specified. In the gaming state (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state), the light emission display effect when the reach is established may not be executed.

Further, when the two left and right effect symbols 70a move to the upper part of the screen of the main display device 70 and develop into an SP reach effect, the periphery of the left and right effect symbols 70a (excluding the central effect symbol 70a that is changing). A light emission effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image that emits light inside the number of the effect symbol 70a) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.4 seconds) to display the light emission display effect at the time of development. You may want to do it. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of times the light emission display effect is executed in the variable effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed, as compared with the variable effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is not executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Will be.

In addition, instead of executing the development light emission display effect in the normal game state and the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), the development light emission display effect can be executed in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be executed. In (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state), the light emission display effect at the time of development may not be executed.

Further, even when the light emission display effect at the time of development is executed, the three effect symbols 70a on the left, middle, and right are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display device 70, and the SPSP reach effect is executed. In this case, it is possible not to execute the light emission display effect on the three effect symbols 70a. By doing so, it is not necessary to uselessly execute the light emission display effect on the effect symbol 70a which is reduced and displayed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the image display.

Further, after the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the upper left corner of the screen at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97 with a big hit (while the hold icon before the second stop suggestion effect is executed is hidden). In addition, you may move to the center of the screen and display it in normal size. In this case, a light emission effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect so as to correspond to the three effect symbols 70a moved to the center of the screen (for example, yellow light emission radially outward from the center effect symbol). The image) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1.2 seconds) to execute the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion. By doing so, it is possible to appeal to the player that the production pattern has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when displaying the light emission effect image in the light emission display effect before stop suggestion, the frame lighting device 10 may be made to emit light in the light emission display mode before stop suggestion (for example, the same color as the display color of the light emission effect image). good.

Further, when the normal variation effect or the shortened variation effect in which the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) is not executed is executed, the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped due to a loss, and then the stop suggestion light emission display effect is performed. It is better not to execute. By doing so, the number of times the light emission display effect is executed and the type of the light emission display effect to be executed change depending on the variable effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, even when the reach variation effect (normal reach variation effect, SP reach variation effect, SPSP reach variation effect) in which the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) is not executed is executed, the three effect symbols 70a are lost. It is advisable not to execute the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion after the temporary stop in. By doing so, the number of times the light emission display effect is executed and the type of the light emission display effect to be executed change depending on whether or not the hit is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even in the case of the variable effect in which the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) is executed, in the case of the SP reach variable effect, the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion is not executed, and in the case of the SPSP reach variable effect. May execute the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion.

Further, even if the stop suggestion pre-flash light display effect is not executed depending on the game state (for example, the stop suggestion pre-flash light display effect is executed in the normal game state, while the stop suggestion pre-flash light display effect is not executed in the specific game state). However, the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) is not executed depending on the game state (the second stop suggestion effect is executed in the normal game state, while the second stop suggestion effect is not executed in the specific game state). May be good.

In addition, when it is possible to execute the stop suggestion light emission display effect regardless of the game state, the stop suggestion light emission display effect in the normal game state and the stop in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state). The execution time of the light emission effect before the suggestion may be different (for example, the execution time of the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion in the normal gaming state> the execution time of the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion in the specific gaming state, etc.). In this way, the time from the light emission display effect before the stop suggestion to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) can be executed regardless of the game state, the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) and the specific game state (time saving game state, probability change) in the normal game state are enabled. The execution time of the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) in (at least one of the gaming states) may be different (for example, the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect in the normal gaming state> the second stop suggestion in the specific gaming state). Execution time of the production, etc.). By doing so, the time from the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect) to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the hold icon HI is displayed again after the end of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon HI may not be displayed again depending on the type of the SPSP reach effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach effect is executed or the second SPSP reach effect that is lost is executed, the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the execution of the first stop suggestion effect, and the jackpot is displayed. When the second SPSP reach effect is executed, the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion effect (displaying the eye-catching image) or redisplaying the hold icon HI. You may.

In addition, the hold icon HI is displayed again after the end of the SPSP reach effect. The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, the big hit effect symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped after the revival effect is executed, and the hold icon may be redisplayed, or the big hit effect symbol 70a may be displayed or held after the revival effect is executed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without redisplaying the icon HI.

If the stop command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the reach loss variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot variation effect. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot variation effect, the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot variation effect is higher than the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the reach loss variation effect. It can be longer. Further, when the stop time command or the opening designation command cannot be normally received in the jackpot variation effect, the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the jackpot variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the effect symbol 70a in the reach loss variation effect. It's getting longer.

In addition, in FIGS. 97 (g) to 97 (h), the "design promotion effect" may be executed. The “design promotion effect” means, for example, that at the timing T7 in FIG. 97, an effect symbol (for example, “444”) suggesting that it is the first big hit is displayed, and then it is suggested that it is the second big hit. It is an effect of changing and displaying the effect symbol (for example, "777") to be performed.
Specifically, the effect symbol (for example, "444") is scrolled up and down, and the effect symbol (for example, "777") is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 17. Then, the effect is completed by the timing T9 of FIG. 97, and the effect is stopped and displayed at the effect symbol (for example, "777") at the timing T10 of FIG. 97.

The “design promotion effect” is not limited to the above example, and the effect symbol suggesting that it is the third big hit (for example, “555”) to the effect symbol suggesting that it is the second big hit (for example, “777””. ) May have a pattern to be changed and displayed, and the effect symbol suggesting that it is the first jackpot (for example, "444") to the effect symbol suggesting that it is the third jackpot (for example, "555"). There may be a pattern to be changed and displayed in.

Further, when a plurality of types of promotion patterns are provided and the "symbol promotion effect" is executed in a specific promotion pattern, it may be confirmed that the effect pattern (for example, "777") is changed and displayed.
Further, the execution time of the "design promotion effect" is not limited to FIGS. 97 (g) to 97 (h), and there may be another execution time. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot game.

(A modified example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
FIG. 100 shows a modification of FIGS. 97 and 99, and the difference is that after hiding the icon TI and the hold icon HI at the time of development, the icon TI and the hold icon HI are not displayed again, and the game is a big hit. It is a point to shift.

Specifically, as described in FIG. 96, the icon TI and the hold icon HI are hidden at the time of development (see FIG. 100 (b)). That is, the icon TI and the hold icon HI are hidden at the timing T2 in FIG.

Then, the icon TI and the hold icon HI as shown in FIGS. 99 (h) to 99 (j) are not redisplayed or disappeared by the animation of the icon TI, and the opening of the jackpot game is started. (See FIGS. 100 (k) and 100 (l)).

With such a configuration, control for redisplaying the icon TI and the hold icon HI and control for displaying the icon TI disappear by animation are not required, so that the control load can be expected to be reduced.

Further, the time for redisplaying the icon TI and the hold icon HI and the time for extinguishing and displaying the icon TI by animation can be omitted, and the game can be quickly shifted to the jackpot game. As a result, the hobby of the game can be improved.

The embodiment shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 may be provided together with the embodiment shown in FIG. 99, may be provided with only FIG. 100, or may be provided with only FIG. 99.

Further, when the aspect shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 is provided together with the aspect shown in FIG. 99, it may be used properly depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 99 may be used, and in the probabilistic gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 100 may be used, or vice versa.

(Specific example of light emission mode of start port lamp)
A specific example of the light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. Note that FIG. 101 shows the light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76 in the example of FIG. 100, but the application example is not limited to this, and may be applied to the example of FIG. 89 or applied to the example of FIG. 92. It may be applied to the example of FIG. 96, or may be applied to the example of FIG. 99.

FIG. 101 (a) is a light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100 (a). Here, as an example, the icon TI is displayed in “red” and the start port lamp 76 is “ It indicates that it is emitting light in "red".

FIG. 101 (b) shows a light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100 (b), and the “red” icon TI and the like are hidden by the display of the developed image SEG, but the start port is displayed. The lamp 76 continues to visibly indicate that it is emitting "red".

FIG. 101 (c) is a light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100 (c), and the icon TI and the like are hidden during the execution of the SP reach effect, but the start port lamp 76 is It shows that it continues to emit light in "red" so that it can be visually recognized.

FIG. 101 (k) shows a light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100 (k), showing that the variation effect is completed (the effect symbol is stopped and displayed) and the start port lamp 76 is turned off. Shows.

With this configuration, even if the icon TI or the like is hidden, the color of the icon TI or the like can be confirmed by visually observing the light emitting mode of the start port lamp 76. It is possible to prevent forgetting what color the icon TI or the like has changed to.

(Specific example when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production)
A specific example of a case of recovering from a power failure generated during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.

FIG. 102 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from a power failure generated during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 103 to 105 are diagrams showing examples of effect at various timings of FIG. 102. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 102, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “2” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, three effect symbols 70a are scroll-displayed (updated variable), and the special symbol TZ is updated-variable (scrolled display, switched display). Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 103 (a)).

Next, when a power failure occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at the timing of T1 in FIG. 102, the main control board 110 performs a process when the power is cut off, and the first special symbol display 60 and the like are displayed. The main information display 59 including the main information display 59, the sub information display 80 including the sub first variation display, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. are hidden, and the game sound output from the voice output device 9 ( (Variable BGM, etc.) is also in a non-output state (see FIG. 103 (b)).

Then, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 102, the reading screen (initial screen) including the characters "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. A command when the power is turned on from the main control board 110, which has restored the control state of the game to the state before the power failure occurred, to the effect control board 130 (here, the second power supply indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). The recovery designation command, the first special symbol storage designation command, and the second special symbol storage designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is restarted, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is restarted from the state before the power was cut off, and the first special symbol hold display is displayed. The "2" display of the first hold number in 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 103 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the command when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initial stage of various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) At the same time as the operation (including the return operation) is started, the information display on the sub information display 80 is started (see FIG. 103 (d)).

At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the uppermost layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at the time of power restoration, at the time of power restoration) are set. The effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ that are the initial appearance of the Image data for power recovery notification set in the layer is generated and displayed. At this time, the visual recognition of various effect images is restricted by the power restoration image, but the background image and the hold icon are in the effect operation state, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position. Become. Further, the hold icon HI is set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if the special display mode is before the power cut, and the icon TI is hidden even if it is displayed before the power cut. (See FIG. 103 (d)).

Further, in the sub information display 80 during the power recovery notification, the sub first fluctuation display 81 and the sub second fluctuation display 82 are in a state of being stopped without displaying the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 and the sub are displayed. The second hold indicator 84 is in a state of displaying the number of holds (see FIG. 103 (d)).

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 102 (power restoration notification is ongoing), the first hold number becomes "3" and the first special symbol hold indicator 63. Is displayed as "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 104 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display 83 display “3”. Become. In addition, additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode to the third display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is started by animation, but it is visually recognized by the power recovery image set in the upper layer. Is in a regulated state (see FIG. 104 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 102, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses after the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is completed, the stop command (design) from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Confirmation command) is sent. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 104 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and various effect images whose visibility is restricted by the power restoration image. (Background image according to the effect mode when the power is restored, effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ which are the initial appearances when the power is restored, the current hold number and the hold icon HI according to the effect mode, and the current hold number. (Holding numbers, etc.) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 105 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 102, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "3" to "2" and the jackpot determination is performed, from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "2" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 105 (i). )reference).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 102 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display are displayed. The device 83 is displayed as “2”, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (see FIG. 105 (j)).

Further, the three hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variation BGM is started. (See FIG. 105 (j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 102 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Further, the scroll display (update variation) of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 105 (k)).

When the effect mode D (probability variation game state) is controlled or the effect mode F is controlled when the power is restored, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the fourth mode. The numerical image of the symbol 70a becomes the initial effect symbol "753" which is common to the case where the effect mode A (normal game state) is controlled when the power is restored. It should be noted that the initial effect symbol is set to "246" or the like so that it can be distinguished from the case where it is controlled to the effect mode A (normal game state) when the power is restored when it is controlled to the effect mode D (probability variable game state) when the power is restored. You may do it.

Further, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Therefore, the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state specification command while the reading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and is waiting for the execution of the variable effect without the power recovery notification being performed (effect pattern). The variable standby screen (where 70a can be visually recognized) will be displayed.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the jackpot game and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the main control board 110. Therefore, after the reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power recovery notification is performed, and then the effect screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

In this way, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set as the upper layer. By generating image data in which the hold icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set in the lower layer and displaying it on the main display device 70, the hold icon in the lower layer is restricted from being visually recognized. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player is confused after the power is restored. Further, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, if a special symbol memory designation command indicating that the number of holds has increased is received, the increase is responded to. Image data including the hold icon is generated. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

Further, even when the visual recognition of the hold icon is restricted by the power restoration image, the hold icon and the background image perform the effect operation. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the visibility of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased) by animation when the number of holds increases. There is. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

Further, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a is different depending on whether the control is performed in the first effect mode (effect mode A) or the second effect mode (effect modes D and F) when the power is restored. However, the numerical image of the effect symbol 70a has common numerical information (“753”). Therefore, even if the display mode of the effect symbol differs depending on the effect mode after the power is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the power is restored.

Further, in the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84). , The display mode of the hold display is not changed based on the look-ahead result, but the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70). Then, the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the look-ahead result, and when the power supply is stopped, the hold display is not performed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored. Is the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 63) rather than the restart timing of the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70). , The second special symbol hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84), the hold display restart timing is earlier. Therefore, it is possible to let the player grasp the number of holdings at an early timing while notifying that the power supply is being restored. It should be noted that the hold display restart timing in the first hold display area may be earlier than the hold display restart timing in the second hold display area.

Further, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the special display mode before the occurrence of the power failure is displayed in the normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, it is not necessary to back up and store information indicating that the hold icon is in the special display mode in the effect control board 130, and it is possible to avoid complicated hardware configuration of the effect control board 130. ..

Further, after the power is restored, the hold icon is visibly displayed after the fluctuation display (blinking due to the moving lighting of the LED) on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is resumed. It has become like. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after displaying the power recovery image, the initial operation (including the return operation) of various accessories (movable effect device 73, sub display device 71, effect button 17) performs the effect operation at different timings for each accessory. It is designed to be executed in the same manner as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the initial operation of various accessories is executed by the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is a directing operation.

The sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 are in a state of being stopped and displayed without displaying the fluctuation during the power recovery notification, but the power recovery notification is in progress ( The variation display may be performed after receiving the second power recovery designation command indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, and the stop display may be performed when the stop command (symbol confirmation command) is received.

(Specific example when the start command could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect)
A specific example of the case where the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108.

FIG. 106 is a timing chart when the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. 107 to 108 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings of FIGS. 106. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 106, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “2” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, three effect symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 107 (a)).

Next, when the look-ahead zone effect is started at the timing of T1 in FIG. 106, the above-mentioned in-zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a side-scrolled state, and the zone image ZG including the character image of "ZONE" is displayed. Further, the volume of the variable BGM is lowered and the output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 107 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 106, when the central effect symbol 70a that has been scrolled (updated and fluctuated) temporarily stops, the voice output device 9 starts outputting the temporary stop sound, and the character of the central effect symbol 70a is started. Performs an effect operation (an operation before stopping that shakes the head), and all the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 107 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound is stopped, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110. A stop command (design confirmation command) is sent to. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 107 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C in the animation is started, and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a (“523”) and the special symbol TZ (“523”) is started (. (See FIG. 107 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 107 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 108 (g). )reference).

However, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the start command, the hold display was originally updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. 106 (the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display 83. Update, hold icon HI shift display) and variable effects should be executed, but they will not be executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect effect that should be executed from the current variation effect to the two variation effects is not started. However, even during the extension period of the stop display period of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the side-scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the effect operation of the hold icon HI are continuously performed. (See FIG. 108 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 106, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 108 (i)).

However, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ should be executed. Will not be executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 63 is displayed as "0", and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 60 is started (FIG. 108 (j). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 106 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold The display 83 becomes a “0” display, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (see FIG. 108 (k)).

Further, of the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the change display of the previous special symbol is erased in a non-animated manner, and the second hold icon HI is deleted. The hold icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the display unit is displayed in the first display unit in a non-animated manner. Then, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit starts the shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 108 (k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 106 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the floating display of the effect symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect to be executed from the previous variation effect to the two variation effects. The effect is started one time later, and a blue light emitting effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 108 (l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 106 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a is started.

In this way, when the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the special symbol to be executed for the predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by not executing the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the special symbol for which the predetermined look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) should be started, the special symbol It is restricted that a predetermined look-ahead effect is started during the variable display, and if the variable effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol to be executed next, the pre-reading restricted during the variable display of this special symbol is performed. The production has started. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by not executing the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation display of the special symbol is executed but the variation effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by not executing the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the variable BGM (suggestion effect sound) is output during the execution of the variation effect (suggestion effect) for suggesting the result of the jackpot determination, and the target variation effect that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. From the front, a zone BGM (pre-effect sound) suggesting that a special game may be executed is output, and a zone BGM is output even after the start of the target variation effect, and when the zone BGM is output. , The suggestive effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, the effect of the look-ahead zone effect can be enhanced, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The volume of the variable BGM is reduced during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (during the output of the zone BGM), but the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute) during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. You may do it.

Further, even if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command and the icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect that is executed over a plurality of variable effects are not executed, the variable effect is executed next. The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variable effect to be performed.

In addition, the look-ahead effect effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. You may execute a look-ahead countdown effect that performs a countdown effect (displaying a countdown image, outputting a countdown sound), or you may perform a so-called chance eye (556, 667, etc.) for each variable effect (not including the variable effect that becomes a big hit). Temporarily stop (missing rolls with a certain rule that does not form a reach state), and display the emission effect image and output the effect sound effect around the three effect symbols 70a for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). The look-ahead chance eye effect (light emission display effect when the chance eye is stopped) may be executed, or the three look-ahead effects may be executed.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance eye effect (light emission display effect when the chance eye is stopped), the odd-numbered symbols among the effect symbols are used instead of the outcomes having a certain rule such as "556" and "667". The numbers of even-numbered symbols are set to red, and the numbers of the three production symbols 70a such as "135" and "357" are all red. It is also possible to temporarily stop (stop display) a symbol of the same color in which all the numbers of the three effect symbols 70a such as "468" are blue. In this case, the symbol of the same color in blue is temporarily stopped. The jackpot expectation may be higher when the red same-colored symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the look-ahead chance eye effect (light emission display effect when the chance eye is stopped), a light emission effect image is displayed around the three effect symbols 70a at the timing when the three (three columns) effect symbols 70a on the left, middle and right are temporarily stopped. Instead of making the effect sound output, the effect is temporarily stopped each time the three (three columns) effect symbols 70a on the left, middle, and right are temporarily stopped (for example, each time the bound is displayed). By displaying the effect image around the symbol 70a and outputting the emission effect sound effect (for example, 0.5 seconds each), the timing at which the three (three rows) effect symbols 70a on the left, middle, and right emit light. May be different.

Further, in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye effect can be executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed. You may not do it.

Further, in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed. You may do it.

Further, in the look-ahead chance eye effect, the light emission effect image is not displayed around the three effect symbols 70a, but only around the effect symbol 70a in one of the left middle right columns (for example, the center column). The image may be displayed.

Further, when displaying the light emission effect image in the look-ahead chance eye effect, the frame lighting device 10 is set to the same color as the display color of the light emission effect image displayed around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a. ) May be used to emit light.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command is received while the menu image is displayed)
A specific example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 110 when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed.

FIG. 109 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of production at various timings of FIG. 109. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 109, there is a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. At this time, the loss special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60, and the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation) on the main display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed. Is in a state of being stopped and displayed at the loss result (“537”) which is the stop result of the previous fluctuation effect. Further, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 110 (a)).

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T1 in FIG. 109, the menu operation becomes valid, and the main display device 70 has a plurality of types of selection items (games) in a state of being overlapped in front of the effect symbol 70a. "Model description" item that displays the explanation about the machine 1, "Production customization" item for customizing the effect in the variable effect, "Pachi log" item for log management linked with the mobile phone) The menu image MG including the above is displayed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 109, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the main control board 110 (disconnection, disconnection of the connector, etc.), the main control board 110 The process when the power is cut off is performed, and the main information display 59 including the first special symbol display 60 is in a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub information display 80, the main display device 70, and the sub display device 71 continue (see FIG. 110 (c)).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3 in FIG. 109, a checksum determination is made as to whether or not the data in the game RWM area is damaged, and the data is damaged. Processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game. Then, a power ON time command (here, a power-on designation command, a first special symbol storage designation command, and a second special symbol storage designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, information display on the main information display 59 (display of a lost special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, etc.) is started (see FIG. 110 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 109, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the power ON command, the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 include the characters "NOW ROADING". The reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub information display 80 is hidden for a moment, and the game sound (variable BGM, etc.) is not output on the voice output device 9 (FIG. 110 (e)). reference).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 109, when a predetermined period elapses after the reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of the above-mentioned power-on notification and various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) are restored. (Including the operation) is started, and the information display on the sub information display 80 is started (see FIG. 110 (f)).

At this time, in the main display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the initial appearance (“135”) at the time of turning on the power in front of the mode A background image in which the side-scrolling (effect operation) is started. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. Further, the power-on notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the mute output at the cue of the variable BGM is started (see FIG. 110 (f)).

Even when the power restoration designation command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial outcomes (“753”) at the time of power restoration. Except for the point and the point that the power-on notification sound is not output, it is basically the same as when the power-on designation command is received.

Also, when the power ON command (power ON specification command, power recovery specification command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the power ON command is basically received while the menu image MG is being displayed. Same as the case.

In this way, the command received from the main control board 110 by the effect control board 130 when the menu image MG is displayed on the main display device 70 is a power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command). In this case, the main display device 70 makes the menu image invisible and displays an image (reading screen or the like) corresponding to the command when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, and the game ball can be launched. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game is ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the ball lending is arranged in parallel with the game machine 1. Although it is possible to pay out a game ball based on a payout request from the machine (ball lending), a game ball based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the progress control of the game is started and the game becomes playable. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) is not paid out when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Although the payout ball number data does not remain, the backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. If the unpaid payout number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid payout ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out the game ball based on it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the grant condition (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the large winning opening). The ball may be managed as data and the prize ball data may be added (added to the holding ball data).

Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the upper side and / or the lower side of the screen so as to cross the screen, and the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. The zone image may be displayed on the left side and / or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. By doing so, it is possible to make the two look-ahead zone effects compatible with each other, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot notice effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the main display device 70 may execute the whiteout effect. In this case, the basic flow of the production may be the same as that of the blackout production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the variable effect is basically the same between the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), but for example, the execution mode of the variable effect is the same as that of the previous stage effect in the normal game state. Post-stage production (pre-reach production and reach production case, normal reach production and SP reach production case, SP reach production and SPSP reach production case, pre-reach production and production design temporarily stopped case, reach production and production design The first information (information suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the latter stage effect of the variable effect consisting of (the case during the temporary stop of 70a, etc.). , Second information different from the first information during the execution of the second stage effect of the variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the specific game state (additional information of the music that can be selected by operating the cross key 19), mission achievement status Etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the normal gaming state, there is a case where the common second stage effect is executed after the first first stage effect is executed, and a case where the second first stage effect different from the first first stage effect is executed. The common latter stage effect may be executed, and information regarding the execution of the special game may be notified in the common latter stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed)
A timing chart in the case where the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 111. It should be noted that FIG. 111 is a timing chart for explaining FIG. 97 in more detail, and in particular, the aspects of the “frame lighting device”, the “panel lighting device”, the “button drive device”, and the “effect button light emitting LED”. The description will be described, and the description of the overlapping portion with FIG. 97 will be omitted as appropriate. Further, in order to facilitate the understanding of FIG. 111, the description will be supplemented with reference to FIG. 112.

Note that FIG. 111 describes, as an example, a case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the “normal game state” and the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same thing may be done in the "short-time game state" or the "probability change game state".

The timing T4 in FIG. 111 corresponds to the timing T4 in FIG. 97, and is the timing developed into the SP reach effect.
When the SP reach effect is developed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 perform SP reach light emission, the button drive device 17b is OFF, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c is extinguished. When executing the effect pattern 03 (see FIG. 36) of the blackout effect, the button drive device 17b is turned on for 3 seconds (the effect button 17 vibrates).

The timing T5 in FIG. 111 is the timing developed into the SPSP reach effect.
When the SPSP reach effect is developed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 perform SPSP reach light emission, the button drive device 17b is OFF, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c is extinguished. The button drive device 17b may be turned on when the cut-in notice is executed.

At the timing T6 of FIG. 111, a promotion sound (for example, “press”) is output as a sound effect in order to encourage the player to operate the effect button 17, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c emits white light.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 at the timing of T7, a success sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is output, and the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light over a predetermined period. The button drive device 17b is turned on for 5 seconds, and the effect button 17 vibrates. As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot has been achieved (see FIG. 112 (f)).

Then, at the timing of T8, the output of the success sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is stopped, and the rainbow emission of the effect button light emitting LED 17c ends. On the other hand, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b is still ON. As described above, when the rainbow emission of the effect button emission LED 17c is terminated first, the player's viewpoint can be directed to the main display device 70 (see FIG. 112 (g)).

Then, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of T9, and when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command at the timing of T10, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. .. Further, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 end the rainbow emission, and the button drive device 17b is turned off (see FIG. 112 (i)).

In this way, since it is notified that the jackpot is a big hit even in each lighting device and the vibration of the effect button, it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player for the jackpot being obtained.

The output period of the success sound, the period of emitting rainbow light, and the period of vibrating the effect button 17 may be appropriately changed. For example, all of them may be executed up to the timing T10. Further, the rainbow emission of the effect button light emitting LED is first terminated, then the rainbow emission of the frame lighting device 10 is terminated, and finally the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 74 is terminated at the timing T10. May be good. Normally, the player pays attention to the main display device 70, and the rainbow emission of the board lighting device 74 close to the main display device 70 (compared to the frame lighting device 10 and the effect button light emitting LED) is the player's view. Easy to enter. Therefore, by finally ending the rainbow emission of the board lighting device 74 (easily in the field of view) at the timing T10, the mood of the player can be raised. Further, since the rainbow emission of the board lighting device 74 is completed, it is possible to easily recognize that the jackpot game will be executed from now on.

Further, the success sound, the rainbow emission, and the vibration may be continuously executed or may be executed intermittently. For example, in a determined effect, a success sound is output, light is emitted by rainbow emission, vibration is performed, these effects are once turned off, and then immediately before the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 112 (g)). , You may turn it on again. With this configuration, it is possible to clarify the scenes that the player wants to pay attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period during which the rainbow light is emitted may be different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, the jackpot is won in the short-time gaming state, or the jackpot is won in the probabilistic gaming state. For example, when the jackpot is won in the probabilistic gaming state, the period during which the rainbow light is emitted may be shorter than in the case where the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state. In other words, if a jackpot is won in a normal gaming state where it is difficult to win a jackpot, the period during which the rainbow is emitted is made longer than in the probabilistic gaming state, so that the player who wins the jackpot in a situation where it is difficult to win is given a superiority complex. Can be soaked. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in a probabilistic gaming state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, it is possible to prevent excessive jackpot notification by shortening the period during which the rainbow emission is performed compared to the normal gaming state. This enables suitable notification according to the situation (game state).

On the other hand, the output period of the success sound and the period of vibrating the effect button 17 may be a common execution period regardless of the gaming state. As a result, the output control of the success sound and the control of vibrating the effect button 17 can be shared in a plurality of game states, and the control and effect data can be simplified.
It should be noted that the output period of the success sound and the period of vibrating the effect button 17 may be different for each game state as in the period of performing the rainbow emission described above.

Although not particularly shown, not only the rainbow emission by each lighting device but also the rainbow display by the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 may be performed. This rainbow display starts at the timing of T7, and ends at the timing of T8 or the timings of T8 to T9, for example. That is, it ends before the rainbow emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. As a result, the decoration by the rainbow color is carried by the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and a new image (for example, a lingering image described later) is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. This makes it possible to enrich the display on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 without degrading the decorativeness.

(When the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, an effect mode when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 will be described.

If the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
Rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 → Rainbow light emission is continued even after the timing of T10 (the effect is extended and executed).
Since the rainbow emission is finished before the timing of the rainbow emission of the effect button emission LED 17c → T10, it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Since the output is finished before the output of the success sound → the timing of T10, it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Driving the button drive device 17b → When it is turned on for 5 seconds, it turns off, so it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
The icon TI → disappearance display is not performed, and the effect operation is continuously performed.
Background image → Continue horizontal scrolling of the normal background (continuous background change is possible). For example, as shown in the normal background image data of FIG. 119, the image data changes.

As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is continuously executed, so that the jackpot game is executed later. Can be surely grasped by the player.

Further, since the icon TI does not display the disappearance and continuously performs the effect operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
In addition, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally (the background can be continuously changed), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Success sound and rainbow emission at the timing of T7)
Here, further details (frames) of the success sound and the rainbow emission at the timing of T7 will be described.
In this embodiment, the update cycle (frame update timing) of the effect image controlled by the integrated control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and each lighting device controlled by the lamp control unit 150 (frame lighting device 10, The control cycle of the panel lighting device 74 and the effect button light emitting LED 17c) is synchronized (tuned) at 1/30 second.

For example, if the frame immediately before the timing of T7 in FIG. 111 is set to the “1500” frame (the “1st” frame at the start of fluctuation), the effect button detection sw17a is turned on at the “1501” frame of the timing of T7 (the effect button detection sw17a is turned on). The effect button 17 is operated by the player).
When the effect button detection sw17a is turned on, an operation command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In this case, in the image control unit 145, in the "1502" frame, which is the next frame of the "1501" frame in which the effect button detection sw17a is turned ON, a "success image" is added to the drawing frame buffer (for example, FIG. 98 (for example, FIG. 98). f)) is drawn, and the "success image" is expanded in the "1503" frame. As a result, the "successful image" can be visually recognized via the main display device 70.
Further, the voice control unit 148 outputs a "success sound" from the voice output device 9 in synchronization with the "1503" frame. This makes it possible to hear the success sound "Kyuinkyuin".

Further, the lamp control unit 150 outputs rainbow emission data for causing each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, effect button light emitting LED 17c) to emit rainbow light in synchronization with the "1503" frame. To. As a result, it becomes possible to visually recognize how each lighting device emits rainbow light.

In this way, in the above example, the "success image" is displayed, the "success sound" is output, and the light is emitted by the "rainbow emission" in synchronization with the "1503" frame. It is possible to keep pace with each other (without any deviation in any one of the notification means), and it is possible to execute a jackpot notification that is easy for the player to understand.

Although not listed in the example of FIG. 111, in the jackpot notification, even in the configuration of moving the movable effect device described later or the configuration of vibrating the vibrating means, the frame is synchronized with the "1503" frame in the above example. You just have to do it.

Then, for example, the "success sound" is turned off at the "1530" frame, and the rainbow light emission of the effect button light emitting LED 17c is turned off at the "1540" frame.
Then, for example, when the stop display is performed at the timing of T10 (for example, "1650th frame"), the rainbow emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 (either or both) is turned off.

As a result, in the above example, the rainbow emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 (either or both) ends in synchronization with the stop display of the "1650" frame, so that the rainbow emission is continued even after the stop display. It is not continuously executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.
The above description regarding frame synchronization can be applied to the following figure for explaining the jackpot notification.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the variable effect accompanied by the symbol promotion effect or the revival effect is completed)
An example in which the symbol promotion effect is executed, an example in which the revival effect is executed, and an example of the effect during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 113. It should be noted that FIG. 113 focuses on the parts different from those in FIG. 111 (mainly the effect symbol and the effect symbol mode). Further, in order to facilitate the understanding of FIG. 113, FIGS. 114 and 115 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115.

It should be noted that FIGS. 113 to 115 describe, as an example, a case where the jackpot game is executed after the variable effect accompanied by the symbol promotion effect or the revival effect is completed in the “normal game state”, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same thing may be done in the "time saving game state" or the "probability change game state".

(When "design promotion production" is executed)
At the timing T7 of FIG. 113, the effect symbol finishes the update fluctuation and temporarily stops. At this time, the effect symbol mode (temporarily stopped effect symbol) is set to "444" (first aspect in the effect symbol) (see FIGS. 114 (f) to (g)).
Further, the success sound "Kyuinkyuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button drive device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 vibrates.
As shown in FIGS. 114 (f) to 114 (g), when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped at "444", the special symbol TZ continues to be updated.

Then, from the timing T8 to T8-1, the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 114 (g) to (g)', each effect symbol 70a starts scrolling. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button drive device 17b is OFF.
When the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, the special symbol TZ continues to be updated in the same manner as before the "symbol promotion effect" is executed.

Then, if the "design promotion effect" is successful, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), the effect symbol 70a of "777" (second mode by the effect symbol) is temporarily stopped, and the "design promotion effect" fails. If so, for example, the effect symbol 70a of "444" is temporarily stopped again. At this time, the success sound "Kyuinkyuin" is output again as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button drive device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 is turned on. Vibrate.
In addition, the configuration for outputting the success sound again, the configuration for emitting rainbow light from each lighting device, and the configuration for vibrating the effect button 17 are executed only when the "symbol promotion effect" is successful, and the "design" is executed. If the "promotion effect" fails, it may not be executed.
In addition, also in FIG. 114 (h), the special symbol TZ continues to be updated in the same manner as before the execution of the “symbol promotion effect”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (i), both the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "777". That is, the special symbol TZ continues to be updated even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is updated even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped after the "symbol promotion effect" is executed. Is continued, and the update variation is terminated and the stop display is displayed together with the stop display of the effect symbol 70a. As a result, for example, even if there is a player who makes it difficult to understand whether or not the variable effect is continued by executing the "design promotion effect" of the effect symbol 70a, the variable effect is produced by the continuous update variation of the special symbol TZ. Can be recognized as continuing.

(When "Resurrection production" is executed)
Next, a case where the "revival effect" is executed will be described. For convenience, the case where the "design promotion effect" is executed and the case where the "revival effect" is executed are collectively described in FIG. 113, but after the "revival effect" is executed, the "design promotion effect" is displayed. It may be executed.

At the timing T7 of FIG. 113, the effect symbol finishes the update fluctuation and temporarily stops. At this time, the effect symbol mode (temporarily stopped effect symbol) is set to "454" (first aspect according to the effect symbol) (see FIGS. 115 (f) to (g)).
Further, a failure sound is output as a sound effect (see FIG. 93 (f)), the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF. be.
As shown in FIGS. 115 (f) to 115 (g), when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped at "454", the special symbol TZ continues to be updated.

Then, from the timing T8 to T8-1, the "revival effect" is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 115 (g) to (g)', the revival effect image FG imitating lightning is displayed. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button drive device 17b is OFF.
When the "revival effect" is executed, the special symbol TZ continues to be updated in the same manner as before the "revival effect" is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (h), the effect symbol 70a of "777" (the second aspect according to the effect symbol) is temporarily stopped. At this time, the success sound "Kyuinkyuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button drive device 17b is turned on, and the effect button 17 vibrates. ..
In addition, also in FIG. 115 (h), the special symbol TZ continues to be updated in the same manner as before the execution of the “revival effect”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (i), both the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "777". That is, the special symbol TZ continues the update fluctuation even if the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops before the "revival effect" is executed, and the update change continues even if the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops after the "revival effect" is executed. Then, along with the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the update variation is terminated and the stop display is performed. As a result, for example, even if there is a player who makes it difficult to understand whether or not the variable effect is continued by executing the "revival effect" of the effect symbol 70a, the variable effect is caused by the continuous update variation of the special symbol TZ. It is possible to recognize that it is continuing.

Then, in both cases where the "symbol promotion effect" is executed and the "revival effect" is executed, the game becomes a big hit game from the timing T14, and during the big hit game, among the effect symbols 70a stopped and displayed, Only the numerical portion of the effect symbol 70a of 1 is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 114 (m) and 115 (m), a round image RG showing the first round of the jackpot game and an acquired game ball number image GG showing the game balls acquired in the jackpot game. , The right-handed image UG, the character image KG, and the character introduction image KSG showing the details of the displayed character image KG are displayed. "7") is displayed at a position (for example, upper left) that does not overlap with other display images.

The number portion (for example, “7”) of the effect symbol 70a of 1 is a symbol corresponding to the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114 (i), and is displayed by swinging below the round image RG, for example. It is also displayed in the same size as the display size (see FIG. 114 (i)) when the stop display is displayed.
The display data of the numerical value portion (for example, "7") of the effect symbol 70a of 1 is different from the display data of the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114 (i).

In this way, by swinging and displaying the number portion (for example, "7") of the effect symbol 70a of 1, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect during the jackpot game.
Further, by displaying the numerical portion (for example, "7") of the effect symbol 70a of 1 so as not to overlap with another image (for example, right-handed image UG), the other image can be surely visually recognized. ..
Further, by displaying the numerical portion (for example, "7") of the effect symbol 70a of 1 in the same size as the display size (see FIG. 114 (i)) when the display is stopped, another image (for example, the right) is displayed. It is possible to prevent the display of the shot image UG) from being obstructed, and it is possible to reliably visually recognize other images.
Further, for example, if a symbol (for example, "seven") that does not correspond to the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114 (i) is displayed, the player may feel uncomfortable. If so, by displaying the symbol (for example, “7”) corresponding to the effect symbol 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114 (i), it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

During the big hit game, three effect symbols 70a may be displayed, (one or three) effect symbols 70a with characters may be displayed, and the effect symbols 70a may not be shaken. It may be stopped from beginning to end, rocking and stopping may be repeated, or it may be rotated. The effect symbol 70a with a character means a state in which a numerical symbol is attached to the character, for example, as in the effect symbol 70a of FIG. 114 (i).

In the example of FIG. 114, the “symbol promotion effect” performed in (g) to (g) ′ constitutes the pre-stop operation, and in the example of FIG. 115, the “symbol promotion effect” performed in (g) to (g) ′. "Resurrection production" constitutes the pre-stop operation.

(About the start timing of the variable display after the big hit game is over)
Here, a feature portion at the start timing of the variation display after the end of the jackpot game, which is not shown in FIG. 113, will be mentioned.
At the start timing of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, as the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, a symbol of the same type as the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at the timing T10 may be displayed. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 113, "777" is displayed as the effect symbol 70a and "777" is displayed as the special symbol TZ at the start timing of the variation display after the jackpot game ends, and the state thereof. The change display (first change) after the big hit game is started.

This makes it possible for the player to reconfirm what the jackpot symbol was at the start timing of the variation display after the jackpot game ends.
The same type of symbol is, for example, when the effect symbol 70a with a character is stopped and displayed at "777", the effect symbol 70a "777" with a character is displayed again at the start timing of the variation display after the end of the big hit game. When displaying, for example, when the effect symbol 70a with a character is stopped and displayed at "777", when the effect symbol 70a "777" with only numbers is displayed at the start timing of the variation display after the end of the big hit game, For example, it is assumed that when the number-only effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at "777", the number-only effect symbol 70a "777" is displayed at the start timing of the variation display after the jackpot game ends. ..

On the other hand, at the start timing of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, as the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, a symbol different from the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at the timing T10 may be displayed. .. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, in the stop display, "777" is stopped and displayed as the effect symbol 70a, and "777" is stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ. At the start timing, "135" (initial roll after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the effect symbol 70a, and "135" (initial roll after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the special symbol TZ. You may.
For example, when the customer is waiting at the end of the big hit game (when the hold is 0 at the end of the big hit game), the main display device 70 has "777" as the effect symbol 70a (the game at the start port). It will be stopped and displayed (until the ball wins), and "777" will be stopped and displayed as a special symbol TZ (until the game ball wins at the starting opening). In such a case, it may give a misunderstanding that it may shift to the jackpot game, so by displaying the initial result after the end of the jackpot game state as described above, such a misunderstanding is given. Can be prevented.

The configuration for displaying different types of symbols is particularly effective in a gaming machine that may display a predetermined symbol as a jackpot effect symbol 70a. The special symbol is a symbol that is not displayed as the effect symbol 70a in the update fluctuation in the normal gaming state, but is displayed only when the jackpot by the special symbol is won. For example, the jackpot display mode of the effect symbol 70a. Is "5 (left) -predetermined symbol (middle) -5 (right)". Even in such a case, at the start timing of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, "135" (initial roll after the jackpot game state ends) is displayed as the effect symbol 70a, and "135" (big hit) is displayed as the special symbol TZ. By displaying the initial result after the end of the game state), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that the predetermined symbol is displayed at the start timing of the variation display after the end of the jackpot game.

The characteristic portion at the start timing of the variation display after the end of the big hit game is not limited to FIG. 113, but is applied to the timing chart that shifts to the big hit game (for example, FIG. 111 described above and FIG. 117 described later). It's okay.

(When the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, an effect mode when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 will be described.

If the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
Rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 → Rainbow light emission is continued even after the timing of T10 (the effect is extended and executed).
Since the rainbow emission is finished before the timing of the rainbow emission of the effect button emission LED 17c → T10, it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Since the output is finished before the output of the success sound → the timing of T10, it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Since the vibration is terminated before the timing of the button drive device 17b drive → T10 is reached, it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the effect is not extended).
Even after the timing of the effect symbol 70a → T10, the temporary stop is continued at "777". Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until the opening designation command is received at the timing of T13.
The update fluctuation continues even after the timing of the special symbol TZ → T10. Then, for example, the update fluctuation is continued until the opening designation command is received at the timing of T13.
The icon TI → disappearance display is not performed, and the effect operation is continuously performed.
Background image → Continue horizontal scrolling of the normal background (continuous background change is possible).

As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is continuously executed, so that the jackpot game is executed later. Can be surely grasped by the player.

Further, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the effect symbol 70a is not displayed as a stop, the temporary stop is continued, and the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ is continued, so that it is recognized as a big hit. While making it possible, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot game is not started without displaying the stop display of each symbol.

Further, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a and the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ are terminated when, for example, the opening designation command is received at the timing of T13. As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, it can be terminated by the next received command (here, the opening designation command), so that the effect symbol 70a can be temporarily stopped or a special symbol can be received. It is possible to save the trouble of sending and receiving the dedicated command for ending the TZ update fluctuation again.

Further, since the icon TI does not display the disappearance and continuously performs the effect operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
In addition, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally (the background can be continuously changed), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variable effect is completed)
FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the effect image and the effect symbol of FIG. 92 in detail. Therefore, the effect image and the effect symbol will be mainly described, and the description of the overlapping portion with FIG. 92 will be omitted.

Note that FIG. 116 describes, as an example, a case where the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variation effect is completed in the “normal game state”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “time saving game state” and the “probability variation game” are not limited to this. The same may be done in the "state".

At the timing of T0 in FIG. 116, the effect symbol is updated and changed with a character. As described above, the character-attached state is a state in which a numerical symbol is attached to the character.
Then, at the timing of T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and the normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. The normal reach effect is performed by using the effect symbol 70a with a character. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "with a character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal reach effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a with a character changes to the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers (see, for example, FIG. 93 (a)). Then, the update change is performed with the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers.

When the effect symbol 70a with a character changes to the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers, for example, the character portion of the effect symbol 70a disappears from the state shown in FIG. 91 (g), and the number portion becomes FIG. 93 ( It is designed to move to the position shown in a). Then, during the movement, the display size of the numerical portion is gradually reduced to move to the position shown in FIG. 93 (a). That is, the display size of the number part at the timing when the character part disappears, the display size of the number part at the timing of moving (intermediate position), and the number part at the timing of moving to the position shown in FIG. 93 (a). With respect to the display size of, in descending order of display size, the timing at which the character portion disappears> the timing during movement (intermediate position)> the timing at which the character portion is moved to the position shown in FIG. 93 (a).
As a result, since only the numerical portion is not displayed in a manner of suddenly moving to the position shown in FIG. 93 (a), it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, by displaying all the movement modes visually to the player, it is possible to entertain the player even in small parts.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP reach effect is executed, and the SP reach image is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
Further, even during the execution of the SP reach effect, the update change is continuously performed with the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP reach effect is completed and the SPSP reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach image is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93 (d)).
Further, even during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the update change is continuously performed with the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T6, the determined image corresponding to the determined effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 93 (e)), and at the timing of T7, the effect image fails in response to the operation of the effect button 17. Display an image (see, for example, FIG. 93 (f)). At this time, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped at the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as a “temporary stop number”.

Then, at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers is changed to the effect symbol 70a with a character, and the aspect of the effect symbol 70a before the execution of the SP reach effect is restored. Then, a temporary stop is performed at the effect symbol 70a with a character. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "temporary stop capacity".

When changing from the effect symbol 70a with only numbers to the effect symbol 70a with characters, the movement mode can be visually recognized as in the case where the above-mentioned effect symbol 70a with characters changes to the effect symbol 70a with only numbers. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 131 described later, a switching image is displayed so that the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers is changed to the effect symbol 70a with characters. As a result, the mode of the symbol can be changed promptly, and for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable by showing the moving mode of the symbol after the loss is notified.

Then, at the timing of T10, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached.
With this configuration, in the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, by displaying in the display space of the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers, it is possible to concentrate on the effect contents of the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. Then, when the SPSP reach effect is completed, the next variable effect can be smoothly started without any discomfort by returning to the effect symbol 70a with a character.

In the example of FIG. 116, it is assumed that the effect symbol 70a changes to a mode of only numbers, but even if the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is performed, the effect symbol 70a may not change with the character attached. good.

In the example of FIG. 116, the “temporary stop” of the effect symbol 70a during the display of the failed images (f) to (g) constitutes the pre-stop operation.

(When the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, an effect mode when the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 will be described.

If the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The icon TI → disappearance display is not performed, and the effect operation is continuously performed.
Background image → Continue horizontal scrolling of the normal background (continuous background change is possible).
Even after the timing of the effect symbol 70a → T10, the effect symbol 70a with a character temporarily stops. Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until the start command is received at the timing of T13.
The update fluctuation continues even after the timing of the special symbol TZ → T10. Then, for example, the update fluctuation is continued until the start command is received at the timing of T13.

As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the effect symbol 70a is not displayed as a stop, the temporary stop is continued, and the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ is continued, so that each symbol is still stopped. It is possible to recognize that the next variation display is not started without displaying.

Further, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a and the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ are terminated when, for example, a start command is received at the timing of T13. As a result, even if the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, it can be terminated by the next received command (here, the start command), so that the effect symbol 70a can be temporarily stopped or a special symbol can be received. It is possible to save the trouble of sending and receiving the dedicated command for ending the TZ update fluctuation again.

Further, since the icon TI does not display the disappearance and continuously performs the effect operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
In addition, since the background image is normally scrolled horizontally (the background can be continuously changed), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed)
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the effect image and the effect symbol of FIG. 97 in detail. Therefore, the effect image and the effect symbol will be mainly described, and the description of the overlapping portion with FIG. 97 will be omitted.

Note that FIG. 117 describes, as an example, a case where the variable effect is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variable effect is completed in the “normal game state”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “time saving game state” and the “probability variable game” are not limited to this. The same may be done in the "state".

At the timing of T0 in FIG. 117, the effect symbol is updated and changed with a character. As described above, the character-attached state is a state in which a numerical symbol is attached to the character.
Then, at the timing of T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and the normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. The normal reach effect is performed by using the effect symbol 70a with a character. In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "with a character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal reach effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a with a character changes to the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers. Then, the update change is performed with the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers. The mode in which the effect symbol 70a with a character changes to the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers is the same as that described in FIG. 116.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP reach effect is executed, and the SP reach image is displayed as the effect image.
Further, even during the execution of the SP reach effect, the update change is continuously performed with the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP reach effect is completed and the SPSP reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach image is displayed as the effect image.
Further, even during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the update change is continuously performed with the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers.

Then, at the timing of T6, the determined image corresponding to the determined effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 98 (e)), and at the timing of T7, the effect image is successfully operated according to the operation of the effect button 17. Display an image (see, for example, FIG. 98 (f)). At this time, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped at the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers. In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as a “temporary stop number”.

Then, at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers is changed to the effect symbol 70a with a character, and the aspect of the effect symbol 70a before the execution of the SP reach effect is restored. Then, a temporary stop is performed at the effect symbol 70a with a character (see, for example, FIG. 98 (g)). In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "temporary stop capacity". The mode of changing from the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers to the effect symbol 70a with characters is the same as that described in FIG. 116.

Then, at the timing of T10, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached.
With this configuration, in the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, by displaying in the display space of the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers, it is possible to concentrate on the effect contents of the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect.

In the example of FIG. 116, the “temporary stop” of the effect symbol 70a during the display of the success images (f) to (g) constitutes the pre-stop operation.

In the example of FIG. 117, at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers is changed to the effect symbol 70a with a character, and at the timing of T10, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have another pattern.

For example, it may have the pattern shown in FIG. 118. In FIG. 118, at the timing of T8 in the example of FIG. 117, the effect symbol 70a having only numbers is changed to the effect symbol 70a with a character, but in FIG. 118, the effect symbol 70a with a character is changed at the same timing. It is configured to maintain the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers and to stop and display it as it is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (h), the effect symbol 70a "555" composed only of numbers temporarily stops, and then, from (i) to (l), it is composed only of numbers. The effect symbol 70a "555" displays a stop. Then, the game shifts to the jackpot game from (l).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the time required to change from the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers to the effect symbol 70a with characters, and it is possible to quickly shift to the jackpot game.

The case where the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 is basically the same as in FIG. 111, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

(About an example of normal background image data)
FIG. 119 is an example of normal background image data in mode A. Although mode A will be described as an example, other modes (for example, mode B) are configured in the same manner (only the image data contents are different).

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the normal background image data in the mode A is the image data of "castle town 1" (for example, one picture) → the image data of "castle town 2" (for example, one picture) → "castle town". It has a plurality of types of background image data such as image data (for example, one picture) of "3" (for example, stored in CGROM 146). Then, the update value corresponding to each image data is defined. The updated value is a value updated by the image control unit 145 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1/30 second), and normal background image data is selected with reference to the updated value. For example, an update value of "1" is set for "castle town 1", an update value of "2" is set for "castle town 2", and an update value of "3" is set for "castle town 3". If the current value updated in section 145 is "2", "castle town 2" is displayed.

Similarly, the image data "Castle 1" (for example, one picture) → the image data "Castle 2" (for example, one picture) → the image data "Castle 3" (for example, one picture) ... It has multiple types of background image data such as, if it is "inside 1", it is updated value "N", if it is "inside 2", it is updated value "N + 1", and if it is "inside 3", it is updated value. Is defined as "N + 2" respectively.

Similarly, the image data of "Garden 1" (for example, one picture) → the image data of "Garden 2" (for example, one picture) → the image data of "Garden 3" (for example, one picture) ... It has multiple types of background image data, such as "Garden 1" with updated value "N + 3", "Garden 2" with updated value "N + 4", and "Garden 3" with updated value. Is defined as "N + 5" respectively.

Next, a method of displaying a background image using such image data will be described with reference to (a) a timing chart in which the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variation effect is completed. The timing chart has the same contents as those described in FIG. 92.

From timings T0 to T2, horizontal scrolling of the normal background is displayed as a background image, and as an example, "castle town 2" is developed on layer N + 1. That is, the normal background image of "Castle Town 2" can be visually recognized by the player. Also, since it is set to "Castle Town 2", the updated value is "2".

Then, when the timing T2 is reached, the dark background is developed in the layer N, and the normal background image data is not developed in the layer N + 1. As a result, the dark background becomes visible to the player, and the background image related to the "castle town" displayed up to the timing T2 becomes invisible (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)). Although it is defined as "invisible", a part of the background image related to the "castle town" may be visible, or the entire background image related to the "castle town" may be faintly visible. That is, it may be "difficult to see".

The updated value is usually updated at predetermined intervals even if the background image data is not expanded. For example, the update value is updated to "3" from the timing T2.

Then, in the scene where the side-scrolling of the normal background is restarted from the timing T8 (same as the timing T8 of FIG. 92), the image control unit 145 selects the normal background image data with reference to the value to be updated. In the example of FIG. 119, the update value at the time of timing T8 is “N + 4”, and the normal background image data of “Garden 2” corresponding to the update value “N + 4” is expanded on the layer N + 1. As a result, when the SPSP reach effect is completed and the side-scrolling of the normal background is resumed, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.

That is, when the side-scrolling of the normal background is restarted from the timing T8 (same as the timing T8 in FIG. 92), the continuation of the timing when the normal background image becomes invisible (timing T2 in FIG. 119) (in the example of FIG. 119). If there is, it is not displayed from "Castle Town"), and it is assumed that the normal background image is continuously changing even during the invisible period, and the normal background image corresponding to the updated value at the time of restart is displayed (Fig.). In the example of 119, "garden").
For example, if the image is displayed from the timing when it becomes invisible at the time of restart, the amount of change in the normal background becomes small and gives the player a feeling of boredom. The amount of change can be abundant, and various types of normal background images can be visually recognized by the player. This can prevent the player from being bored.

In the example of (a) in FIG. 119, the background image is usually redisplayed using the updated value, but it can also be realized by another method. For example, in the modified example of FIG. 119 (b), no particular update value is used.

Specifically, even if the normal background image becomes invisible due to the timing T2, the development on the layer continues. For example, in the timing T2, the normal background image data of the "castle town 3" which is a continuation of the "castle town 2" developed up to the timing T2 is expanded on the layer N + 1. However, since layer N + 1 is a layer located behind layer N, when each layer is combined and displayed on the main display device 70, "Castle Town 3" is displayed due to the dark background developed on layer N. It becomes invisible. That is, although it is developed on the layer, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.

Then, the development on the layer is continued even after that, and the normal background image data developed on the layer N + 1 immediately before reaching the timing T8 is designated as "garden 1". Then, the timing when the timing T8 is reached is set as the display time for one frame of "Garden 1".

Then, in the scene where the side-scrolling of the normal background is restarted from the timing T8 (same as the timing T8 of FIG. 92), the image control unit 145 continuously develops the normal background image data on the layer N + 1. Here, "Garden 2", which is a continuation of "Garden 1", is developed. As a result, when the SPSP reach effect is completed and the side-scrolling of the normal background is resumed, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.
Even with this configuration, the same effect as when configured by the method (a) described above can be obtained.

Although an example of the normal background image data in the mode A has been described with reference to FIG. 119, it may be configured in the same manner (not redisplayed from the timing when it is hidden) in the reduced working hours game state and the probabilistic game state. .. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the image may be redisplayed from the timing when it is hidden, and when the image is redisplayed, a specific image data (for example, an image data displaying a specific character) may be displayed. ) May always be redisplayed. In particular, in the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, the amount of change in the background image is not as large as in the normal gaming state, so the image can be redisplayed from the timing when it is hidden, or specific image data (for example, a specific character). Display control can be simplified by redisplaying from the image data to be displayed. Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the normal gaming state, so that the time for the player to visually recognize the background image is reduced. Therefore, the display control can be simplified in this way.

It should be noted that the effect operation (sway operation) of the hold icon HI described in FIG. 72 is not redisplayed from the posture at the timing when it is hidden, and the effect operation (sway operation) is performed even during the invisible period. ) Is continuously performed, and it is redisplayed from the posture at the timing at the time of redisplay. As a result, various postures of the hold icon HI can be visually recognized by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored.
In addition, when the icon TI is hidden together with the hold icon HI, it may be configured in the same manner.

(About other production examples in the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation production)
FIGS. 120 to 122 show other production examples in the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation production. As another example of the effect, for example, a plurality of types of jackpot SPSP reach variation effects are provided, one of which is FIGS. 97 to 99, and the other example is FIGS. 120 to 122. In FIG. 120, the timing T5 will be described first, and since the timings T0 to T5 are the same as those in FIG. 97, the description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that FIGS. 120 to 122 describe, as an example, a case where the variable effect is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variable effect is completed in the “normal game state”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “time saving game state” and the like. The same thing may be done in the "probability changing game state".

At the timing T5, the SPSP reach effect is executed. In this SPSP reach production, as shown in FIG. 121 (d), the character image imitating a girl describes the line "I will stand on the stage again!" (Line image SER1), and the corresponding form. Then, as shown in FIGS. 121 (d) to 121 (e), the task image MG in the SPSP reach effect of "a big hit when a girl character stands on the stage by pressing a button" is displayed.
That is, the SPSP reach effect shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is such that the player operates the effect button 17 (for example, single hit, repeated hit, long press, etc.) and the girl character stands on the stage to obtain a big hit. be.

The serif image SER1 can be displayed with white characters in the normal mode and red characters in the special mode in which the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is higher than in the normal mode. That is, when the dialogue image SER1 is displayed in a special mode rather than displayed in a normal mode, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is higher (= the girl character is more likely to stand on the stage).

Then, the button introduction image BDG is displayed toward the timing T6, suggesting that the timing T6 is soon reached and the effect button 17 is operated.
Then, when the timing T6 is reached, the determined image is displayed, and the promotion sound of "press" is output from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 121 (e)).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated, a success image is displayed and a success sound is output (see FIGS. 121 (f) to (g)). Then, from the timing T8 to the timing T8-1, the "SPSP reach image (afterglow image)" as the effect image is displayed. Further, the SPSP reach BGM (afterglow BGM) is output from the audio output device 9 so as to correspond to this. At this time, all the effect symbols 70a are hidden (see FIGS. 121 (g) to (g)').

Then, a lingering image as shown in FIGS. 121 (g) to (g)'is displayed. This afterglow image is executed for a predetermined period as shown in FIGS. 122 (g) to (g)', and while the afterglow image is displayed, all the effect symbols 70a are hidden and the special symbol TZ is visibly updated and changed. Is continuing. If there is a hold icon, the hold icon is hidden.
That is, although it was notified in FIGS. 121 (f) to (g) that it was a big hit, it seems that the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ does not notify that it is a big hit during the subsequent display of the afterglow image. It has become.

This allows the player to concentrate on displaying the afterglow image. Further, by hiding the effect symbol 70a or the like, it is possible to make the lingering image easier to see. Further, even if the effect symbol 70a is hidden, the special symbol TZ continues to be visibly updated and varied, so that it is easy to understand that the continuous variation effect after the jackpot notification is executed.

In addition, the dialogue (serifu image SER2) of "everyone-thank you" shown in FIGS. 122 (g) to (g)'is displayed in white characters in a normal mode, and the above-mentioned dialogue image SER1 is displayed. It is designed not to display in a special mode as in. For example, even if the above-mentioned dialogue image SER1 is displayed in a special aspect, the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in a normal embodiment.

That is, since FIGS. 122 (g) to (g)'are already notified that the jackpot is a big hit, displaying the dialogue image SER2 in the normal mode prevents excessive production. can. Further, when the serif image SER2 is displayed in a special mode, there is a risk of misunderstanding that something may be notified even after FIGS. 122 (g) to (g)', but such a fear is also eliminated. can.
It should be noted that there is no problem even if the display mode of the serif image SER2 is based on the display mode of the serif image SER1. For example, once the special mode is determined as the display mode of the serif image SER1, the display mode of the serif image SER2 may also be the special mode. As a result, it is possible to make the production consistent.

Further, the afterglow image is related to, for example, the contents of the task image MG shown in FIGS. 121 (d) to 121 (e), and an effect that clears the contents of the task image MG is developed. This makes it possible to understand that there is a connection between the effects before and after the jackpot notification.
After that, when all the display of the afterglow image is completed, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at "555" from the timing T8-1 to the timing T9. That is, the effect symbol 70a is displayed from the timing T8-1.

While the afterglow image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c may be made to emit rainbow light. As a result, although the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ does not notify that the jackpot is a big hit, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot was obtained depending on the light emitting mode of each lighting device. In addition, since the afterglow image is displayed together with the rainbow emission, the player can be more satisfied. In addition, if the display time of the afterglow image becomes long, some players may be worried whether the jackpot was really obtained, but if each lighting device emits rainbow light, such anxiety may occur. Can also be resolved.

Further, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the button drive device 17b may be turned on to vibrate the effect button 17. As a result, although the effect symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ does not notify that the jackpot is a big hit, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot was obtained by the vibration of the effect button 17. Further, since the afterglow image is displayed together with the vibration of the effect button 17, the player can be more satisfied.

On the other hand, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 may be made to emit normal light (for example, white light is emitted), and the effect button light emitting LED 17c may be turned off. As a result, it is possible to pay more attention to the afterglow image without shifting to the light emitting mode of each lighting device.

Further, during the display of the afterglow image, the button drive device 17b may be turned off so as not to vibrate the effect button 17. As a result, it is possible to pay more attention to the lingering image without shifting to the vibration of the effect button 17.

Further, while the afterglow image is being displayed, all the effect symbols 70a are hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this unless the mode is to notify the jackpot. For example, the left and right effect symbols 70a may be displayed, and the effect symbol 70a inside may be displayed in a variable manner (for example, “5 ↓ 5”). This makes it possible to prevent forgetting what the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the jackpot was.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is lost, the movable effect device shown in FIGS. 121 (f) to (g) does not operate, and the lingering sound is shown in FIGS. 121 (g) to (g) ′. The variable effect ends without displaying the image. That is, in the case of a loss, the lingering image is not displayed, and the lingering image can be worth displaying only when a big hit is obtained. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable by displaying the lingering image corresponding to the loss for a long time despite the loss.

The case where the effect control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10 is basically the same as in FIG. 111, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 123 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. It should be noted that Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timings of the operation means are different in the same SPSP reach fluctuation effect (loss).
For convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used for the configuration of the fluctuation start, and the configuration up to the development of the SPSP reach effect is described in FIG. 92. It is sufficient to use the above-mentioned configuration.

Note that FIG. 123 describes, as an example, a case where the loss SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The timing T2 is the timing at which the determined image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (beginning of the operation valid period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is "N + 2nd cycle".

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 6th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 5th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 14th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 13th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

Since each case is an SPSP reach fluctuation effect (loss), a temporary stop is started from the timing T3 in a mode of displaying a failure image, outputting a failure sound, and notifying the effect symbol 70a of the loss.

Then, in each case, the failure image is displayed and the temporary stop is continuously performed in the mode of notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a until the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case of case 1, the failure image is displayed from "N + 6th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and the temporary stop is performed in a mode of notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a, and in the case of case 2. , From "N + 14th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the display of the failed image and the temporary stop in the form of notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a will be performed, and the case 1 is the case 2 The period of temporary stop (about 2 seconds) in the mode of displaying the failed image and notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a is longer than that.

The output of the failure sound is performed for about 1 second (about 4 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) differs depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. It is designed not to occur.

That is, in the case of case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T4 is "about 52 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the cycle performed between timing T3 and timing T4. The number of fluctuations is "about 44 cycle fluctuations", and there will be a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T4.

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle fluctuation executed until the effect symbol displays the stop is "1st cycle" to "N + 85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed until the timing T8.

That is, in each case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T4 and the timing T6 (or T8) is "about 28 cycle fluctuations", and the cycle performed between the timing T4 and the timing T6 (or T8). There will be no difference in the number of fluctuations.

Further, in the case of Case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T3 when the effect button 17 is operated by the player, the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display, or the timing T8 until the effect symbol ends is the number of times. In contrast to the case of "about 80 cycle fluctuation", in the case of case 2, the timing T6 from the timing T3 when the effect button 17 is operated by the player to the start of the stop display of the effect symbol, or the timing T8 until the end of the effect symbol is displayed. The number of cycle fluctuations performed during the period is "about 72 cycle fluctuations", and there will be a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T3 and the timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in any case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display or the timing T8 until the effect symbol ends. Is "about 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, the display of the failed image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T4 and the mode of notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in, it gives the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or misunderstands that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. Was sometimes given.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the reach variation effect has been executed.

Further, since the output of the failure sound is performed for about 1 second (about 4 cycle fluctuation) in each case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player is made to recognize that it is a loss. Can be done.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the timing T3 to the timing T4 The period of is even shorter than in Case 2. For example, when the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 is about 8 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 32 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. It should be noted that Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timings of the operation means are different in the same SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit).
For convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used for the configuration of the fluctuation start, and the configuration up to the development of the SPSP reach effect is described in FIG. 97. It is sufficient to use the above-mentioned configuration.

Note that FIG. 124 describes, as an example, a case where the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The timing T2 is the timing at which the determined image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (beginning of the operation valid period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is "N + 2nd cycle".

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 6th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 5th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 14th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 13th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

Since each case is an SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit), a temporary stop is started from the timing T3 in a mode of displaying a success image, outputting a success sound, and notifying the big hit of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, the movable effect device starts operating at the timing T3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction.
Then, the movable effect device operates until the timing T3-1.

Then, in each case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continuously performed in the manner of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a until the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case of case 1, the success image is displayed from "N + 6th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and the temporary stop is performed in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and in the case of case 2. , From "N + 14th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and temporary stop will be performed in a mode to notify the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and case 1 is the case. The period of temporary stop (about 2 seconds) in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a is longer than that of 2.

The output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and is performed during the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. There is no difference.

In addition, the operation of the movable effect device (standby position → effect position, effect position → standby position) is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuation) in each case, and the operation period (and the operation period (and) depends on the operation timing of the effect button 17. There is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the operating period.

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle fluctuation executed until the effect symbol displays the stop is "1st cycle" to "N + 85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed until the timing T8.

That is, in the case of Case 1, the timing T6 is performed after the success image is displayed at the timing T3, the success sound is output, the temporary stop is performed in a manner of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and the operation of the movable effect device is started. The number of cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbol stops and is displayed at (or T8) is "about 80 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the success image is displayed and the success sound is displayed at timing T3. Cycle that is executed from the start of the output of the The number of fluctuations is "about 72 cycle fluctuations", and there will be a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in any case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display or the timing T8 until the effect symbol ends. Is "about 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, the display of the success image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in, it gives the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or misunderstands that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. Was sometimes given.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the reach variation effect has been executed.

Further, since the output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuation) in each case, the player recognizes that it is a big hit even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different. Can be made to.

Further, since the operation of the movable effect device is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuation) in each case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player is made to recognize that it is a big hit. be able to.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the timing T3 to the timing T6 The period of is even shorter than in Case 2. For example, when the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is about 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 125 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. It should be noted that Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timings of the operation means are different in the same SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit).
For convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used for the configuration of the fluctuation start, and the configuration up to the development of the SPSP reach effect is described in FIG. 97. It is sufficient to use the above-mentioned configuration.

Note that FIG. 125 describes, as an example, a case where the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The timing T2 is the timing at which the determined image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (beginning of the operation valid period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is "N + 2nd cycle".

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 6th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 5th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 14th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 13th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

Since each case is an SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit), a temporary stop is started from the timing T3 in a mode of displaying a success image, outputting a success sound, and notifying the big hit of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, the vibration means (button drive device 17b) starts operating at the timing T3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (f), the effect button 17 vibrates due to the operation of the button drive device 17b.
Then, the vibration means operates until the timing T3-1.

Then, in each case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continuously performed in the manner of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a until the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case of case 1, the success image is displayed from "N + 6th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and the temporary stop is performed in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and in the case of case 2. , From "N + 14th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and temporary stop will be performed in a mode to notify the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and case 1 is the case. The period of temporary stop (about 2 seconds) in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a is longer than that of 2.

The output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and is performed during the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. There is no difference.

Further, the operation of the vibrating means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and the operation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the operation period) differs depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. It is designed not to occur.

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle fluctuation executed until the effect symbol displays the stop is "1st cycle" to "N + 85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed until the timing T8.

That is, in the case of Case 1, the timing T6 (the timing T6 ( Or, in T8), the number of cycle fluctuations executed until the effect symbol stops is displayed is "about 80 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the success image is displayed or the success sound is displayed at timing T3. Temporary stop in the mode of notifying the output and the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and the cycle fluctuation executed from the start of the operation of the vibrating means to the stop display of the effect symbol at the timing T6 (or T8). The number of times is "about 72 cycle fluctuations", and there will be a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in any case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display or the timing T8 until the effect symbol ends. Is "about 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, the display of the success image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in, it gives the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or misunderstands that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. Was sometimes given.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the reach variation effect has been executed.

Further, since the output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuation) in each case, the player recognizes that it is a big hit even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different. Can be made to.

Further, since the vibration means is operated for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuation) in each case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player is made to recognize that it is a big hit. Can be done.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the timing T3 to the timing T6 The period of is even shorter than in Case 2. For example, when the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is about 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when vibration effect occurs in each scene of variable effect)
126 and 127 are timing charts showing a case where a vibration effect is generated in each scene of the variation effect.
Specifically, the vibration effect at the start of fluctuation, the vibration effect at the time of development, and the vibration effect at the time of jackpot notification are shown.
A part of the vibration effect at the start of fluctuation is excerpted from FIG. 78, a part of the vibration effect at the time of development is excerpted from FIG. 92, and a part of the vibration effect at the time of jackpot notification is excerpted from FIG. 97. Excerpt. Therefore, the description of the part that overlaps with the excerpt source is omitted.

The vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" indicates, for example, the vibration (1 second) at the start of fluctuation in the accessory notice described in FIG. 36.
In the vibration effect, the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated at the timing T7 when the effect symbol starts the floating display and the special symbol starts the update fluctuation in the middle of the first cycle, and the effect button 17 is activated. Is a vibrating production.

Then, the vibration effect is continuously performed until the timing T9-1 which is in the middle of the fifth cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 4 cycle fluctuations (about 1 second) from the middle of the 1st cycle to the middle of the 5th cycle.

It should be noted that the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is performed from timing T7 to timing T9-1 in both cases where the start port is won in the waiting state for customers and the variation effect is continuously performed.
Further, the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is executed based on the character advance notice pattern described in FIG. 36, but is determined independently without being particularly based on the character advance notice pattern. It may be like this.

The vibration effect at the "development time" shows, for example, the vibration (3 seconds) at the time of executing the development effect in the blackout effect described with reference to FIG. 36.
The vibration effect is, for example, at the start of the Nth cycle, at the timing T3 where the development sound is output as a sound effect, the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated and the effect button 17 vibrates. be.

Then, the vibration effect is continuously performed until the timing T4, which is the end of the N + 11th cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 12 cycle fluctuations (about 3 seconds) from the start of the Nth cycle to the end of the N + 11th cycle.

The vibration effect at the time of the big hit notification shows, for example, the vibration (5 seconds) at the time of the big hit notification in the determined effect described with reference to FIG.
The vibration effect is, for example, vibration at the start of the N + 40th cycle, at the timing T7 at which the display of the success image, the output of the success sound, and the temporary stop in the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a are started. This is an effect in which the means (button drive device 17b) is activated and the effect button 17 vibrates.

Then, the vibration effect is continuously performed until the timing T8-1, which is the end of the N + 60th cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates over about 20 cycle fluctuations (about 5 seconds) from the start of the N + 40th cycle to the end of the N + 60th cycle.

Comparing the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation", the vibration effect at the "development", and the vibration effect at the "big hit notification", the execution time of the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is the shortest, and the "big hit". The execution time of the vibration effect at the time of notification is the longest.
In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is performed at the "start of fluctuation" is the smallest, and the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is performed at the "big hit notification". Is the most common.

In this way, if the number of cycle fluctuations executed during the vibration effect is visually observed, not limited to the execution time of the vibration effect, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations is small, it is understood that the variation starts. If the number of cycle fluctuations is large, it can be grasped that the jackpot is notified. That is, it is possible to grasp which aspect of the fluctuation effect is being executed from the number of cycle fluctuations executed during the vibration effect, which leads to improvement of the game entertainment.

Although not particularly shown, in the scene shown in FIG. 126, the effect button light emitting LED 17c does not emit rainbow light, and in the scene shown in FIG. 127, the effect button light emitting LED 17c emits rainbow light. As a result, it is possible to grasp which aspect of the variable effect is being executed from the light emission mode of the effect button light emitting LED 17c, which leads to improvement of the game entertainment.

It should be noted that FIGS. 126 and 127 are merely examples, and the above effects can be obtained in other forms. For example, the execution time of the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is lengthened (the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration effect is also the largest), and the execution time of the vibration effect at the "big hit notification" is shortened (with this). Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration effect may be the smallest).

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 128 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. It should be noted that Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timings of the operation means are different in the same SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit).
For convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used for the configuration of the fluctuation start, and the configuration up to the development of the SPSP reach effect is described in FIG. 97. It is sufficient to use the above-mentioned configuration.

Note that FIG. 128 describes, as an example, a case where the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The timing T2 is the timing at which the determined image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (beginning of the operation valid period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is "N + 2nd cycle".

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 6th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 5th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 14th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 13th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

Since each case is an SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit), a temporary stop is started from the timing T3 in a mode of displaying a success image, outputting a success sound, and notifying the big hit of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, at the timing T3, the light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, effect button light emitting LED 17c) starts rainbow light emission. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (f), the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c start rainbow light emission.
Then, the rainbow emission is executed until the timing T3-1.

Then, in each case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continuously performed in the manner of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a until the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case of case 1, the success image is displayed from "N + 6th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and the temporary stop is performed in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and in the case of case 2. , From "N + 14th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and temporary stop will be performed in a mode to notify the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and case 1 is the case. The period of temporary stop (about 2 seconds) in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a is longer than that of 2.

The output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and is performed during the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. There is no difference.

In addition, the rainbow emission of the light emitting means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and the operation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the operation period) differs depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. Is designed not to occur.

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle fluctuation executed until the effect symbol displays the stop is "1st cycle" to "N + 85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed until the timing T8.

On the other hand, in any case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display or the timing T8 until the effect symbol ends. Is "about 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, the display of the success image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in, it gives the recognition that the production content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or misunderstands that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. Was sometimes given.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the reach variation effect has been executed.

Further, since the output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuation) in each case, the player recognizes that it is a big hit even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different. Can be made to.

Further, since the rainbow emission of the light emitting means is performed for about 8 seconds (about 32 cycle fluctuation) in each case, even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the player is made to recognize that it is a big hit. be able to.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the timing T3 to the timing T6 The period of is even shorter than in Case 2. For example, when the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is about 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 129 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. It should be noted that Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timings of the operation means are different in the same SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit).
For convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used for the configuration of the fluctuation start, and the configuration up to the development of the SPSP reach effect is described in FIG. 97. It is sufficient to use the above-mentioned configuration.

Note that FIG. 129 describes, as an example, a case where the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The timing T2 is the timing at which the determined image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (beginning of the operation valid period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is "N + 2nd cycle".

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 6th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 5th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 14th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 13th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

Since each case is an SPSP reach fluctuation effect (big hit), a temporary stop is started from the timing T3 in a mode of displaying a success image, outputting a success sound, and notifying the big hit of the effect symbol 70a.

Then, in each case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continuously performed in the manner of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a until the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 57th cycle" is completed.
That is, in the case of case 1, the success image is displayed from "N + 6th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and the temporary stop is performed in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and in the case of case 2. , From "N + 14th cycle" to "N + 57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and temporary stop will be performed in a mode to notify the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a, and case 1 is the case. The period of temporary stop (about 2 seconds) in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a is longer than that of 2.

The output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations) from the timing T3 to the timing T3-1 in each case, and is performed during the output period (and during the output period) depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17. There is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations.

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle fluctuation executed until the effect symbol displays the stop is "1st cycle" to "N + 85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed until the timing T8.

On the other hand, in any case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable and the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display or the timing T8 until the effect symbol ends. Is "about 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, the display of the success image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in, it gives the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or misunderstands that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. Was sometimes given.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the reach variation effect has been executed.

Further, since the output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuation) in each case, the player recognizes that it is a big hit even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different. Can be made to.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the timing T3 to the timing T6 The period of is even shorter than in Case 2. For example, when the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 is about 15 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 60 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 130 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. It should be noted that Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison in the case where the operation timings of the operation means are different in the same SPSP reach fluctuation effect (loss).
Note that FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating further details of the timing T8 to the timing T9 in FIG. 92. Further, for convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used as the configuration for starting the fluctuation.

Note that FIG. 130 will be described as an example of the case where the loss SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The timing T2 is the timing at which the determined image is displayed, and is the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (beginning of the operation valid period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is "N + 2nd cycle".

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 6th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 5th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T3 when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of "N + 14th cycle". That is, the game is played at the timing when the "N + 13th cycle" is completed from the timing T2 ("N + 2nd cycle") when the effect button 17 becomes operable (that is, about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by a person.

Since each case is an SPSP reach fluctuation effect (loss), a temporary stop is started from the timing T3 in a mode of displaying a failure image, outputting a failure sound, and notifying the effect symbol 70a of the loss.

In each case, the display of the failed image and the temporary stop in the mode of notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a continue until the timing T3-1 at which the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol ends the "N + 41st cycle".

That is, in the case of Case 1, it is provisional in the form of displaying a failed image and notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a over the "about 36 cycle fluctuation" (about 9 seconds) from "N + 6th cycle" to "N + 41st cycle". The stop is performed, and in the case of Case 2, the failure image is displayed and the effect symbol 70a is notified over the "about 28 cycle fluctuation" (about 7 seconds) from "N + 14th cycle" to "N + 41st cycle". The temporary stop will be performed in the mode, and the temporary stop period (about 2 seconds) in the mode of displaying the failed image and notifying the loss of the effect symbol 70a is longer in the case 1 than in the case 2. ..

Then, from the timing T3-1, a "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed as an effect image, and a background change (change of the background image) is performed. As shown in FIGS. 131 (d)'to (e), the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is, for example, an image in which the model name is written on an image imitating a shutter, and the "switching image". Is displayed, the SPSP reach background that was visible in FIG. 131 (d) becomes invisible.

Further, while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is being displayed, the effect symbol 70a composed of only numbers becomes invisible. On the other hand, even while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is being displayed, the icon TI, the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ, the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB are visually recognized. It is possible.

Then, the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is continuously displayed until the timing T4, and the special symbol performed from the timing T3-1 to the timing T4 during the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)". The number of cycle fluctuations in each case is "about 16 cycle fluctuations".

Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol performed from the operation of the effect button 17 at the timing T2 (the start of the operation valid period) to the display of the "switching image (eye catch image)" at the timing T3-1. The number of times is "about 40 cycles fluctuation" in each case.

Then, in each case, the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" ends at the timing T4, the background image of the side-scrolling of the normal background becomes visible, and the effect pattern 70a with the character is lost. The temporary stop in the form of notifying the above becomes visible.

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T6. That is, in case 1 and case 2, the cycle fluctuation executed until the effect symbol displays the stop is "1st cycle" to "N + 85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed until the timing T8.

In each case, the process is performed between the timing T3-1 when the "switching image (eye catch image)" is displayed, the timing T6 until the effect symbol starts the stop display, or the timing T8 until the end. The number of cycle fluctuations is "about 44 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timings T3-1 to timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, the display of the failed image performed between the timing T3 and the timing T3-1 and the loss of the effect symbol 70a are notified. Since there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in this mode, it gives a recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP reach variation effect is executed. I sometimes gave a misunderstanding.
On the other hand, for example, it is performed from the time when the effect button 17 becomes operable at the timing T2 (the start of the operation valid period) to the time when the "switching image (eye catch image)" is displayed at the timing T3-1. If the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, the same "about 40 cycle fluctuations" will be obtained in all cases. Therefore, from the number of cycle fluctuations, it is recognized that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17. It is possible to prevent giving or giving the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

Further, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations performed between the timing T2 and the timing T6 or the timing T2 and the timing T8 is visually observed, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" are obtained in each case. From the number of fluctuations, it is possible to prevent the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17 or the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the timing T3 to the timing T3 The period of -1 is even shorter than that of Case 2. For example, when the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 is about 5 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 20 cycle variation").

The “switching image (eye-catching image)” is not limited to that shown in FIG. 131. For example, it may be an image to be whitened out or an image to be blacked out. Further, the image is not limited to the image, and a movable member (shielding member) may be operated to temporarily shield the image.

(Timing chart for a specific variation effect pattern)
FIG. 132 shows a timing chart in a specific variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern a, variation effect pattern b) when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “special figure variation pattern A (variation time = about 38 seconds)”. Shows.
When the special figure variation pattern designation command is "special map variation pattern A", either the variation effect pattern a or the variation effect pattern b is determined by the process of step E321 in FIG. 26. That is, it is possible to execute either the variation effect pattern a or the variation effect pattern b for the "special figure variation pattern A".

In both the variation effect pattern a and the variation effect pattern b, the timing T0 is the start timing of the variation display, which is the timing when the first cycle of the special symbol is started. Here, the side-scrolling of the normal background is displayed as the background image, and the "normal variation effect" (for example, the update variation of all the effect symbols 70a) is executed as the variation effect content.

The timing T3 is the timing at which the normal reach variation effect is started after the normal variation effect is finished. The timing T5 is the timing when the normal reach fluctuation effect is finished and the SP reach is developed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol has completed the cycle fluctuation of the "100th cycle". That is, in any of the fluctuation effect patterns, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed from the start of the fluctuation display (timing T0) to the start of SP reach (timing T5) is "about 100 cycle fluctuations". ..

The timing T5 in the variable effect pattern a is the timing at which the "typhoon reach" as the SP reach effect has started. That is, the variable effect pattern a is a variable effect pattern in which "typhoon reach" is defined as the variable effect content.

The timing T5 in the variable effect pattern b is the timing at which the "heavy snow reach" as the SP reach effect has started. That is, the variable effect pattern b is a variable effect pattern in which "heavy snow reach" is defined as the variable effect content.

That is, when the special map fluctuation pattern designation command is "special map fluctuation pattern A", either "typhoon reach" or "heavy snow reach" is executed, and for one special map fluctuation pattern. Therefore, multiple variable effects can be executed. As a result, it is possible to enrich the variation effect to be executed while keeping the special figure variation pattern on the main control board 110 to the minimum necessary.

In both the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b, the timing T6 is the timing at which the SP reach is completed. The timing T7 is the timing at which the special symbol displays a stop, and at this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol has completed the cycle fluctuation of the "152nd cycle".

In both the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b, the timing T8 is the timing at which the effect symbol or the special symbol starts the stop display, and the timing T10 is the timing when the effect symbol or the special symbol ends the stop display. be.

That is, in both the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b, after the SP reach effect starts (timing T5), the effect symbol starts the stop display (timing T8) or ends the stop display (timing). The number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed by T10) is "about 52 cycle fluctuations".

That is, in the case of the "special figure fluctuation pattern A", the cycle fluctuation (about 38 seconds) of the special symbol of the "1st cycle" to the "152nd cycle" is performed from the start of the fluctuation display to the execution of the stop display. Will be

In this way, although the variable effect content in the SP reach differs between the "typhoon reach" and the "heavy snow reach" in the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b, from the start of the variable display to the start of the SP reach. The number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed in 1 is "about 100 cycle fluctuations". Further, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed from the start of the SP reach to the stop display of the effect symbol is "about 52 cycle fluctuations". That is, in each of the variable effect patterns, the number of cycle variations of the special symbol performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the effect symbol is "about 152 cycle fluctuations".

The player recognizes that the execution is based on a different "special figure fluctuation pattern" due to the difference in the content of the fluctuation effect between the case where the "typhoon reach" is executed and the case where the "heavy snow reach" is executed. In some cases, they may recognize that the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is different.
On the other hand, for example, as described above, from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach, from the start of SP reach to the stop display of the effect symbol, and from the start of fluctuation to the stop display of the effect symbol, any variation effect pattern can be used. Since the number of cycle fluctuations is the same, if the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it can be recognized that the game is being executed based on a common "special figure fluctuation pattern", and the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Can be recognized as common.

The gaming state in which the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b are executed may be any game state. For example, it may be executed in a normal gaming state, may be executed in a time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a probabilistic gaming state. Further, it may be executed in any one of the gaming states, may be executed in any two gaming states, or may be executed in all the gaming states.

Further, the gaming state in which the variable effect pattern a and the variable effect pattern b are executed may be set as the normal gaming state, and may be executed in a plurality of modes in the normal gaming state.
For example, when the special figure variation pattern A is received in the mode A of the normal gaming state, the variation effect pattern a is executed, and when the special figure variation pattern A is received in the mode B of the normal gaming state, the variation pattern A is executed. The effect pattern b may be executed. As a result, even if the fluctuation effect pattern for each mode is executed in different modes, if the number of cycle fluctuations is visually observed, it can be recognized that the fluctuation effect pattern is executed based on the common "special figure fluctuation pattern". It can be recognized that the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is also the same.

(Timing chart when dialogue notice occurs in variable production)
FIG. 133 is a timing chart when a dialogue notice occurs in the variable effect. Case 1 and the case have the same variable effect pattern, and indicate that the operation timing of the effect button 17 in the dialogue notice is different.
Although FIG. 133 will be described as a dialogue notice as an example, it may be replaced with a cut-in notice.

Note that FIG. 133 describes, as an example, a case where a serif notice occurs in the variable effect in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability variable game state". May be done.

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, which is the timing when the first cycle of the special symbol is started.
Then, in each case, at the timing T2 when the cycle fluctuation of the sixth cycle of the special symbol starts, the dialogue preview image is displayed as the effect image, and the operation valid period of the effect button 17 starts.
The "line notice image" is a display of an image imitating the effect button 17 (see FIG. 134).

Then, in the case of Case 1, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T4 when the cycle change of the ninth cycle of the special symbol is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of Case 2, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player at the timing T4 when the cycle fluctuation of the 13th cycle of the special symbol is completed.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated by the player, the display of the serif preview image is terminated, and the serif pattern image (here, the serif pattern 2) is displayed as the serif image.
The display time of the serif pattern image (here, serif pattern 2) is common to both case 1 and case 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and is executed during the display of the serif pattern image (here, serif pattern 2). The number of cycle fluctuations is also the same in both case 1 and case 2 (for example, about 8 cycle fluctuations).

Then, in each case, at the timing T5 when the cycle variation of the 58th cycle of the special symbol is completed, the effect symbol finishes the update variation and starts the pre-stop operation.
Then, in each case, at the timing T6 in the middle of the cycle fluctuation of the 60th cycle of the special symbol, the effect symbol finishes the pre-stop operation and starts the temporary stop.

Then, in each case, the stop display of the special symbol is started at the timing T7 when the cycle fluctuation of the 60th cycle of the special symbol is completed. Then, at the timing T8, the effect symbol and the special symbol start the stop display, and at the timing T10, the effect symbol and the special symbol end the stop display.

In the case of case 1, the effect button 17 is operated by the player, the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4), and the effect symbol starts the stop display (timing T8). Alternatively, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed until the effect symbol finishes the stop display (timing T10) is "about 51 cycle fluctuations".

On the other hand, in the case of case 2, the effect button 17 is operated by the player, the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4), and the effect symbol starts the stop display (timing T8). ), Or the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed until the effect symbol finishes the stop display (timing T10) is "about 47 cycle fluctuations".

Further, in each case, from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 17 (timing T2), until the effect symbol starts the stop display (timing T8), or until the effect symbol ends the stop display (timing). The number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed in T10) is "about 55 cycle fluctuations".

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the effect is the same, for example, after the serif pattern image (here, the serif pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Since there is a difference in time between the start of (timing T8) or the end of the stop display of the effect symbol, it may give the recognition that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or it may vary differently. Sometimes I gave the misunderstanding that the production was performed.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed. If this is the case, the same "about 55 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the recognition that the production content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or different variations. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the production has been executed.

Further, the display time of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is common to both case 1 and case 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and is executed during the display of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2). Since the number of cycle fluctuations is the same in both case 1 and case 2 (for example, about 8 cycle fluctuations), even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different, the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed. It can be recognized by the player.

In addition, although case 1 and case 2 are described in the case where the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, if the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the dialogue notice is not executed. .. That is, when the operation means (effect button 17) is operated, an event of cycle fluctuation during the dialogue advance notice execution occurs, but when the operation means (effect button 17) is not operated, the cycle during the dialogue notice execution is executed. The event of fluctuation does not occur.

(Timing chart when dialogue notice and decision production occur in variable production)
FIG. 134 is a timing chart when a dialogue notice and a decision effect occur in the variable effect. The dialogue notice shows further details between timing T1 and timing T2 in FIG. 133, and the decision effect shows further details between timing T5 and timing T6 in FIG. 92.
For convenience, the case where the dialogue notice and the decision production occur in the variable effect pattern 1 is shown, but when they occur separately (when the dialogue notice occurs but the decision effect does not occur, the dialogue notice does not occur. However, the same can be said when the decision production occurs).
Further, the dialogue notice in FIG. 134 may be replaced with a cut-in notice (in this case, the cut-in notice is compared with the decided effect), or the decided effect may be replaced with the cut-in notice (in this case). , It will be a comparison between the dialogue notice and the cut-in notice).

Note that FIG. 134 describes, as an example, a case where a serif notice and a decision effect occur in the variable effect in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, but in the "time saving game state" and the "probability variable game state". The same may be done.

The timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special symbol is started.
Then, at the timing T1-1, a suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the dialogue notice is displayed is displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the second cycle.

Then, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for about 4 cycle fluctuations (about 1 second) from the start of the cycle fluctuation of the 2nd cycle to the end of the cycle fluctuation of the 5th cycle. As shown in FIG. 134, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is an image imitating the effect button 17 displayed in a light color, and gradually toward the display end timing of the suggestion image (fade-in image). It changes to a darker color.

Then, at the timing T2, the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image) ends, the image (speech notice image) imitating the effect button 17 is displayed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 17 starts. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the "sixth cycle".

Then, at the timing T4, the effect button 17 is operated by the player, and a serif pattern image (here, the serif pattern 2) is displayed as the effect image.
That is, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player about 1 second after the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 17.

In this way, in the case of a dialogue notice, a suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed is displayed over a variation of about 4 cycles (about 1 second).

The timing T6 is the timing at which the determined image in the determined effect is displayed, and the suggestion image (fade-in) suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the determined effect is displayed by the timing T6. Image) is displayed.

Specifically, from the timing T5, the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that the image imitating the effect button 17 in the determined effect is displayed is started. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 1th cycle".

Then, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for about 16 cycle fluctuations (about 4 seconds) from the start of the cycle fluctuation of the N + 1th cycle to the end of the cycle fluctuation of the N + 16th cycle. As shown in FIG. 134, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is a spiral button introduction image BDG.

Then, at the timing T6, the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image) ends, the image (speech notice image) imitating the effect button 17 is displayed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 17 starts. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 17th cycle".

As described above, in the case of the determined effect, a suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed is displayed over a variation of about 16 cycles (about 4 seconds).

In the dialogue notice and the decision effect, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for a longer time in the decision effect, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the display is also larger.
As a result, if the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image) is visually observed, it becomes easy to predict whether the dialogue notice will be executed later or the decision effect will be executed.
Further, from the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image), it becomes easy to predict which phase in the fluctuation effect.

In addition, in FIG. 134, it is said that the display time of the suggestion image (fade-in image) is longer and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the display is larger in the decision effect between the dialogue notice and the decision effect. Not limited to this, the display time of the suggestion image (fade-in image) may be shorter and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the display may be smaller in the determined staging.

(Timing chart when the operation means is operated)
FIG. 135 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the effect button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation effect. Note that FIG. 135 shows a case where the meter pattern 1 is performed and a case where the meter pattern 2 is performed in the meter effect which is one of the SPSP reach effects, and the same SPSP reach variation effect (big hit). ) Shows a comparison when the operation timings of the operating means are different.
For convenience, the description is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration described in FIG. 73 may be used for the configuration of the fluctuation start, and the configuration up to the development of the SPSP reach effect is described in FIG. 97. It is sufficient to use the above-mentioned configuration.

Note that FIG. 135 describes, as an example, a case where the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is executed in the "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies to the "time saving game state" and the "probability change game state". May be done.

In each pattern, the timing T0 is the timing at which the SPSP reach effect is executed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the "Nth cycle".

In each pattern, the timing T2 is the timing at which the meter effect is started as the SPSP reach effect. As shown in FIG. 136 (c), the "meter effect" is an effect that shows a problem (introduction image and introduction sound in FIG. 135) such as "If you hit the button repeatedly and the meter reaches MAX, it will be a big hit!". There is an effect that the meter rises every time the player operates the effect button 17, and when the meter reaches MAX, a big hit is definitely notified.

The meter pattern in the meter effect has a plurality of meter patterns. For example, in the case of a big hit, the operation input of the effect button 17 is performed 5 times (the effect button 17 is pressed 5 times). ), The meter becomes MAX (meter pattern 1 in FIGS. 135 and 136), and the operation input of the effect button 17 is performed 10 times (the effect button 17 is pressed 10 times), so that the meter becomes MAX. Also, a pattern in which the meter becomes MAX when the operation input of the effect button 17 is performed once (the effect button 17 is pressed once) (meter pattern 2 in FIGS. 135 and 136) and the like. Have. In addition, it also has a plurality of meter patterns in the case of loss (not shown).

Then, in any of the patterns, when the timing T3 is reached, the determined image is displayed as the effect image, and the promotion sound is output as the sound effect (see FIG. 136 (d)).
In each of the patterns, it is assumed that the effect button 17 is operated by the player from the timing T4.

In the case of the meter pattern 1, since the meter becomes MAX when the operation input of the effect button 17 is performed 5 times, the success image is displayed at the timing T5 when the effect button 17 is operated 5 times from the timing T4. , A success sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner of notifying that the effect symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 136 (f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 30th cycle".
That is, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the meter effect at the timing T2 to the notification that the jackpot is a big hit at the timing T5 is "about 28 cycle fluctuations".

On the other hand, in the case of the meter pattern 2, since the meter becomes MAX because the operation input of the effect button 17 is performed once, the success image is displayed at the timing T5 in which the effect button 17 is operated once from the timing T4. It is displayed, a success sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner of notifying that the effect symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 136 (f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation of the "N + 14th cycle".
That is, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the meter effect at the timing T2 to the notification that the jackpot is a big hit at the timing T5 is "about 12 cycle fluctuations".

Then, in each pattern, at the timing T7 at which the cycle variation of the "N + 85th cycle" is completed, the cycle variation of the special symbol is terminated and the stop display is performed.
Further, in each case, the stop display of the effect symbol is performed at the timing T8. That is, regardless of whether the meter pattern 1 is executed or the meter pattern 2 is executed, the cycle variation executed from the start of the meter effect to the stop display of the effect symbol is "about 84 cycle variation". ".

In this way, when the meter pattern is different even though the meter effect is the same, for example, the time difference occurs from the start of the meter effect (timing T2) to the notification that the jackpot is a big hit (timing T5). There is a possibility that the player may be distrusted by giving recognition that the timing of the jackpot notification changes depending on the timing (skill) of operating the effect button 17 of the player.
On the other hand, for example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T8, or between timing T2 and timing T10 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T7) is visually observed. If so, the same "about 84 cycle fluctuations" are obtained in all cases, so that the timing of the jackpot notification may change depending on the timing (skill) of operating the effect button 17 of the player from the number of cycle fluctuations. It is possible to recognize that it is not a thing, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust.

In the example of FIG. 135, the operation means (effect button 17) is described as being operated, but the case where the operation is not performed in the meter pattern 1 and the case where the operation is not performed in the meter pattern 2. The display period of the successful image of the timing T5 to the timing T6 and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a are the same time. That is, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed between the timing T5 and the timing T6 is the same. As a result, regardless of which meter pattern is executed, the display period of the successful image and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying the jackpot of the effect symbol 70a can be guaranteed, and the player can determine the jackpot. The result can be surely grasped.

The meter pattern may be a meter pattern in which the effect button 17 is continuously operated for a predetermined time or longer by "long pressing". For example, in the meter pattern 1, the "long press" time until the big hit is notified is "3 seconds", and in the meter pattern 2, the "long press" until the big hit is notified. The time may be "5 seconds".

(Specific example in which the state after restoration of power failure is displayed as a change in a special symbol)
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after the restoration of the power failure is in the variable display of the special symbol. Note that FIG. 137 follows the contents of FIG. 54, and a power failure occurs when the fluctuation display of the special map fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal fluctuation is executed as the special map fluctuation pattern, and then the power supply is restored. The case is shown.
The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal fluctuation is set to "10 seconds".

The timing T0 is a timing at which a power failure occurs and the power is turned off while the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal fluctuation is being executed.
Since it is assumed that the timing T0 is reached when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is executing the cycle fluctuation of the twelfth cycle, a power failure occurs about 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display.

The timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned on. At the timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol of the “13th cycle” is started. The cycle variation of the special symbol of the "13th cycle" is a cycle variation following the cycle variation "12th cycle" that was performed when a power failure occurred at timing T0.

Then, from the timing T2 to the timing T9, the return operation and the initial operation of the movable effect device described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like are executed. Since the return operation and the initial operation have already been described in FIG. 54 and the like, the description thereof is omitted here. The time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.).

The timing T6 is the timing at which the special symbol starts the cycle fluctuation in the 40th cycle, and is the timing at which the sub-display device starts the initial operation.
Then, when the timing T7 is reached, the special symbol ends the cycle fluctuation in the 40th cycle and starts the stop display.

Then, when the special symbol confirmation command is received at the timing T7-1, the stop screen (effect symbol 753) is displayed on the main display device 70, and the stop sound is output from the voice output device.
Then, at the timing T9, the initial operation of the sub display device ends.

That is, in the example of FIG. 137, the power failure occurred at the timing T0 about 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display, and when the power was turned on at the timing T1, the remaining fluctuation time was about 7 seconds. ..
On the other hand, since the time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds, when the return operation and the initial operation are started from the timing T2, the variable display ends earlier than the initial operation. Will be done.
That is, at the time when the initial operation is finished (timing T9), the variable display of the special symbol is finished, and the stop screen (effect symbol 753) is displayed on the main display device 70.
If there is a hold to execute the next variation display, the next variation display will be started regardless of the end of the initial operation. Therefore, it is an event that the initial operation may be terminated during the execution of the next variation display, and when the initial operation is terminated, the stop screen of the next variation display (for example, the effect symbol 468) is displayed. It is a possible event.

In this way, when the initial operation is executed during the variation display, if the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed during the operation of the movable effect device is visually observed, the special symbol is performed between the initial operation and the effect operation. Since the number of cycle fluctuations is different (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.), it is recognized that the operation of the movable effect device executed from the timing T4 is the initial operation from the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable effect device from being excessively expected to become a big hit by operating the movable effect device during the variable display.

Further, in addition to the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations, the LED of the movable effect device is turned off during the initial operation to perform the initial operation. Therefore, the light emission mode (off) of the movable effect device is also executed from the timing T4. It is possible to recognize that the operation of the movable effect device is the initial operation.

Further, in FIG. 137, particularly in the case where the variation display ends earlier than the initial operation, the variation display of the special symbol ends at the time when the initial operation ends (timing T9), and the main display device. It was decided that the stop screen (effect symbol 753) was displayed on the 70. As a result, it is not necessary to control the display contents of the main display device 70 (for example, a stop screen is displayed when the initial operation is completed) in accordance with the end timing of the initial operation, and it is possible to prevent the display control from becoming complicated. ..

Further, by displaying the stop screen (effect symbol 753) on the main display device 70 without waiting for the end of the initial operation, the player is promptly notified of the result of the jackpot determination, thereby giving the player a sense of distrust. It can be prevented from being lost.

Note that FIG. 137 describes the case of power restoration as an example, but the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned momentary power failure occurs during the fluctuation display, the return operation or the initial operation is not executed. In this way, all "power outages" do not result in the event shown in FIG. 137, but the case of a momentary power outage is excluded.

(Specific example in which the state after restoration of power failure is displayed as a change in a special symbol)
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after the restoration of the power failure is in the variable display of the special symbol. Note that FIG. 138 follows the contents of FIG. 54, and a power failure occurs when the variation display of the special map variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is executed as the special map variation pattern, and then the power supply is turned on. It shows the case of recovery.
The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is set to "70 seconds".

The timing T0 is a timing at which a power failure occurs and the power is turned off while the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is being executed.
Since it is assumed that the timing T0 is reached when the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is executing the cycle fluctuation of the twelfth cycle, a power failure occurs about 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display.

The timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned on. At the timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol of the “13th cycle” is started. The cycle variation of the special symbol of the "13th cycle" is a cycle variation following the cycle variation "12th cycle" that was performed when a power failure occurred at timing T0.

Then, from the timing T2 to the timing T7, the return operation and the initial operation of the movable effect device described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like are executed. Since the return operation and the initial operation have already been described in FIG. 54 and the like, the description thereof is omitted here. The time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.).

The timing T7 is the timing at which the initial operation of the sub-display device ends and all the initial operations end. At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the "restoring" screen displayed from the timing T2.

That is, in the example of FIG. 138, the power failure occurred at the timing T0 about 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display, and when the power was turned on at the timing T1, the remaining fluctuation time was about 67 seconds. ..
On the other hand, since the time required for the return operation is about 3 seconds and the time required for the initial operation is about 11 seconds, when the return operation and the initial operation are started from the timing T2, the initial operation ends earlier than the fluctuation display. Will be done.
That is, at the time when the initial operation is completed (timing T7), the variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed, and the restoration screen is displayed on the main display device 70.
In the example of FIG. 138, it is assumed that a power failure occurs 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. However, for example, if a power failure occurs 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and there is a hold to execute the next fluctuation display. , The next variable display will start regardless of the end of the initial operation. Therefore, it is an event that the initial operation may be terminated during the execution of the next variation display, and when the initial operation is terminated, the stop screen of the next variation display (for example, the effect symbol 468) is displayed. It is a possible event.

In this way, when the initial operation is executed during the variation display, if the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed during the operation of the movable effect device is visually observed, the special symbol is performed between the initial operation and the effect operation. Since the number of cycle fluctuations is different (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.), it is recognized that the operation of the movable effect device executed from the timing T4 is the initial operation from the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable effect device from being excessively expected to become a big hit by operating the movable effect device during the variable display.

Further, in addition to the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations, the LED of the movable effect device is turned off during the initial operation to perform the initial operation. Therefore, the light emission mode (off) of the movable effect device is also executed from the timing T4. It is possible to recognize that the operation of the movable effect device is the initial operation.

Further, in FIG. 138, particularly in the case where the initial operation ends earlier than the variation display, the variation display of the special symbol is continuously executed at the time when the initial operation ends (timing T7). It was decided that the restoration screen is displayed on the main display device 70. As a result, it is not necessary to control the display contents of the main display device 70 according to the end timing of the initial operation (for example, the screen being restored is terminated when the initial operation is completed), and the display control is prevented from becoming complicated. can.

Further, by ending the initial operation without waiting for the end of the variable display, the initial operation can be ended promptly, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the effect operation is being performed.

Note that FIG. 138 describes the example of power restoration, but the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned momentary power failure occurs during the fluctuation display, the return operation or the initial operation is not executed. In this way, all "power outages" do not result in the event shown in FIG. 138, but the case of a momentary power outage is excluded.

(Specific example 1 when the variable production starts during the customer waiting demo production)
A specific example 1 in the case where the variable effect is started during the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141.

139 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and FIGS. 140 to 141 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 139. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, before the timing of T0 in FIG. 139, there is a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the first special symbol display 60 has a lost special symbol (only the LED at the right end). (Lit) is displayed, and the main display device 70 displays a fluctuation standby screen waiting for execution of the variation effect. Specifically, the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "537", and the first hold number display area SA and the second hold number display area are displayed. "0" is displayed on the SB. Further, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by using the cross key 19.

Then, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 139, when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo effect for a predetermined period (for example, 80 seconds) is started. Specifically, a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) is in front of the effect symbol 70a and behind the special symbol TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB). The fade-in (the transparent state gradually becomes opaque) of the customer waiting demo image is started, and the effect symbol 70a gradually becomes invisible (see FIG. 140 (a)).

Since the special symbol TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, they cannot be visually recognized (shielded) by the customer wait demo image. However, the background image, the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon display area, and the icon display area are invisible (shielded) by the customer waiting demo image.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 139, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the effect symbol 70a is hidden (invisible state), and the output of the demo effect sound is started. Specifically, the customer waiting demo background is scrolling (directing operation), and the character image of "Demo" is displayed, and the model-specific production (model name display, model-specific character introduction, variable production demo movie). (Refer to FIG. 140 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 139, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the manufacturer name of the gaming machine following the model-specific production is displayed, the first hold number becomes "1" and the first special The symbol hold display 63 is displayed as "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (FIG. 140 (FIG. 140). c) See).

Then, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 139, when the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, a start command (special symbol) is given from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding display 63 is displayed as "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol (FIG. 140 (d)). reference).

Further, since a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display 83 display "1", and the back side of the customer waiting demo image is displayed. On the side, the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B in a non-animated manner, and the effect symbol 70a (before the start of the customer waiting demo effect) ( “537”) indicating the result of the previous variation effect is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or the second winning sound) is started. In addition, the output of the customer waiting demo production sound is stopped (see FIG. 140 (d)).

If the hold icon is additionally displayed in a non-animated state while waiting for a customer, the hold icon may be displayed in operation from the first posture (initial posture), or the operation may be displayed from the second posture. You may do it. In addition, when the hold icon is additionally displayed without going through the customer waiting demo effect, the operation is displayed from the first posture or the second posture, and when the hold icon is additionally displayed via the customer waiting demo image. , The operation may be displayed from the first posture.

Further, the effect symbol 70a (“537” indicating the result of the previous variable effect) before the start of the customer waiting demo effect may be processed to be constantly displayed behind the customer waiting demo image. In this case, Even if there is, the visibility will be restricted by the customer waiting demo image.

After that, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 139 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area The SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 are displayed as “0”, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 140 (e)).

In addition, the fade-out (erasing from an opaque state to a gradually transparent state) of the customer waiting demo image for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ have the same number ("" 537 ") can be visually recognized (confirmed / recognized), and the hold icon HI can be visually recognized. Further, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scrolling, switching display). Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted to the impossible state (adjustable), and the audible output of the variable BGM (here, the normal BGM corresponding to the non-reach effect) is started from the audio output device 9. (See FIG. 140 (e)).

Regarding the special symbol TZ, regardless of the appearance that was stopped and displayed, when the update fluctuation starts, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "678" → Nine patterns of image data are switched for each frame in the order of "789"-> "891"-> "912"-> "123" ... and are cycle-displayed like a slide show. Therefore, when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is started, the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ is started immediately, so that the special symbol TZ appears more than the surfaced display of the effect symbol 70a (the customer waiting effect starts). The time that can be visually recognized (confirmed / recognized) is shortened.

In addition, if the volume value image or the light intensity value image is displayed due to the operation of the cross key 19 before the start of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is performed by the start of the variable effect. It is erased when the light amount cannot be adjusted, but the volume value image and the light amount value image are erased before the fade-out of the customer waiting image is completed. That is, when erasing the volume value image or the light amount value image, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image.

Further, when the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol) or the variable display of the special symbol is started regardless of whether or not the customer is waiting, the cross key 19 is performed at the same timing regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern. It is now regulated to a state where volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are not possible (unadjustable).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, the specific effect executed at the start of the variation effect is executed. The effect effect (a kind of jackpot notice effect) is started. Specifically, a preview effect image YE having a size that regulates the visibility of the central effect symbol 70a during the floating display is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to visually recognize the background image and the effect symbol 70a. An effect (including sound effect output) that will be regulated (shielded) is performed (see FIG. 140 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses from the start of the variation effect, the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 (adjustable), and the timing of T7. When the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the notice effect image YE restricts the visibility of the three effect symbols 70a. It becomes the size (see FIG. 141 (g)).

Further, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 139 (during the fourth cycle change), the ascending display as the pre-change operation of the effect symbol 70a ends, and the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a starts. The effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the change start order of the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 141 (h)), and the warning effect image YE is erased at the timing of T9 (see FIG. 141 (i)). ..

The notice effect image YE is gradually enlarged to regulate the visibility of the effect symbols 70a (the order in which the fluctuation starts becomes difficult to see), but the appearance of the three effect symbols 70a is restricted from the beginning. It may be displayed in the size to be used. Further, although the warning effect image YE displays a part of the effect symbol 70a in a visible state to the extent that the change start order becomes difficult to see, all of the effect symbols 70a are displayed in an invisible state. You may try to do it.

Further, the preview effect image YE is displayed at the timing when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, but it is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed. It may be done.

In addition, although multiple characters are made to appear (display) in the model-specific production, the character with the highest percentage of appearance in the model-specific production has a high expectation of big hits executed during the variable production. It is easy to appear in. In addition, in the model-specific production, the display period of the immersive prevention image (for example, 5 seconds) is longer than the display period of the model name (for example, 3 seconds). Although the display is performed, the immersive prevention image may be displayed while the model name is being displayed (from the middle of displaying the model name).

Also, the demo waiting period from the second time onward (after the end of the customer waiting demo production) to the demo waiting period until the first customer waiting demo production (for example, 60 seconds) after the end of the variable effect. May be shorter (eg 50 seconds).

In addition, the customer waiting demo image does not fade in from the state where the effect symbol 70a or the like is displayed, but the screen is blacked out for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds longer than the eye-catching effect described later). The demo image waiting for customers may fade in after the effect image such as the effect symbol 70a is shielded.

(Specific example 2 when the variable production starts during the customer waiting demo production)
A specific example 2 in the case where the variable effect is started during the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 142.

In FIG. 142, the basic flow is the same as that of the specific example 1 when the variable effect is started during the customer waiting demo effect shown in FIGS. 139 to 141, but the effect mode is changed instead of the effect effect at the start. It differs in that the mode change effect for making it is executed. Therefore, only the parts related to the differences will be described here.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 139 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and The sub-first hold indicator 83 is displayed as “0”, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 142 (e)).

In addition, the fade-out of the demo image waiting for customers (erased from an opaque state to a gradually transparent state) is started, and it is visually confirmed (confirmed) that the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ have the same number (“537”). (Recognition) is possible, and the hold icon HI can be visually recognized. Further, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scrolling, switching display). Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted to a state (adjustable), and the audible output of the variable BGM (here, normal BGM) is started from the voice output device 9 (see FIG. 142 (e)). ).

If the volume value image or the light intensity value image is displayed due to the operation of the cross key 19 before the start of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is performed by the start of the variable effect. It is erased when the light amount cannot be adjusted, but the volume value image and the light amount value image are erased before the fade-out of the customer waiting image is completed. That is, when erasing the volume value image or the light amount value image, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image.

Further, when the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol) or the variable display of the special symbol is started regardless of whether or not the customer is waiting, the cross key 19 is performed at the same timing regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern. It is now regulated to a state where volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are not possible (unadjustable).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, the specific effect executed at the start of the variation effect is executed. Mode change effect (a kind of big hit notice effect) is started. Specifically, the mode change image MC that regulates the visual recognition of the effect symbol 70a and the background image from the right side of the screen of the main display device 70 (here, not the whiteout image with high jackpot expectation, but the blackout with low jackpot expectation). An effect (including output of a sound effect) is performed in which the image) is enlarged and displayed toward the left side of the screen (see FIG. 142 (f)).

Further, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses from the start of the fluctuation effect, the state returns to the state (adjustable) in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible. ..

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 139, when the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the mode change image MC has three. The size is such that the visual recognition of the effect symbol 70a is restricted (see FIG. 142 (g)).

When the entire screen of the main display device 70 is shielded by the mode change image, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, and the background image, the effect symbol 70a, and the effect symbol 70a are displayed on the back surface side of the mode change image. , The icon (holding icon) changes according to the effect mode B.

Further, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 139 (during the fourth cycle change), the ascending display of the effect symbol 70a as the pre-change operation ends, and the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a starts. The mode change image MC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the change start order of the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 142 (h)), and at the timing of T9, the mode change image MC is framed out on the left side of the screen of the main display device 70. And erased (see FIG. 142 (i)).

Regarding the mode change image MC, the visual recognition of the effect symbols 70a is gradually regulated (the order in which the fluctuation starts becomes difficult to visually recognize), but the visual recognition of the three effect symbols 70a is restricted from the beginning. It may be displayed. Further, although the mode change image MC displays a part of the effect symbol 70a in a visible state to the extent that the change start order becomes difficult to see, all of the effect symbols 70a are displayed in an invisible state. You may try to do it.

Further, the mode change image MC is displayed at the completion timing of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, but it is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the completion of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. It may be done.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol is started from the customer waiting state, there are restrictions on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. When the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol) is started in response to the start of the variation display (cycle variation) of the special symbol, the cross key 19 There are restrictions or restrictions (cannot be adjusted) on the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted or the amount of light is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable effect.

If there are restrictions or restrictions (cannot be adjusted) on the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 due to the start of the variation effect, no matter what kind of variation effect is executed, the variation effect is executed. At the same timing, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or restricted (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by not forcing the player to perform complicated work such as changing the timing of adjusting the volume and the amount of light by the cross key 19 each time the variable effect is executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol is started from the customer waiting state, there is no restriction on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. Or, although it is not restricted (adjustability is maintained), the variation display of the special symbol (variation display on the sub-first variation indicator 81) is started according to the start of the variation display (cycle variation) of the special symbol. In such a case, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or restricted (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted or the amount of light is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol is started from the customer waiting state, there is no restriction on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. Or, if there is no restriction (adjustability is maintained), but the hold icon is reduced (shifted) in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation), the volume is adjusted with the cross key 19. And the light intensity adjustment is restricted or restricted (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted or the amount of light is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the decrease in the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol is started from the customer waiting state, there is no restriction on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. Alternatively, although not restricted (adjustability is maintained), a variable BGM (which may be a variable start sound, a warning sound, etc.) is audibly output according to the start of the variable display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol. In some cases, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted or restricted (cannot be adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, it is possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the variable BGM.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and the hold icon (hold number display area, sub hold display) is increased and displayed during the customer waiting state. , The volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are not restricted or restricted (adjustability is maintained). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the restrictions on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are released before the variation display (update variation) after the operation before the variation of the effect symbol is started. It is designed to be (adjustable). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As for the restrictions on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment that occur after the start of the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol, it is assumed that the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed, but the volume value image and the light amount value image. May not be displayed (erased if it is displayed), or the volume value image or light intensity value image displayed on the front layer of the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the rear layer of the effect symbol 70a (. By superimposing it on the front of the background image and behind the effect symbol 70a), there may be restrictions on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, in the variable effect, the plurality of effect symbols and the plurality of special symbols are started with the same display appearance, and the plurality of effect symbols and the plurality of special symbols are started. Ends with the same display result, and the effect symbol is hidden (visualization is restricted) While the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (customer waiting demo image is being displayed), the hold memory increases and the variable effect is changed. When started, multiple effect symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they can be visually recognized during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, but from the time until multiple special symbols change (update change). However, the time until a plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner (updated variable after the operation before the fluctuation) is longer. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variation effect. In addition, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect at the start of the fluctuation by the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the hold memory is increased and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted). In the case, the special symbol starts variable display (update fluctuation) before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image ends, and the effect symbol changes after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image ends (update fluctuation after the pre-change operation). It is supposed to be started. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variation effect. In addition, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect at the start of the fluctuation by the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the hold memory is increased and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted). In this case, the special symbol starts variable display (update fluctuation) before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image ends, the hold icon is visibly displayed during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, and the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image ends. The reduction display (shift display to the icon) ends later. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the hold memory is increased and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted). In that case, the hold icon is visibly displayed during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, and the reduction display (shift display to the icon) is started before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, and the effect design is waiting for the customer. The variation display (update variation after the pre-variation operation) is started after the fade-out of the demo image is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the hold memory increases and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the hold icon is visually recognized during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. In addition to being displayed as possible, the reduction display (shift display to the icon) is started after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, and the variable display of the effect design is started after the reduction display of the hold icon is completed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the hold memory increases and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the icon is displayed after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed. The display is completed (shift display from the hold icon is completed), and the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the hold memory increases and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the special symbol is before the end of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. The display mode is changed a plurality of times in the cycle fluctuation of the above. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demo production in a natural flow while recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the hold memory increases and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, it becomes visible during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. As shown in the above, the effect pattern is displayed without fading in (so that it is superimposed on the back side of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, it is possible to end the demo production waiting for customers in a natural flow and start the variable production without delay, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, a specific advance notice effect (effect effect effect at start, mode change effect) that regulates the visual recognition of the effect symbol while expecting a big hit according to the start of the variable effect is expected. Is possible, and when the hold memory increases and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the effect pattern is not faded in so that it can be visually recognized during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. It is displayed (overlaid on the back side of the customer waiting demo image), and a specific notice effect is started after the effect symbol becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific advance notice production has been started due to the start of the fluctuation production while confirming the stop result of the previous fluctuation production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, even while the customer waiting demo image in which the effect symbol is hidden (visualization is restricted) is being displayed, the special symbol is displayed by the customer waiting demo image. The visibility is not regulated (it is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, when displaying a demo movie of a production (for example, one scene of SP / SPSP reach production, one scene of successful decision production, one scene of jackpot production, etc.) that is executed during the variable production as a customer waiting demo production. Also, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player is in a waiting state in which the fluctuation effect is not executed, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation of the gaming machine is lowered due to the player's misunderstanding.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the hold number display area (first hold) is displayed even while the customer waiting demo image in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted) is being displayed. The number of holds displayed in the number display area SA and the second hold number display area SB) is not restricted from being visually recognized by the customer waiting demo image (displayed so as to be superimposed on the front of the customer waiting demo image). .. Therefore, when displaying a demo movie of a production (for example, one scene of SP / SPSP reach production, one scene of successful decision production, one scene of jackpot production, etc.) that is executed during the variable production as a customer waiting demo production. However, it is possible to assist the player to recognize that the player is in a waiting state where the fluctuation effect is not executed, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation of the gaming machine is lowered due to the player's misunderstanding. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variation effect is started and the variation display (update variation) of the special symbol is started, the outcome at the start (previous stop outcome) is set. Regardless, the predetermined combination of special symbols ("123") becomes the first roll (starting point) after the update, and the numbers in each column are updated one by one from that roll. .. Therefore, it is possible to control the variable display of the special symbol regardless of the previous stop roll, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

(Specific example when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production)
A specific example of recovery from the power failure generated during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 144.
FIG. 143 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from a power failure generated during the fluctuation effect, and FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of effect at various timings of FIG. 143. Here, in order to restore the normal gaming state, it is controlled to the effect mode A.

First, at a timing before the timing of T0 in FIG. 143, a power cut occurs during the fluctuation display of the special symbol whose first hold number is "2", and then the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is performed. When restarted, a reading screen (initial screen) including the characters "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. At this time, it is impossible to adjust the volume or the amount of light by using the cross key 19.

Then, a command at the time of power ON from the main control board 110 that has restored the control state of the game to the state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130 (here, a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is being displayed). 2 The power recovery designation command, the first special symbol storage designation command, and the second special symbol storage designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is restarted, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is restarted from the state before the power was cut off, and the first special symbol hold display is displayed. The "2" display of the first hold number at 63 is also resumed.

After that, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the command when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned power recovery notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) are performed. At the same time, the information display on the sub information display 80 is started.

At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the uppermost layer, and various effect images (mode A background image, an effect that is the initial appearance at the time of power restoration). Power restoration in which the symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, the number of holdings at the time of power restoration and the holding icon HI according to the effect mode, the holding numbers according to the number of holdings at the time of power restoration, etc.) are set in the lower layer than the power restoration image. Image data for notification is displayed (see FIG. 144 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 143, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 144 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 143, when the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, a start command (special symbol) is given from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol. At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 144 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 143 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area The SA and the sub 1st hold indicator 83 are displayed as "1", the variation display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub 1st variation indicator 81 is started, and the output of the power recovery notification sound is stopped. (See FIG. 144 (c)).

Further, when the fade-out of the power restoration image (erasing from an opaque state to a gradually transparent state) is started, it is visually recognized (confirmed) that the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ have the same number (“753”). -Recognition) becomes possible, and the hold icon HI can be visually recognized. Further, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts the update variation (scrolling, switching display). Further, the audible output of the variable BGM is started from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 140 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 143 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the fade-out of the power recovery image is completed and the power recovery image is completely hidden, as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. At the start of the effect effect (a kind of jackpot notice effect) is started. Specifically, a preview effect image YE having a size that regulates the visibility of the central effect symbol 70a during the floating display is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to visually recognize the background image and the effect symbol 70a. An effect (including sound effect output) that will be regulated (shielded) is performed (see FIG. 144 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 143, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses from the start of the fluctuation effect, the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 (adjustable), and the timing of T6 When the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the notice effect image YE restricts the visibility of the three effect symbols 70a. It becomes the size (see FIG. 144 (e)).

Further, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 143 (during the fourth cycle change), the ascending display of the effect symbol 70a as the pre-change operation ends, and the scroll display (update change) of the effect symbol 70a starts. The notice effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the change start order of the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 144 (f)), and the notice effect image YE is deleted at the timing of T8.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, the fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) of the special symbol is started from the display of the power recovery image in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted. At that time, the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted continues for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display (including the variable effect) of the special symbol has started, and then adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the variable effect is started while the power restoration image in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted) is displayed, the power restoration image fades out. Multiple effect symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they can be visually recognized inside, but multiple effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner (before fluctuation) rather than the time until the multiple special symbols are variable display (update fluctuation). The time until the update change after the operation) is longer. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variation effect. In addition, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect at the start of the fluctuation by the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the variable effect is started during the display of the power restoration image in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the special symbol is restored to power. The variation display (update variation) is started before the end of the fade-out of the image, and the variation display (update variation after the pre-variation operation) is started after the end of the fade-out of the power recovery image of the effect symbol. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variation effect. In addition, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect at the start of the fluctuation by the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the variable effect is started during the display of the power restoration image in which the effect symbol is hidden (visual recognition is restricted), the special symbol is power restored. The fluctuation display (update fluctuation) is started before the end of the fade-out of the image, the hold icon is visibly displayed during the fade-out of the power recovery image, and the decrease display (shift display to the icon) is displayed after the fade-out of the power recovery image is completed. ) Is finished. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the fluctuation effect is started during the display of the power recovery image, the hold icon is visibly displayed during the fade-out of the power recovery image and the power supply is displayed. The reduction display (shift display to the icon) is started after the fade-out of the restored image is completed, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the reduction display of the hold icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the variation effect is started during the display of the power recovery image, the display of the icon is completed after the fade-out of the power recovery image is completed (from the hold icon). (Shift display is completed), and the effect symbol is set to start variable display after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the variation effect is started during the display of the power restoration image, the display mode changes in the cycle variation of the special symbol before the end of the fade-out of the power restoration image. Is being performed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demo production in a natural flow while recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power restoration image is being displayed, the effect symbol is faded in so that it can be visually recognized during the fade-out of the power restoration image. It is designed to be displayed without (superimposing on the back side of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, it is possible to end the demo production waiting for customers in a natural flow and start the variable production without delay, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, a specific advance notice effect (effect effect effect at start, mode change effect) that regulates the visual recognition of the effect symbol while expecting a big hit according to the start of the variable effect is expected. Is possible, and if the fluctuation effect is started while the power restore image is being displayed, the effect pattern is not faded in so that it can be seen during the fade-out of the power restore image (behind the customer waiting demo image). (To be superimposed on) is displayed, and a specific advance notice effect is started after the effect symbol becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific advance notice production has been started due to the start of the fluctuation production while confirming the stop result of the previous fluctuation production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

In addition, regardless of whether it is a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state (time saving state), if the fluctuation display of the special symbol becomes a shortened fluctuation, the pre-change operation of the effect symbol is not performed (or). It may be possible to shorten the pre-fluctuation operation time), and if the variation display of the special symbol that is started first after recovery from the power failure becomes a shortened variation, during the fade-out of the power recovery image (or the customer). The variable display of the effect symbol will be started (at an earlier timing than when the variable effect is executed during the waiting effect). In other words, it takes more time for the effect symbol to change (update and change) when the change effect is started while the power restoration image is being displayed than when the change effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed. It tends to be shorter. By doing so, after the power supply is restored, the player understands that the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the production can proceed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Normal timing chart for sending and receiving commands for variable production)
A specific example relating to command transfer of a normal variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 (1) is a timing chart when the effect control board 130 can normally receive the command related to the normal variation effect, and FIG. 145 (2) shows the case where the command related to the normal variation effect cannot be normally received. It is a timing chart.
Note that, in FIGS. 145 (1) and 145 (2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and here, the time lag of the effect caused by the transfer of commands is not considered.

First, FIG. 145 (1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, it is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the background image is normally scrolled horizontally in the main display device 70, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .. Further, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) are emitting light while waiting for customers without outputting BGM.

Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T1, the start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command,) related to the normal variation effect from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Special symbol specification command, special symbol fluctuation pattern specification command) is sent. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this start command, the normal variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variation display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and during the non-reach effect. The corresponding normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is reproduced from the beginning of the song and output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

After that, at the timing of T2, when the left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped and then the center effect symbol 70a temporarily stops, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) are output. ) Lights up when it is lost, and the output of the stop sound ends at the timing of T3.

Further, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. ..

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the customer waiting state is reached, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this customer waiting state designation command, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light while waiting for customers.

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state (reception of the customer waiting state designation command), the output is continued because it is after the end of the normal fluctuation effect. Normally, the output of BGM (a type of variable BGM) is stopped in the middle of a song (in the middle of song data).

Further, when the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T8 after the timing of T7, the start command (special symbol storage designation command, which is related to the normal variation effect) from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this start command, the normal variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variation display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and the normal BGM (variable BGM) is started. 1) is reproduced from the beginning of the song and output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) normally perform variable light emission.

Subsequently, FIG. 145 (2) will be described.
Since the timings of T0 to T3 are the same as those in FIG. 145 (1), the timings after T4 will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the effect symbol 70a has a temporary stop period, a special symbol TZ variation display period, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) are lost. The hourly emission period is extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the customer waiting state is reached, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this customer waiting state designation command, the turn-off period of the effect button 17 is extended.

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, which is the remaining time of the BGM name) elapses from the start of the customer waiting state, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that should normally stop is used. At the timing of T7 when the output period is extended and the output period of the normal BGM is being extended, the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the output stop condition (customer waiting state specification command is received). Later, since the predetermined period has elapsed, other commands have been received, the decision production has not started, etc.), the BGM is usually output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

While the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song every time the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data). (The normal BGM corresponding to the current production mode is played back in a loop, and the normal BGM in the production mode different from the current production mode is not output from the beginning of the song).

Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T8, the start time command (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command,) related to the normal variation effect from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Special symbol specification command, special symbol fluctuation pattern specification command) is sent. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this start command, the variable effect is normally started.

At this time, when the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a ends and the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped deviates from the symbol stop position, the effect symbol 70a is momentarily displayed at the symbol stop position and displayed in a variable manner (variation). Pre-operation) is started. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ does not end and the variable display is continued as it is, the output of the normal BGM (a kind of variable BGM) is continued without interruption, and the extinguishing period of the effect button 17 is also continued. In addition, the light emission period at the time of loss in various lighting devices ends, and normal variable light emission is started.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ are terminated, and the effect is temporarily stopped. The symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position, and the special symbol TZ that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. Further, the output of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues without interruption, but when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the output of the normal BGM stops.

Here, the case where the stop time command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received during the normal fluctuation effect is described, but the case where the stop time command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received during the long variation effect is also described. , The basic flow is the same.

In FIG. 145 (1), the output of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is normally stopped at the timing of T6 after the effect control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5. However, instead of continuing the output with non-audible sound and starting the output of normal BGM from the beginning of the song at the timing of T8, the normal BGM that was output with non-audible sound is switched to audible sound. It may be output.

Further, in FIG. 145 (2), instead of continuing the output without interrupting the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) at the timing of T8, the normal BGM may be output from the beginning of the song.

(Timing chart related to command transfer of loss SPSP reach fluctuation production)
A specific example relating to command transfer of the loss SPSP reach fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 146.

FIG. 146 (1) is a timing chart when the command related to the lost SPSP reach variation effect can be normally received, and FIG. 146 (2) is a timing when the command related to the lost SPSP reach variation effect cannot be normally received. It is a chart.
It should be noted that, in FIGS. 146 (1) and 146 (2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and here, the time lag of the effect caused by the transfer of commands is not considered.

First, FIG. 146 (1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the special symbol related to the SPSP reach variation effect is executed, and the SPSP reach effect is executed. Specifically, the SPSP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the central effect symbol 70a fluctuates in a state where the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the upper left corner of the screen to form a reach state. It is displayed, and the effect related to SPSP reach is performed in a state where all three special symbols TZ are variablely displayed. Further, the SPSP reach BGM is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform SPSP reach light emission.

Then, at the timing of T1, it is decided that the SPSP reach effect will be the final phase, and the effect is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promotion effect is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a promotion sound "press!" Is output from the voice output device 9. In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, at the timing of T2, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "chi-n" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped due to a reach loss, and various types of lighting (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light when lost.

Further, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the determination failure effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped. Further, by executing an eye-catching effect (for example, 1 second) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a (special symbol TZ) is stopped and displayed, the SPSP reach background image returns to the side-scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect symbol is restored. As the 70a returns to the normal size, it returns from the display mode of only numbers to the display mode of numbers + characters and maintains a temporarily stopped state.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. ..

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the customer waiting state is reached, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this customer waiting state designation command, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light while waiting for customers.

Further, when the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T6, the start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, command for normal variation effect) related to the normal variation effect from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Special symbol specification command, special symbol fluctuation pattern specification command) is sent. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this start command, the normal variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variation display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and the non-reach effect is supported. A normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is reproduced from the beginning of a song and output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

Subsequently, FIG. 146 (2) will be described.
Since the timings of T0 to T3 are the same as those in FIG. 146 (1), the timings of T4 and thereafter will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the effect symbol 70a has a temporary stop period, a special symbol TZ variation display period, a BGM non-output period, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board). The light emitting period when the lighting device 74) is lost is extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the customer waiting state is reached, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this customer waiting state designation command, the turn-off period of the effect button 17 is extended.

Further, when the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T6, the start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, command for normal variation effect) related to the normal variation effect from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. Special symbol specification command, special symbol fluctuation pattern specification command) is sent. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this start command, the extension of various periods ends and the normal variation effect is started.

At this time, when the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a ends and the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped deviates from the symbol stop position, the effect symbol 70a is momentarily displayed at the symbol stop position and displayed in a variable manner (variation). Pre-operation) is started. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ does not end, and the variable display is continued as it is, and the extinguishing period of the effect button 17 is also continued. Further, the output of the normal BGM (a kind of variable BGM) is started, and the normal variable light emission in various lighting devices is started.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ are terminated, and the effect is temporarily stopped. The symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position, and the special symbol TZ that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed.

Further, here, the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received during the lost SPSP reach fluctuation effect has been described, but the stop command and the customer wait during the lost normal reach variation effect or the lost SP reach variation effect. Even if the status specification command cannot be received normally, the basic flow is the same except that the output of BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) is stopped when the reach loss result is temporarily stopped without making a decision. It becomes.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 145 to 146, the effect sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output in the non-reach variable effect in which the output of the BGM continues (remains) until the end of the variable effect. When the stop condition is not satisfied when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, and the next start command cannot be received normally). The temporary stop period of the effect symbol and the output period of the effect sound are extended, and if the effect sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. Even if it is not executed, the production sound is output from the beginning (the beginning of the song) and the output period of the production sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 145 to 146, the effect sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output in the non-reach variable effect in which the output of the BGM continues (remains) until after the end of the variable effect. If the stop condition is not satisfied when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, or the next start command cannot be received normally). , The variation period of the special symbol and the output period of the effect sound are extended, and if the effect sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the variation period of this special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol is not executed. Even in the state, the production sound is output from the beginning (the beginning of the song), and the output period of the production sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 145 to 146, in the reach variation effect in which the output of the BGM does not continue until after the end of the variation effect (there is no vestige), the BGM is not output and the effect pattern (loss effect) is produced. When the symbol) is temporarily stopped, the stop condition is not satisfied (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, and the next start command cannot be received normally). When the temporary stop period of the symbol is extended, the BGM is not newly output during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol. Therefore, it is not possible to make the player misunderstand that a so-called revival production (a production suggesting that it is a big hit after suggesting that it is a loss) may be executed, and improving the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 145 to 146, in the reach variation effect in which the output of the BGM does not continue until the end of the variation effect (there is no remnant), the BGM is not output and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When the stop condition is not satisfied (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting status specification command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), the fluctuation period of the special symbol is When it is extended, BGM is not newly output during the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Therefore, it is not possible to make the player misunderstand that a so-called revival production (a production suggesting that it is a big hit after suggesting that it is a loss) may be executed, and improving the interest of the game. Is possible.

(Timing chart related to command transfer of jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation production)
A specific example relating to command transfer of the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

FIG. 147 (1) is a timing chart when the command related to the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect can be normally received, and FIG. 147 (2) is a timing when the command related to the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect cannot be normally received. It is a chart.
It should be noted that, in FIGS. 147 (1) and 147 (2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and here, the time lag of the effect caused by the transfer of commands is not considered.

First, FIG. 147 (1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the special symbol related to the SPSP reach variation effect is executed, and the SP reach effect is executed. Specifically, the SP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the central effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the upper part of the screen to form a reach state. The effect related to SP reach is performed in a state where all three special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the SP reach BGM is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

After that, when the SP reach production reaches the final stage and the reach loss result is temporarily stopped, the SPSP development production suggesting that the SP reach production develops is executed, and the SPSP reach production is started at the timing of T1. Then, on the main display device 70, the SPSP reach background image is displayed and the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. Further, the SPSP reach BGM is output instead of the SP reach BGM, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform SPSP reach light emission.

At this time, the final effect is executed when the execution timing of the final effect is reached. Specifically, the voice output device 9 outputs a definite sound of "cue in cure", and a handle light emitting device (not shown) rotatably provided in the firing handle 15 operates. Specifically, it emits light in a rainbow color indicating that it is a big hit and rotates.

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the final effect, the output of the final sound in the final effect is stopped, and at the timing of T3, the SPSP reach effect is determined to be the final phase and the effect is started. .. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promotion effect is started. At this time, an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a promotion sound "press!" Is output from the voice output device 9. In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a determined success effect (a kind of final effect) suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (largely descend) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the success image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is output from the voice output device 9. In addition, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen with a big hit. Further, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors indicating that they are big hits, and the effect button vibration motor operates to vibrate the effect button 17.

Further, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the determined success effect, the output of the success sound is stopped, the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is stopped, and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Stops. Further, by executing the eye-catching effect, the SPSP reach background image returns to the side-scrolling of the normal background image, the effect symbol 70a returns to the normal size, and the number + character display mode is changed from the number-only display mode. It returns to and maintains the temporarily stopped state.

Next, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light in rainbow colors. Is terminated and light is emitted while stopped. Further, the handle light emitting device rotatably provided in the firing handle 15 stops the operation.

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T7, the opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this opening designation command, the opening effect is started. Specifically, the jackpot medium background (here, the opening background) is displayed on the main display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden, and the jackpot medium BGM (here, the opening BGM) is displayed from the audio output device 9. ) Is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light during a big hit.

Further, at the timing of T8, when the opening time elapses, a round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this round designation command, the effect control board 130 starts the round effect.

Subsequently, FIG. 147 (2) will be described.
Since the timings from T0 to T5 are the same as those in FIG. 147 (1), the timings after T6 will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T6, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the fluctuation period of the special symbol TZ, and the rainbow color of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74). The light emitting period in the light emitting device and the operating period of the handle light emitting device rotatably provided in the firing handle 15 are extended.

Further, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this opening designation command, the side-scrolling period of the normal background image and the non-output period of the variable BGM are extended.

After that, at the timing of T8, when the opening time elapses, a round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this round designation command, the extension of various periods ends and the round effect is started. Specifically, the jackpot medium background (here, the round middle background) is displayed on the main display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden, and the jackpot medium BGM (here, the round) is displayed from the audio output device 9. Medium BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light during a big hit.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the opening designation command at the timing of T7, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ end, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed. The opening effect is started without stopping display.

Further, instead of stopping the output of the success sound at the timing of T5, the output of the success sound may be stopped at the timing between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, or at the timing of T5. Instead of stopping the rainbow-colored light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 at the same time, they may be stopped with a time lag.

In addition, the final effect can be executed at multiple timings (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.), and among them, the final sound and the rotation of the handle light emitting device are output. The output is stopped within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start, but since the rainbow emission of the handle light emitting device continues until the stop command is received, it is assumed that the final effect is executed at any timing. However, if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command, the rainbow light emitting period of the handle light emitting device is extended.

Further, the final effect can be executed at a plurality of timings (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.), but after the stop timing command reception timing (provisional effect symbol 70a). It will not be started (executed) during the extension of the suspension period or during the extension of the variable display period of the special symbol TZ.

Further, here, the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received during the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect has been described, but the stop command and the customer wait during the jackpot normal reach variation effect or the jackpot SP reach variation effect. Even if the status specification command cannot be received normally, the basic flow is that the output of the variable BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) is stopped when the jackpot roll is temporarily stopped without executing the decision effect. Will be the same.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the jackpot variation effect, the stop condition is not satisfied when the effect symbol (loss effect symbol) is temporarily stopped (the stop command is normally received). (Cannot, cannot receive the opening specification command normally) If the temporary stop period of the effect symbol is extended, the final effect will not be started during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, but the effect symbol will be temporarily stopped. The finalized effect started before the extension of the period can be continuously executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the definite effect includes the first effect (output of the definite sound) and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), and before the temporary stop period of the effect symbol is extended. Regarding the started final effect, the first effect (output of the final sound) ends before the temporary stop period of the effect symbol is extended, and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device) is performed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol. ) Can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player is tired of the final production during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the jackpot variation effect, the stop condition is not satisfied when the special symbol is variablely displayed (the stop command cannot be normally received, and the opening designation command is normal). If the variable period of the special symbol is extended, the final effect will not be started during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, but the final effect started before the extension of the variable period of the special symbol. Can be continuously executed even during the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the definite effect includes the first effect (output of the definite sound) and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), and starts before the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Regarding the finalized effect, the first effect (output of the confirmed sound) ends before the extension of the special symbol variation period, and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device) continues even during the extension of the special symbol variation period. It is possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the definite sound becoming jarring during the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the final effect is executed in the jackpot variation effect, the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device) is during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol or during the change period of the special symbol, regardless of the start timing of the final effect. It will continue to be executed even during the extension.

(Timing chart related to command transfer during pre-reading zone production)
A specific example relating to command transfer during the look-ahead zone effect will be described with reference to FIG. 148.

FIG. 148 (1) is a timing chart when the command can be normally received during the look-ahead zone effect, and FIG. 148 (2) is a timing chart when the command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead zone effect.
It should be noted that, in FIGS. 148 (1) and 148 (2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and here, the time lag of the effect caused by the transfer of commands is not considered.

First, FIG. 148 (1) will be described.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the special symbol related to the normal variation effect is executed, and the normal variation effect is executed. Specifically, in the main display device 70, the background is normally scrolled horizontally, and the three effect symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are variablely displayed. Further, a normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) normally perform variable light emission. In addition, a zone suggestion effect suggesting that the look-ahead zone effect may be executed is performed.

After that, at the timing of T1, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the zone suggestion effect, the look-ahead zone effect is started. Specifically, on the main display device 70, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed, the blue zone image (or the red thermal zone image) is displayed, and the output of the zone BGM (or thermal zone BGM) is started. To. At this time, the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is lowered.

Then, at the timing of T2, when the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped following the left and right effect symbols 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting) are output. The device 74) emits light when lost, and the output of the stop sound ends at the timing of T3.

Further, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. ..

At this time, normally BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the output stop condition (a predetermined period elapses after receiving the customer waiting state specification command, the start of the determined effect, etc.) Is not established, so normally BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is started at the timing of T5, the start command (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation) related to the loss SP reach variation effect from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. A command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern specification command) is sent. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this start command, the loss SP reach variation effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variation display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and various lighting devices. (Frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) normally emits variable light.

Further, at the timing of T6, when the normal reach effect is started by the left and right effect symbols 70a forming a reach state and temporarily stopping, the normal reach BGM (variable BGM) is replaced with the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM). Type 1) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

After that, when the normal reach effect reaches the final stage, the SP reach development effect is executed, and when the SP reach effect is started at the timing of T7, the look-ahead zone effect ends, and the SP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70. The effect image related to the SP reach is displayed, the effect symbol 70a forming the reach state is moved to the upper part of the screen and displayed in a reduced size, and the effect symbol 70a changes from the display mode of numbers + characters to the display mode of only numbers. do. Further, the SP reach BGM is output instead of the normal reach BGM, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

Then, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T8, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped due to the reach loss at the final stage of the SP reach effect, a stop sound is output and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, The panel lighting device 74) emits light when it is lost.

Further, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time elapses after the reach loss result is temporarily stopped, the eye-catching effect is executed, so that the SP reach background image returns to the side-scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect symbol 70a Returns to the normal size, and at the same time, it returns from the display mode of only numbers to the display mode of numbers + characters and maintains a temporarily stopped state.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T11, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 148 (2) will be described.
Since the timings of T0 to T3 are the same as those in FIG. 148 (1), the timings of T4 and thereafter will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the effect symbol 70a has a temporary stop period, a special symbol TZ variation display period, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) are lost. The hourly emission period is extended.

At this time, normally BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the output stop condition (a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state specification command, and other commands are received. Since the start of the deciding effect, etc.) has not been established, the BGM is usually output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the start command related to the loss SP reach variation effect from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 ( A special symbol memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, and a special symbol variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. If the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive this start command, the effect symbol 70a has a temporary stop period, a special symbol TZ variation display period, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) are lost. The hourly emission period is further extended.

Further, since the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended at the timing of T6 and the SP reach effect is not executed at the timing of T7, the display period of the look-ahead zone background image and the output of the look-ahead zone BGM are performed. The period will be extended.

After that, at the timing of T8, the zone BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the zone BGM is not satisfied because the output stop condition (start of SP reach production, reception of other commands) is not satisfied. It is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T9 and the timing of T11 after passing the timing of T10, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. To. When the effect control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. .. Further, the side-scrolling of the normal background image is started instead of the look-ahead zone background image, the output of the zone BGM is stopped, and the volume of the normal BGM (a kind of variable BGM) is restored.

Even if the stop command (symbol confirmation command) cannot be normally received at the timing of T11, and then the start command, customer waiting state designation command, opening designation command, etc. are normally received, the effect symbol 70a And the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, the display of the look-ahead zone background image is finished, and the output of the zone BGM is stopped.

If the output of the zone BGM is stopped due to the normal reception of the start command, the output of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is started (restarted) instead of the zone BGM, and the opening specification command is issued. If the output of the zone BGM is stopped due to normal reception, the output of the jackpot BGM (opening BGM) is started instead of the zone BGM.

When the look-ahead zone effect is started at the timing of T1, the output may be stopped instead of lowering the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), or the output may be performed at an inaudible volume. May be. In that case, the output of the normal BGM at the audible volume may be restarted at the timing of T11.

In addition, here, the case where the lost SP reach fluctuation effect is not executed because the stop command and the start command cannot be normally received during the execution of the scheduled look-ahead zone effect that is performed over multiple variable displays has been described. The basic flow is the same even when the SP reach variation effect is a jackpot SP reach variation effect.

In addition, the case where the SP reach variation effect, which was the target of the advance notice of the look-ahead zone effect, is not executed because the stop command and the start command cannot be received normally, but the advance notice target of the look-ahead zone effect is the normal reach variation effect or SPSP. The basic flow is the same even when the normal reach variation effect or the SPSP reach variation effect is not executed because the stop command and the start command cannot be normally received in the reach variation effect.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the non-reach variable effect in which the specific sound (zone BGM or the like) expected to execute the jackpot game is output. If the stop condition is not satisfied (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, or the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the effect symbol and the specific sound If the output period of is extended and the specific sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of this effect symbol, the specific sound is the first (even if the variation display of the special symbol is not executed). It is output from the beginning of the song) and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, a stop condition is obtained when a special symbol is variablely displayed in a non-reach variable effect in which a specific sound (zone BGM or the like) expected to execute a jackpot game is output. If is not established (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, or the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally), the special symbol fluctuation period and the specific sound output period. Is extended and the specific sound is output to the end (end of the song) during the extension of the fluctuation period of this special symbol, the specific sound starts from the beginning (start of the song) even when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed. It is output and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, during the extension of the output period of the specific sound (zone BGM, etc.), a predetermined command (a command at the time of stopping the variable effect in which the look-ahead zone effect should end, a customer waiting state designation) When a command, an opening designation command, etc.) is received, it is possible to end the variation effect and stop the output of the specific sound. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a specific sound (zone BGM or the like) is output even after the expectation of a big hit is lost, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example when the icon is hidden and then redisplayed)
A specific example of the case where the icon is hidden and then redisplayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151.

FIG. 149 is a timing chart when the icon is hidden and then redisplayed, and FIGS. 150 and 151 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings of FIG. 149. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 149, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is "2" ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold display 63, the first hold number display area SA, and the sub first hold display 83 are displayed as "2", and the volume and light amount can be adjusted by the cross key 19. (Adjustable) (see FIG. 150 (a)).

Further, in the main display device 70, the central effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped to form a reach state at the upper part of the screen where the SP reach background image is displayed. , The SPSP reach effect is executed in a state where all the special symbols TZ are variablely displayed. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed in a state in which the effect operation is performed, and the icon display area is concerned. The icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed on the 70C in a state where the effect operation is performed, and the SP reach BGM is audibly output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150 (a)).

Then, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 149, when the SP reach effect is in the final phase and the reach loss result is temporarily stopped, the SPSP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is developed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move (largely descend) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the main display device 70 displays a development image HA that shields (hides and restricts visual recognition) various effect images so as to correspond to the first movable member 73a, and is output from the audio output device 9. The output of the SP reach BGM that had been used is stopped, and the development sound is output (see FIG. 150 (b)).

The icon TI and the hold icon HI are hidden by the execution of the development effect (display of the development image HA) (the visibility is restricted by being shielded), but the normal display mode is held when the display is hidden. The icon HI and the icon TI are in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle (here, 90 degrees). It is the second posture.

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 149, the SPSP reach effect is started when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the development effect. Specifically, with the SPSP reach background image displayed, the three effect symbols 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size, and the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. Further, the non-display of the first hold icon display area 70B is maintained, and the SPSP reach BGM is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150 (c)).

The icon is hidden by the start of the SPSP development effect and redisplayed by the end of the SPSP development effect, but when it is redisplayed, it is hidden by the start of the SPSP development effect. The display is performed from the predetermined operation state (posture that would have continued the effect operation even after being hidden: here, the second posture facing right) without being displayed from (the first posture facing left). (See FIG. 150 (c)).

Further, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 149, the SPSP reach effect is determined to be the final phase and the effect is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated, and the operation promotion effect is started. At this time, an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a promotion sound "press!" Is output from the voice output device 9. Further, the effect button 17 emits white light (see FIG. 150 (d)).

Then, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 149, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound of "chi-n" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops due to a reach loss (see FIG. 150 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decision failure effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped and the effect symbol 70a is normally placed in the center from the upper left corner of the screen. It moves to the position (on the symbol stop position) and is displayed in the normal size (see FIG. 150 (f)).

Further, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 149, an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a (special symbol TZ) is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC displayed in the center of the screen gradually expands to shield the effect symbol 70a and the icon TI (see FIG. 151 (g)). Even if the eye-catching image IC is enlarged, the special symbol TZ and various hold number display areas (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are not shielded (visual recognition is restricted). ..

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 149, when the predetermined period ends from the start of the eye-catching effect, the eye-catching effect ends. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC expands to the entire screen and fades out, the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scroll of the normal background image (here, the mode A background image), and the effect symbol 70a returns to the normal size. At the same time, the display mode of only numbers is restored to the display mode of numbers + characters to maintain the temporarily stopped state, and the icon TI and the hold icon HI are redisplayed (see FIG. 151 (h)).

The hold icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden by the start of the SPSP development effect and redisplayed by the end of the eye-catching effect, but is hidden by the start of the SPSP development effect when it is redisplayed. The posture that would have continued the production operation even after the predetermined operation state (the posture that would have been hidden even after the display was hidden) without the processing of displaying from the operation state (first posture facing left) at the time of becoming: Vertical here. The operation is displayed from the second posture (orientation) (see FIG. 151 (h)).

In addition, the hold icon in the special display mode (blue) is hidden by the start of the SPSP development effect and redisplayed by the end of the eye-catching effect, but is hidden by the start of the SPSP development effect when it is redisplayed. The process of displaying from the operation state (second posture rotated 90 degrees to the right) at the time of becoming was not performed, and the effect operation would have continued even after the predetermined operation state (hidden). Posture: Here, the initial posture) is displayed (see FIG. 151 (h)).

Even if the hold icon has a special display mode other than blue, when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operation state when it was hidden is not performed, and the predetermined operation state (after it is hidden) is not performed. The motion is displayed from the posture that would have continued the production motion).

In addition, the icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden by the start of the eye-catching effect and redisplayed by the end of the eye-catching effect, but is hidden by the start of the eye-catching effect when it is redisplayed. The posture that would have continued the production operation even after the predetermined operation mode (the posture that would have been hidden even after the display was hidden) without the processing of displaying from the operation state (first posture facing left) at the time of becoming: Vertical here. It is displayed from the second orientation (see FIG. 151 (h)).

Even if the icon has a special display mode (blue, red, rainbow color), when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operation state when it was hidden is not performed, and the predetermined operation state (non-display) is performed. The motion is displayed from the posture) that would have continued the effect motion even after the display.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 149, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 151 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by the animation is started, and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a (“565”) and the special symbol TZ (“565”) is started. Further, it is restricted to a state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 cannot be performed (adjustment is not possible) (see FIG. 151 (j)).

Further, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 151 (k)).

If the volume value image or the light amount value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the volume using the cross key 19 is displayed by the stop display of the effect symbol 70a. It is erased according to the state in which the adjustment and the light amount adjustment become impossible, but the volume value image and the light amount value image are erased before the erasure by the animation of the icon TI is completed. That is, when erasing the volume value image or the light amount value image, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the erasing animation of the icon TI.

Next, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 149, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the effect control board 130 from the main control board 110. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding display 63 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is started.

After that, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control board 130 receives the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub first hold display 83 display “0”, and the sub first variable display device becomes visible. The variation display at 81 is started. Further, when the fluctuation effect starts and a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the state returns to the state (adjustable) in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible.

When the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command after receiving the stop time command, the cross key 19 occurs after a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command. It returns to the state where the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted (adjustable).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the specific effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect-SPSP reach effect-eye) that hides the hold icon of the normal mode or the special mode in the variable effect. When the hold icon of the normal mode or the special mode is redisplayed according to the end of the catch effect), the process of displaying from the operation state (posture) at the time of hiding is not performed, and the predetermined operation state (hidden) is performed. The motion is displayed from the posture) that would have continued the directing motion even after becoming. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the hold icon, and it is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort when redisplaying the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation state when the hold icon is redisplayed is not the posture in which the effect operation would have continued even after being hidden, but the first posture (the first posture) which is the initial posture. (1 operating state) may be set. In addition, in a short-time specific effect (SP development effect, etc.), the effect is redisplayed from the posture that would have continued even after it was hidden, and in a long-time specific effect (SPSP reach effect), it is displayed again. It may be redisplayed from the first posture (first operation state) which is the initial posture.

In addition, as a specific effect (short-time effect) that is redisplayed after the hold icon is hidden, the effect mode (display mode of the hold icon) does not change, but a stage change effect in which the background image changes or a predetermined effect A jackpot notice effect (both of which are performed before the reach effect) for displaying a shielded image may be provided.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the end of the specific effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) for hiding the icon in the normal mode or the special mode in the variable effect. When the icon of the normal mode or the special mode is redisplayed according to the above, the process of displaying from the operation state (posture) at the time of hiding is not performed, and even after the predetermined operation state (hidden) is displayed. The motion is displayed from the posture (first posture) that would have continued the production motion. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the icon, and it is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort when redisplaying the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation state when the icon is redisplayed is not the posture in which the effect operation would have been continued even after the icon was hidden, but the first posture (the first posture) which is the initial posture. (1 operating state) may be set. In addition, in a short-time specific effect (SP development effect, etc.), the effect is redisplayed from the posture that would have continued even after it was hidden, and in a long-time specific effect (SPSP reach effect), it is displayed again. It may be redisplayed from the first posture (first operation state) which is the initial posture.

In addition, as a specific effect (short-time effect) that is redisplayed after the icon is hidden, the effect mode (display mode of the hold icon) does not change, but a stage change effect in which the background image changes or a predetermined effect. A jackpot notice effect (both of which are performed before the reach effect) for displaying a shielded image may be provided.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, when the stop display of the special symbol (end of cycle fluctuation) is displayed, there is no restriction or restriction on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. No (adjustable is maintained), but when the effect symbol or special symbol is stopped display (variation effect ends) according to the stop display of the special symbol (end of cycle fluctuation), the volume can be adjusted with the cross key 19. There are restrictions or restrictions (cannot be adjusted) on the amount of light adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize the stop display (the variation effect is completed) of the effect symbol or the special symbol.

If there are restrictions or restrictions (cannot be adjusted) on the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 due to the stop display of the effect symbol or special symbol, any kind of variable effect is executed. Even if there is, there is a restriction or restriction (cannot be adjusted) regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by not forcing the player to perform complicated work such as changing the timing of adjusting the volume and the amount of light by the cross key 19 each time the variable effect is executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, when the stop display of the special symbol (end of cycle fluctuation) is displayed, there is no restriction or restriction on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19. No (adjustable is maintained), but when the icon is erased (variation effect ends) in response to the stop display of the special symbol (end of cycle fluctuation), regarding volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment with the cross key 19. It is constrained or constrained (cannot be adjusted, volume value image or light intensity value image is erased). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long as possible a period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the icon is erased, that is, the variation effect is completed.

As for the restrictions on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment that occur after the stop display of the special symbol, it is assumed that the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed, but the volume value image and the light amount value image are not displayed (displayed). The volume value image and the light intensity value image displayed on the front layer of the effect symbol 70a may be displayed on the rear layer of the effect symbol 70a (in front of the background image). By superimposing the image on the back of the effect symbol 70a), there may be restrictions on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19.

Further, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state specification command, the customer waiting state specification command is received instead of returning to the state where the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are possible. It may be possible to return to a state where the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the cross key 19 at that time, or the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the cross key 19 when the stop time of the effect symbol (special symbol) has elapsed. It may be returned to a state in which the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted by the cross key 19 before the stop time of the effect symbol (special symbol) elapses.

Further, the volume value image or the light amount value image may be displayed even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is not operated between the customer waiting state and the start of the customer waiting demo effect. In this case, a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds, which is the same time as the remaining time of BGM, or 10 seconds, which is shorter than the remaining time of BGM) has elapsed since the customer wait state. It is advisable to display the volume value image and the light amount value image later.

(Specific example of the operation state of the hold icon before and after the icon change effect)
A specific example of the operation state of the hold icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in the state where the first reserved number is "2", and the first reserved number is executed. "2" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Further, the hold icon of the two normal display modes is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon of the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that these three icons are synchronized. The production operation (swaying operation) is performed.

In this state, when the hold icon change effect (first change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the hold icon displayed in the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is started, FIG. As shown in b), the character A is displayed at the lower right of the screen and the heart HE is thrown, and the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is in the second posture facing right. The heart hits the hold icon HI in the normal mode.

Then, when the heart HE that shields the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152 (c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white), which was the second posture facing to the right, changes to the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) having a different shape, and before the change. The rotation operation (directing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state of the hold icon HI (here, the second posture facing right).

There are a plurality of hold icons in the first special display mode (round blue), the hold icon in the second special display mode (round red), and the hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color). Although the display mode is common to all the display modes, the effect operation (rotational operation) of returning from the first posture to the first posture via the second posture is 2.5 in one cycle. It is repeated in seconds (a cycle different from the effect operation of the icon in the normal display mode).

Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 152 (d), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the current variation effect ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode is in the second posture in a state of being rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the first reserved number is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 152 (e), the first reserved number display area SA is displayed as "1". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is started, and the two hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. (Reduced display). After that, when the predetermined time elapses, the shift display of the hold icon is completed, and one becomes the icon TI.

Then, when the hold icon change effect (second change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the hold icon HI displayed in the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B is started, FIG. 152 (f). ), The character A is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the trigger effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right in the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B. The heart hits the hold icon HI in the first special display mode.

Further, when the heart HE that shields the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152 (g). Specifically, the hold icon HI of the first special display mode, which was in the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right, changes to the hold icon of the second special display mode (round red) having the same shape, and changes. The operation state of the previous hold icon HI (second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right) is taken over and the rotation operation is continued.

Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 152 (h), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the current variation effect ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the second special display mode is the first posture (initial posture) that is rotated 360 degrees and returned to the position of 0 degrees.

If the hold icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) is changed to the hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having a different shape, the operation state of the hold icon before the change is changed. The rotation operation (directing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. On the other hand, when the hold icon of the first special display mode (round blue) is changed to the hold icon of the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, the operation of the hold icon before the change is performed. The state is taken over and the rotation operation (directing operation) is started.

Further, although the hold icon change effect in the character A action change pattern has been described here, the hold icon change effect in the normal change pattern and the character B to D action change patterns is also held in the normal display mode (hexagonal white). When the icon changes to the hold icon of the first to third special display modes having a different shape, the rotation operation (directing operation) is performed from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state of the hold icon before the change. Start. On the other hand, when the hold icon of the first special display mode (round blue) changes to the second special display mode (round red) or the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, or the second special display mode (round rainbow color). When the display mode (round red) is changed to the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, the operation state of the hold icon before the change is taken over and the rotation operation (effect operation) is started.

(Specific example of the operating state of the icon before and after the icon change effect)
A specific example of the operating state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 153. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in the state where the first reserved number is "1", and the first reserved number is executed. "1" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Further, one hold icon of the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon of the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that these two icons are synchronized. The production operation (swaying operation) is performed.

In this state, when the icon change effect (first change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (b). , The character A is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the trigger effect of throwing the heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the normal display mode which is the second posture facing right in the icon display area 70C.

Then, when the heart HE that shields the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153 (c). Specifically, the icon TI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white), which was the second posture facing to the right, changes to the icon in the first special display mode (round blue) having a different shape, and before the change. The rotation operation (directing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state (here, the second posture facing right) of the icon TI.

The icon in the first special display mode (round blue), the icon in the second special display mode (round red), and the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) are plural. Although the display mode is common to all the display modes, the effect operation (rotational operation) of returning from the first posture to the first posture via the second posture is 2.5 in one cycle. It repeats in seconds.

Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the character A is displayed, the character A is erased as shown in FIG. 153 (d). At this time, the icon TI in the first special display mode is in the second posture in a state of being rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the icon change effect (second change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, the screen is as shown in FIG. 153 (e). Character A is displayed in the lower right corner, and an opportunity effect of throwing a heart HE is performed, and the icon TI in the first special display mode, which is in the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right in the icon display area 70C, is displayed. The heart hits.

Then, when the heart HE that shields the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153 (f). Specifically, the icon TI in the first special display mode, which was in the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right, changes to the icon in the second special display mode (round red) having the same shape, and changes. The operation state of the previous icon TI (second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right) is taken over and the rotation operation is continued.

Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the character A is displayed, the character A is erased as shown in FIG. 153 (g). At this time, the icon TI in the second special display mode is in the second posture in a state of being rotated 270 degrees to the right.

If the icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) is changed to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having a different shape, the operating state of the hold icon before the change is changed. The rotation operation (directing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. On the other hand, when the icon in the first special display mode (round blue) is changed to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, the operation of the icon before the change is performed. The state is taken over and the rotation operation (directing operation) is started.

Further, although the icon change effect in the character A action change pattern has been described here, the hold icon in the normal mode (hexagonal white) is also used for the icon change effect in the normal change pattern and the character B to D action change patterns. Or, when the icon changes to the icon of the first to third special display modes having a different shape, the hold icon before the change or the rotation operation from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state of the icon. (Direction operation) is started. On the other hand, when the hold icon of the first special display mode (round blue) or the icon changes to the second special display mode (round red) or the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, or When the second special display mode (round red) changes to the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, the hold icon before the change or the operation state of the icon is taken over and the rotation operation (effect) is performed. Operation) is started.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, the first to first ones having different shapes when the hold icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). 3 When changing to the hold icon in the special display mode, it is possible to change the hold icon after the change from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (operation display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, when the hold icon in the first special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state), the second and second postures have the same shape. 3 When changing to the hold icon in the special display mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the hold icon before the change and perform the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, the third special display having the same shape when the hold icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). When changing to the hold icon of the mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the hold icon before the change and operate the effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, the first to third specials having different shapes when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). When the icon is changed to the icon in the display mode, the changed icon can be changed from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (operation display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, the second to second icons having the same shape when the icon in the first special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). 3 When changing to the icon in the special display mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the icon before the change and perform the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, the third special display having the same shape when the icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). When changing to the icon of the mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the hold icon before the change and perform the effect operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the hold icon in the special mode or the icon is already displayed and the hold icon in the normal display mode changes to the hold icon in the special display mode, the hold icon in the special display mode that has already been displayed is displayed. Alternatively, the hold icon newly changed from the same posture (operation state) as the icon to the special display mode may start the rotation operation (effect operation).

Further, when the hold icon of the first special display mode or the icon is changed to the second or third special display mode having the same shape when the icon is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state), the change is made. The later hold icon or the icon may be made to perform an effect operation (operation display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state).

Further, when the hold icon in the second special display mode is changed to the third special display mode having the same shape when the hold icon is in the second posture (changed posture, second operating state), the held icon after the change or the corresponding The icon may be changed from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (operation display).

In addition, when the hold icon or the icon is completely shielded by the heart image and the display mode changes, the posture of the icon before the shield is different from the posture of the icon before the shield (first posture) instead of operating the effect from the posture of the icon before the shield. If it is a posture, the second posture, if it is the second posture, the first posture or the second posture with a slightly different posture) may be used for the effect operation.

(Example of transformation of icon operation state before and after icon change effect)
An example of modification of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 154. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

In this modification, as the icon display mode, the fourth special display mode (round flashing white) suggesting that the icon display mode may change, and the specific effect (SP / SP /) that expects the execution of the jackpot game. A fifth special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) suggesting that the SPSP reach effect) is executed is set. Since the icons of the 4th special display mode and the 5th special display mode have different information from the icons of the 1st to 3rd special display modes suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot game, the 1st special display mode and the first 2 It may be paraphrased as a special display mode.

The icon of the 4th special display mode (blinking round white) can be displayed when the game ball wins the starting port, or can be changed from the icon of the normal mode, but the 1st to 3rd special modes are available. It does not change from the display mode or the icon of the fifth special display mode, and can be changed to the first to third special display modes or the fifth special display mode. Further, the icon of the fifth special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) can be changed from the icon of the fourth special display mode, but does not change from the icon of the normal display mode or the icons of the first to third special display modes. , The normal display mode and the first to fourth special display modes do not change.

First, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in the state where the first reserved number is "1", and the first reserved number is executed. "1" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Further, one hold icon of the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon of the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that these two icons are synchronized. The production operation (swaying operation) is performed.

In this state, when the hold icon change effect (first change) by the character A action change pattern targeting the hold icon displayed in the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is started, FIG. 154 (1st change). As shown in b), the character A is displayed at the lower right of the screen and the heart HE is thrown, and the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is in the second posture facing right. The heart hits the hold icon HI in the normal display mode.

Then, when the heart HE that shields the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 154 (c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white), which was the second posture facing to the right, changes to the hold icon in the fourth special display mode (round flashing white) with a different shape, and before the change. The expansion / contraction operation (directing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over the operation state of the hold icon HI (here, the second posture facing to the right).

The 4th special display mode (hexagonal white) icon and the 5th special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) icon are common to a plurality of production modes, but the 4th The effect operation (enlargement / reduction operation) in which the icon in the special display mode returns from the first posture of the reduced size to the first posture via the second posture of the enlarged size is 1 second per cycle (what is the effect operation of the icon in the normal display mode)? The effect operation (up and down operation) in which the icon of the fifth special display mode returns from the upward first posture to the first posture through the downward second posture is repeated in different cycles (different cycles) for 1.5 seconds per cycle (up and down movement). It is repeated in a cycle different from the effect operation of the icon in the normal display mode).

Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 154 (d), the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the current variation effect ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the fourth special display mode is in the second posture of the enlarged size.

After that, when the first reserved number is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 154 (e), the first reserved number display area SA is displayed as "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is started, and one hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. (Reduced display). After that, when the predetermined time elapses, the shift display of the hold icon is completed and the icon TI is set.

Then, when the icon change effect by the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, the character A is displayed at the lower right of the screen as shown in FIG. 154 (f). Is displayed and an opportunity effect for throwing the heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the fourth special display mode, which is the second posture of the medium size in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the heart HE that shields the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 154 (g). Specifically, the icon TI of the fourth special display mode (round flashing white), which was the second posture of the medium size, is changed to the icon of the fifth special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) having a different shape. Then, the vertical movement (directing movement) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state (here, the second posture of the medium size) of the icon TI before the change.

Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the character A is displayed, the character A is erased as shown in FIG. 154 (h). At this time, the icon TI in the fifth special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) is in the second downward posture.

When the hold icon in the 4th special display mode (blinking round white) changes to the hold icon in the 5th special display mode (ax-shaped multicolor) having a different shape, the operating state of the hold icon before the change is changed. The vertical movement (directing movement) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. In addition, when the icon changes from the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the icon in the fourth special display mode (round flashing white) with a different shape, the posture (operating state) of the icon before the change is changed. The scaling operation (directing operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the fourth special display mode (first) in which the shape is different when the hold icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second operating state). When changing to the hold icon of 1 special display mode), it is possible to change the hold icon after the change from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (operation display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) in which the shape is different when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second operating state). When changing to the icon of the display mode), it is possible to change the changed icon from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (operation display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the shape is different when the hold icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). When changing to the hold icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), it is possible to change the hold icon after the change from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (motion display). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, the shape is different when the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state). When changing to the icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), it is possible to change the changed icon from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state) to the effect operation (motion display). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the icon. In addition, when the display mode of the icon is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, while the hold icon or the icon of the 4th special display mode (1st special display mode) is already displayed, the hold icon or the icon of the normal mode is the 4th special display mode (1st special mode). When the icon changes to the hold icon or the icon, the hold icon in the 4th special display mode (1st special display mode) that has already been displayed or the same posture (operating state) as the icon is newly changed to the 4th special display mode. The hold icon changed to (first special display mode) or the icon may start the scaling operation (effect operation).

Further, while the hold icon or the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) is already displayed, the hold icon or the icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is the fifth. When the icon changes to the hold icon of the special display mode (second special display mode) or the icon, the hold icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) that has already been displayed or the same posture as the icon ( The hold icon or the icon newly changed from the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) may start the vertical movement (effect operation).

Further, the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) does not change only from the icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), but also the normal display mode and the first to second display modes. The icon of the special display mode may be changed to the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), and the icon of the third special display mode (big hit confirmation) may not be changed.

In the present embodiment, the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, and the game ball can be launched. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game is ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the ball lending is arranged in parallel with the game machine 1. Although it is possible to pay out a game ball based on a payout request from the machine (ball lending), a game ball based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the progress control of the game is started and the game becomes playable. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) is not paid out when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Although the payout ball number data does not remain, the backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. If the unpaid payout number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid payout ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out the game ball based on it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the grant condition (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the large winning opening). The ball may be managed as data and the prize ball data may be added (added to the holding ball data).

Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the upper side and / or the lower side of the screen so as to cross the screen, and the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. The zone image may be displayed on the left side and / or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. By doing so, it is possible to make the two look-ahead zone effects compatible with each other, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot notice effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the main display device 70 may execute the whiteout effect. In this case, the basic flow of the production may be the same as that of the blackout production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the variable effect is basically the same between the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), but for example, the execution mode of the variable effect is the same as that of the previous stage effect in the normal game state. Post-stage production (pre-reach production and reach production case, normal reach production and SP reach production case, SP reach production and SPSP reach production case, pre-reach production and production design temporarily stopped case, reach production and production design The first information (information suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot, information on the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the latter stage effect of the variable effect consisting of (the case during the temporary stop of 70a, etc.). , Second information different from the first information during the execution of the second stage effect of the variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the specific game state (additional information of the music that can be selected by operating the cross key 19), mission achievement status Etc.) may be notified. Further, as a variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the normal gaming state, there is a case where the common second stage effect is executed after the first first stage effect is executed, and a case where the second first stage effect different from the first first stage effect is executed. The common latter stage effect may be executed, and information regarding the execution of the special game may be notified in the common latter stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1)
Here, in a conventional gaming machine, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means are generally provided. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute the variable display of the special symbol according to the determination result of the determination information and also execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (). For example, see JP-A-2018-118109). However, with such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the gaming production, and there is a problem that the interest of the gaming is poor.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect in the variation effect is different from the start timing of the cycle variation. The variation display of a predetermined mode of the symbol (scroll display after the pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started, and the start of the frame update of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the predetermined mode of the effect symbol is started. Although it does not match the timing, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the predetermined mode of the effect symbol is started. ) May not be included.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation is after the end of the first cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol. The variation display (scroll display after the pre-variation operation (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) of the predetermined mode of the effect symbol in the effect is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol and the variation display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed. The variation display (update variation) of the special symbol is started at a timing different from the start timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. It may be that.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol and the variation display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and in the cycle variation. After the first display change is started, the variation display (update variation) of the special symbol is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , Hold display according to the hold storage stored in the storage means (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84). It is possible to reduce the hold display according to the decrease in the hold memory, and the decrease display of the hold display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the reduction display of the hold display is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the decrease display of the hold display is started. It may be.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , Hold display according to the hold storage stored in the storage means (display of hold icon HI and hold number on the main display device 70, hold on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84). It is possible to display) and decrease the hold display according to the decrease of the hold memory, so that the decrease display of the hold display is started after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation is started. It has become. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) can be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display can be shifted and reduced (changed to the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. Yes, the shift display of the hold display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. It may be that.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) can be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display can be shifted and reduced (changed to the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. Yes, the shift display of the hold display ends after the first cycle change in the change display of the special symbol ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) can be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display can be shifted and displayed as the corresponding display (the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. The shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the shift display of the hold display is started. It may be.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) may be additionally displayed according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold display may be shifted and displayed as the corresponding display (the icon TI) according to the decrease in the hold memory. It is possible, and the shift display ends after the first display change in the cycle variation is completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variation start sound) is executed during the execution of the variation effect. , Temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined gaming sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. It may not be included in.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the effect BGM (variable BGM) is audibly output during the execution of the variation effect. The audible output of the effect BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the effect BGM is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the audible output of the effect BGM is started. It may be that.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, horizontal scrolling,) is performed to display the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol. It is possible to change the scene, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen is started after the power is turned on). There is. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the effect operation of the background image is started. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the effect operation of the background image is started. It may be that.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, horizontal scrolling,) is performed to display the background image displayed in the background of the effect symbol. It is possible to change the scene, etc.), and the background image effect operation is performed before the start of the first cycle fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the special symbol (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen is started after the power is turned on). ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the effect symbol has a predetermined mode at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. Is displayed (stop display, temporary stop display). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit in which the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined mode. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined mode. It may be that.

A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol ends. The effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol and the variation display of the special symbol (fourth symbol) while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed. The special symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing different from the end timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here does not match the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even if the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. good.

◆ As the eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to the command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , The hold display (hold icon HI) corresponding to the hold storage stored in the storage means can be made to perform an effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) during the execution of the variation effect, and the special symbol can be changed. Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the display, the effect operation of the hold display is continuously performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to display the corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information on which the determination is executed, and to make the corresponding display disappear at a predetermined timing, and the last in the variable display of the special symbol. The disappearance display of the corresponding display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the frame update start timing of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. It may be that.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes a means, a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. , The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. , It is possible to display the corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the determination information on which the determination is executed, and to make the corresponding display disappear at a predetermined timing, and the last in the variable display of the special symbol. After the cycle fluctuation of the above is completed, the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variation start sound) is executed during the execution of the variation effect. , Temporary stop sound, etc.) can be audibly output, and the audible output of the predetermined gaming sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol is the end of the cycle variation. It is possible to end at a timing different from the timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The "different timing" here means the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is terminated. It may not be included in.

As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and a predetermined gaming sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) is produced during the execution of the variation effect. It is possible to output audibly, and the audible output of the predetermined gaming sound started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol may be terminated before the cycle variation ends. It is possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 23rd configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol and then performs the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) is audibly output during the execution of the variation effect. Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol (during the stop display), the predetermined game sound can be continuously audibly output. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The means and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided, and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and the background image displayed on the background of the effect symbol is being executed. It is possible to perform an effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.), and the effect operation of the background image continues even after the end of the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol (during stop display). It is supposed to be done. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
In some conventional gaming machines, a variation display of a special symbol is executed according to a determination result of the determination information, and a variation effect by the effect symbol is executed during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-118109). However, there is room for improvement in the game production, and there is a problem that the game is not interesting.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. After the pre-stop motion effect (for example, display in which the character shakes his head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and the pre-stop motion effect, the above-mentioned effect. A proper effect (for example, a frame lighting device 10) that includes a stop display for stopping the symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) and notifies that the special game is executed before the execution of the stop display. , Lighting device 74 for board, rainbow emission of effect button light emitting LED 17c, output of success sound, display of success image, vibration of effect button 17, jackpot notification mode operation of movable effect device, etc.) Is characterized by ending at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, for example, a predetermined timing during a period in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped).
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is the first effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ). , The effect symbol 70a) and a second effect symbol (for example, a special symbol TZ) different from the first effect symbol, and a specific variable effect (for example, a special hit) based on the determination result that the special game is executed. In the variable effect pattern that can be executed at the time of determination), the first effect symbol operates in a predetermined mode before the stop operation effect (for example, display in which the character shakes his head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation). After performing (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.), a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and the second effect symbol is stopped without performing the pre-stop operation effect. In the special game executed after the display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed and the variation effect is completed, the second effect symbol is not displayed and the symbol corresponding to the first effect symbol (for example). For example, only the numerical portion in the effect symbol 70a) is displayed.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). It is provided with a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining (diagram determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is the first effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ). , The effect symbol 70a) and a second effect symbol (for example, a special symbol TZ) different from the first effect symbol, and a specific variable effect (for example, a special hit) based on the determination result that the special game is executed. In the variable effect pattern that can be executed at the time of determination), the first effect symbol is the first effect symbol by performing a pre-stop operation effect (for example, a symbol promotion effect, a revival effect) that operates in a predetermined mode. The second aspect (for example, the combination of the effect symbols 70a is "444", for example, the combination of the effect symbols 70a is "454") is changed to the second aspect (for example, the combination of the effect symbols 70a is "777"). It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) in the first effect symbol of the embodiment, and the second effect symbol is the second aspect without performing the pre-stop operation effect. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) in the second effect symbol corresponding to the first effect symbol of.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). It is provided with a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining (diagram determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. After the pre-stop motion effect (for example, display in which the character shakes its head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and the pre-stop motion effect, the above-mentioned effect. It is possible to display a changing icon (for example, the icon TI) corresponding to the running variation effect, including a stop display for stopping the symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode), and the variation. The middle icon is changing, suggesting that the special game may be executed by a first display mode (for example, a white icon) and a second display mode (for example, a blue icon) different from the first display mode. When the icon suggestion effect (for example, the icon change effect) can be executed and the display is performed in the first display mode, a predetermined disappearance effect (for example, the icon disappearance effect) is performed when the stop display is performed. When the display is performed in the second display mode, the predetermined disappearance effect is performed to hide the changing icon when the stop display is performed. It is characterized by doing.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is the first effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ). , The effect symbol 70a) and a second effect symbol (for example, a special symbol TZ) different from the first effect symbol, and the first effect symbol operates in a predetermined mode (for example, a pre-stop operation effect). , Display where the character shakes his head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and then stop display (for example, a mode in which the character is completely stopped) The second effect symbol is executed, and the stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed without performing the pre-stop operation effect, and the changing icon (for example) corresponding to the running variation effect is executed. , The icon TI) can be displayed, and the changing icon is a predetermined disappearance effect (when the stop display of the first effect symbol is performed in the variation effect based on the determination result that the special game is executed. For example, it is hidden without performing the icon disappearance effect), but when the stop display of the first effect symbol is performed in the variation effect based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the predetermined disappearance effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is hidden by performing.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol is the first effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ). , The effect symbol 70a) and a second effect symbol (for example, a special symbol TZ) different from the first effect symbol, and the first effect symbol operates in a predetermined mode (for example, a pre-stop operation effect). , Display where the character shakes his head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and then stop display (for example, a mode in which the character is completely stopped) The second effect symbol is executed, and the stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed without performing the pre-stop operation effect, and the changing icon (for example) corresponding to the running variation effect is executed. , The icon TI) can be displayed, and the changing icon is a predetermined disappearance effect (when the stop display of the second effect symbol is performed in the variation effect based on the determination result that the special game is executed. For example, it is hidden without performing the icon disappearance effect), but when the stop display of the second effect symbol is performed in the variation effect based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the predetermined disappearance effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is hidden by performing.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. Includes a pre-stop motion effect (for example, a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a in the determined effect) and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the effect symbol after the pre-stop operation effect. The effect symbol can execute the variable effect in the first aspect (for example, the effect symbol 70a having only a number part) and the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, the effect symbol 70a with a character). In the first variation effect (for example, loss SPSP reach variation effect) based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the pre-stop operation effect is performed in the first aspect, and the stop display is displayed in the second aspect. However, in the second variation effect (for example, the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect) based on the determination result that the special game is executed, the pre-stop operation effect and the stop display are performed in the first aspect. do.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. The effect includes a pre-stop operation effect (for example, a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a) and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) for stopping the effect symbol after the pre-stop operation effect. The symbol can execute the variable effect in the first aspect (for example, the effect symbol 70a having only a number portion) and the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, the effect symbol 70a with a character). In the first variation effect (for example, lost normal reach variation effect) based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the pre-stop operation effect and the stop display are performed in the second aspect, but the special game must be executed. In the second variation effect (for example, loss SPSP reach variation effect) based on the determination result of the above, the pre-stop operation effect (for example, temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a (in the decision effect)) is performed in the first aspect. It is characterized in that the stop display is performed in an embodiment.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. After the pre-stop motion effect (for example, display in which the character shakes its head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and the pre-stop motion effect, the above-mentioned effect. It is possible to display a predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image in FIG. 119) that includes a stop display for stopping the symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) and an operation display during the execution of the variation effect. Further, when it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) that makes the predetermined background image difficult to see, and the predetermined background image is visually recognized again at the end of the specific effect. The predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image displayed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 119) at the time when the specific effect becomes difficult to see is not visually recognized from the predetermined background image (for example, the predetermined background image at the end of the specific effect). For example, it is characterized in that it is visually recognized from the normal background image corresponding to the update value at the timing of T8 in FIG. 119 and the normal background image developed on the layer N + 1 at the timing of T8 in FIG. 119.
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining (figure determination information) and a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination are provided. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. After the pre-stop motion effect (for example, display in which the character shakes his head, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and the pre-stop motion effect, the above-mentioned effect. A specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) in a specific variable effect based on a determination result that the special game is executed, including a stop display for stopping the symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode). The related effect related to the specific effect (for example, the display of the afterglow image) is executed until the stop display is performed after notifying that the special game is executed by the execution of the above-mentioned related effect. During the execution of, the effect symbol is not displayed in a manner for notifying that the special game is executed (for example, the effect symbol 70a is not displayed at all), and after the related effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed. It is characterized in that it is displayed in a mode of notifying that a special game is executed (for example, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as "777").
This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
The conventional gaming machine is provided with an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game, and the special game is executed according to the operation of the operation means during the valid period in which the promotion effect for encouraging the operation of the operation means is performed. There was a gaming machine that performed a suggestion effect suggesting a possibility (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-158774). However, since the valid period is set over a predetermined time, the operation timing of the player also varies, and there is still room for improvement in improving the production interest.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), the main control means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, an effect button 17). , A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game (for example, special figure determination information) (for example, the main CPU 110a) and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol display 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At a timing different from that, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) for stopping the effect symbol is executed, and a predetermined It is possible to swing and display the effect symbol (for example, T3 to T4 in FIG. 123) in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determined effect). The number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the swing display when the operating means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 123) in the predetermined operation valid period, and the operation. The cycle variation performed during the execution of the swing display when the means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 123) different from the first timing during the predetermined operation valid period. Although different from the number of times, the number of times of the cycle fluctuation from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 in FIG. 123) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 in FIG. 123) is determined. It is characterized in that it is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 17), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60), and effect position (for example, "for example" in FIG. 60. In a gaming machine provided with a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73) that can be moved to "B" and "C"), the main control means is a special game (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and a variation display for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. The variable display means includes means (for example, special symbol indicators 60 and 61), and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely stops). The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. Starts the variable display of the effect symbol in the variable effect at different timings, and after the start, executes a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) to stop the effect symbol, and performs a predetermined operation. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determined effect) (for example, the operation of the determined effect in FIG. 60), and the operation. The effect symbol from the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 of case 1 of FIG. 124) when the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 of FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation valid period. The number of cycle fluctuations until the stop display is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) and the second timing (for example, the operation means is different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period). From the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 of case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the effect symbol when operated in T3) of case 2 of FIG. 124 (for example, case 2 of FIG. 124). From the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 in FIG. 124), although it differs from the number of cycle fluctuations in T6). It is characterized in that the number of times of the cycle fluctuation until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 17), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60), and effect position (for example, "for example" in FIG. 60. In a gaming machine provided with a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73) that can be moved to "B" and "C"), the main control means is a special game (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and a variation display for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. The variable display means includes means (for example, special symbol indicators 60 and 61), and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely stops). The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. Starts the variable display of the effect symbol in the variable effect at different timings, and after the start, executes a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) to stop the effect symbol, and performs a predetermined operation. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determined effect) (for example, the operation of the determined effect in FIG. 60), and the operation. When the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation valid period, the movable body returns to the standby position (for example, T3- of case 1 in FIG. 124). The number of cycle fluctuations from 1) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) and the operating means are different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period. Stop display of the effect symbol from the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 of the case 2 of FIG. 124) when operated at the second timing (for example, T3 of the case 2 of FIG. 124). Is different from the number of cycle fluctuations until (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124), but the predetermined operation valid period is opened. The number of cycle fluctuations from the start (for example, T2 in FIG. 124) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated. It is characterized by being.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 17), standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60), and effect position (for example, "for example" in FIG. 60. In a gaming machine provided with a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73) that can be moved to "B" and "C"), the main control means is a special game (for example, for example) that is advantageous to the player. A determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and a variation display for executing variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. The variable display means includes means (for example, special symbol indicators 60 and 61), and the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely stops). The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At different timings, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) for stopping the effect symbol is executed, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determined effect) (for example, the operation of the determined effect in FIG. 60), and the operation. The effect symbol from the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 of case 1 of FIG. 124) when the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of case 1 of FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation valid period. The number of cycle fluctuations until the stop display is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) and the second timing (for example, the operation means is different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period). From the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 of case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the effect symbol when operated in T3) of case 2 of FIG. 124 (for example, case 2 of FIG. 124). Although it differs from the number of cycle fluctuations in T6), the standby is performed from the start of operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in FIG. 124). It is characterized in that the number of times of the cycle fluctuation performed until the return to the position (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. A game including means (for example, an effect control board 130), an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), and a vibration means that can perform predetermined vibration (for example, a button drive device 17b). In the machine, the main control means is a determination means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The variable display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60 and 61) that executes the variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination is provided, and the variable display means is cycled as the variable display of the special symbol. After performing the fluctuation a plurality of times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, in a completely stopped mode), and the effect control means responds to the variation display of the special symbol and displays the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a). ) Is possible, and the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, and after the start, the effect symbol is stopped. The display (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and the vibrating means is vibrated in response to the operation of the operating means in a predetermined operation valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determined effect). It is possible (for example, T3 to T3-1 in FIG. 125), and the operation means is operated at the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 125). The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibrating means (for example, T3 of case 1 of FIG. 125) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 of case 1 of FIG. 125) and the operating means The vibration start of the vibrating means (for example, T3 of case 2 of FIG. 125) when operated at a second timing (for example, T3 of case 2 of FIG. 125) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period. ) To the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 125), but the vibration means starts vibrating (for example, T3 of FIG. 125), although it is different from the number of cycle fluctuations. The number of cycle fluctuations performed from the time of vibration to the end of vibration (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 125) is the number of times. It is characterized in that it is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and vibration means capable of predetermined vibration (for example, a button drive device 17b), the main control means is a special game (for example) advantageous to the player. For example, a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) for whether or not to execute a jackpot game) and a variable display of a special symbol are executed according to the result of the determination. A variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops the special symbol (for example, complete display). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the first cycle variation is started. At a timing different from the timing, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, the stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) is executed to stop the effect symbol. The vibrating means vibrates at the first timing of the variation effect (for example, T7 of FIG. 126, for example, T3 of FIG. 126), and after the first timing, the second timing of the variation effect (for example, T3 of FIG. 126). For example, there is a case where the T7 of FIG. 126 vibrates with the T3 of FIG. 126, for example, the T7 of FIG. 126 with the T7 of FIG. 127, for example, the T3 of FIG. 126 with the T7 of FIG. 127). The number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start of vibration at the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126) to the end of vibration (for example, T9-1 in FIG. 126) and the vibration at the second timing. It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start (for example, T7 in FIG. 127) to the end of vibration (for example, T8-1 in FIG. 127) is different.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 17), and light emitting means (for example, rainbow light emission) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, rainbow light emission). In a gaming machine provided with a frame lighting device 10, a panel lighting device 74, and an effect button light emitting LED 17c), whether or not the main control means executes a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining the determination information (for example, special symbol determination information) and a variation display means (for example, a special symbol display) for executing variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination. 60, 61), the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol as a stop display (for example, a mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect is performed at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. The variable display of the effect symbol is started, and after the start, a stop display for stopping the effect symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and a predetermined operation valid period (for example, in a determined effect) is executed. It is possible to make the light emitting means emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode in response to the operation of the operating means in the effective period (effective period of 4 seconds) (for example, T3 in FIG. 128), and the operating means has the predetermined operation. The stop display of the effect symbol is displayed from the start of light emission of the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 of case 1 of FIG. 128) when operated at the first timing in the valid period (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 128). The number of cycle fluctuations until this is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 128) and the second timing (for example, the case of FIG. 128) in which the operating means is different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period. From the start of light emission in the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 128) to the stop display of the effect symbol when operated in T3) of 2 (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 128). ) Is different from the number of cycle fluctuations, but the emission start of the predetermined emission mode (for example, FIG. 12). The number of cycle fluctuations performed from T3) of 8 to the end of light emission (for example, T3-1 of FIG. 128) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated. And.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 17), and sound output means that can output a specific sound (for example, success sound) (for example, voice output device 9). ), And the main control means determines determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The variable display means includes means (for example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) that execute variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination. As the variation display of the special symbol, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped). The variation effect by the symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) can be executed, and the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation, and after the start, the variation display is started. A stop display for stopping the effect symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and the operation means is operated in a predetermined operation valid period (for example, an effective period of 4 seconds in the determined effect). It is possible to output the specific sound from the sound output means (for example, T3 in FIG. 129), and the operation means has the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129). ) From the start of output of the specific sound (for example, T3 of case 1 in FIG. 129) to the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T6 of case 1 of FIG. 129). And the output start of the specific sound when the operating means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 129) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period (for example). , T3 in case 2 of FIG. 129) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 129), although it is different from the number of cycle fluctuations, the output of the specific sound is started ( For example, the number of times of the cycle fluctuation performed from T3) in FIG. 129 to the end of output (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 129). The number is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), the main control means is a special game (for example) that is advantageous to the player. , A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game (for example, special figure determination information) (for example, the main CPU 110a) and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol display 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, then stops and displays the special symbol, and controls the effect. The means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect in the variation effect is performed at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. The variable display of the effect symbol is started, and after the start, the stop display for stopping the effect symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and a predetermined operation valid period (for example, the valid period in the determined effect) is executed. In 4 seconds), the result of the determination is notified in response to the operation of the operating means (for example, T3 in FIG. 130), and the switching displayed from the specific image (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 130) after the notification. The image) can be displayed, and the notification is started (for example, the case of FIG. 130) when the operating means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 of the case 1 of FIG. 130) in the predetermined operation valid period. The number of cycle fluctuations from T3) of 1 until the specific image is displayed (for example, T3-1 of case 1 in FIG. 130) and the first timing of the operating means in the predetermined operation valid period. Is operated at a different second timing (eg, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 130) from the start of the notification (eg, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 130) until the specific image is displayed (eg, FIG. Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations in T3-1) of Case 2 of 130, from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 of FIG. 130) until the specific image is displayed (for example, FIG. The number of times of the cycle fluctuation of T3-1) of 130 is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated. It is characterized by being.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◇ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), the main control means is a special game (for example) that is advantageous to the player. , A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game (for example, special figure determination information) (for example, the main CPU 110a) and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol display 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At a timing different from that, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) for stopping the effect symbol is executed, and a predetermined The result of the determination is notified (for example, T3 in FIG. 130) according to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determination effect), and a specific image (for example, for example) is notified after the notification. The switching image displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) can be displayed, and the operating means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 130) in the predetermined operation valid period. The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in case 1 of FIG. 130) and the operating means are described. From the start of the notification (for example, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 130) when the operation is performed at a second timing (for example, T3 of case 2 in FIG. 130) different from the first timing in a predetermined operation valid period. Although it differs from the number of cycle fluctuations until the specific image is displayed (for example, T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 130), the said from the start of display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 130). The number of times of the cycle fluctuation until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 130) does not require the operating means. It is characterized in that it is the same even when it is operated at this timing.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). The determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining the figure determination information), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination (for example, the special symbol indicators 60, 61), and the determination. The variation display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining the variation display pattern (for example, the special figure variation pattern of FIG. 9) according to the variation display is provided according to the result of the above. After performing cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped), and the effect control means produces an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. The variation effect by the symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) can be executed, and the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation, and after the start, the variation display is started. A stop display for stopping the effect symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and a specific variation display pattern among the variation display patterns (for example, the special figure variation pattern 04 of FIG. 9 and FIG. 9) is shown. The specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) can be executed in the special figure variation pattern 09), and the first specific effect (for example, the typhoon reach in FIG. 132) is different from the first specific effect as the specific effect. Either of the second specific effect (for example, the heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) can be executed, and the effect content is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect (the typhoon reach and the heavy snow reach are produced). (The contents are different), but the number of times of the cycle variation performed until the specific effect is started (for example, T0 to T5 in FIG. 132) is the same.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, special). The determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining the figure determination information), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination (for example, the special symbol indicators 60, 61), and the determination. The variation display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining the variation display pattern (for example, the special figure variation pattern of FIG. 9) according to the variation display is provided, and the variation display means is described. As a variation display of the special symbol, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped). The variation effect by the symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) can be executed, and the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation, and after the start, the variation display is started. A stop display for stopping the effect symbol (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and a specific variation display pattern among the variation display patterns (for example, the special figure variation pattern 04 of FIG. 9 and FIG. 9) is shown. The specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) can be executed in the special figure variation pattern 09), and the first specific effect (for example, the typhoon reach in FIG. 132) is different from the first specific effect as the specific effect. Either of the second specific effect (for example, the heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) can be executed, and the effect content is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect (the typhoon reach and the heavy snow reach are produced). (The contents are different), but the number of times of the cycle variation performed after the specific effect is started (for example, T5 to T8 in FIG. 132) is the same.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), the main control means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, an effect button 17). , A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game (for example, special figure determination information) (for example, the main CPU 110a) and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At a timing different from that, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) for stopping the effect symbol is executed, and a predetermined It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue advance notice effect) suggesting that the special game may be executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (for example, the valid period of 3 seconds in the dialogue advance notice). The operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T2 in case 1 of FIG. 133) in the predetermined operation valid period, and the execution of the suggestion effect is started (for example, T4 in case 1 of FIG. 133). ) To the stop display of the effect symbol (for example, T8 in case 1 of FIG. 133), and the operation means is different from the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period. From the start of execution of the suggestion effect (for example, T4 of case 2 of FIG. 133) when operated at two timings (for example, T2 of case 2 in FIG. 133) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T2 of case 2 in FIG. 133). Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations in case 2 (T8) of FIG. 133, from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 of FIG. 133) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, T2 of FIG. 133). The number of times of the cycle fluctuation in T8) of FIG. 133 is operated by the operating means at any timing. It is characterized in that it is the same even if it is done.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), the main control means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, an effect button 17). , A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game (for example, special figure determination information) (for example, the main CPU 110a) and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At a timing different from that, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, the stop display for stopping the effect symbol (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) is executed, and the operation is performed. A first operation effect for operating the means (for example, an operation effect in a dialogue notice) and a second operation effect different from the first operation effect for operating the operation means (for example, an operation effect in a determined effect). And, and when the first operation effect is executed, the first suggestion effect (for example, the fade-in image for advancement of dialogue in FIG. 134) suggesting that the first operation effect is executed. (Display), and a second suggestion effect (for example, display of a fade-in image for a determination effect in FIG. 134) that suggests that the second operation effect is executed when the second operation effect is executed. The number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the first suggestion effect (for example, T1-1 to T2 in FIG. 134) and the execution of the second suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 134). It is characterized in that it is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed in T5 to T6).
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with means (for example, an effect control board 130) and an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, an effect button 17), the main control means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example, an effect button 17). , A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game (for example, special figure determination information) (for example, the main CPU 110a) and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At a timing different from that, the variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a mode in which the effect symbol is completely stopped) for stopping the effect symbol is executed, and a predetermined It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a meter effect) suggesting that the special game may be executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the determined effect). The first suggestion effect suggests that the special game may be executed in response to the operation of the operation means in the first operation mode (for example, by operating the effect button 17 five times). The special effect (for example, meter pattern 1) and the operation means are operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, by operating the effect button 17 once). The special game includes a second suggestion effect (for example, meter pattern 2) suggesting the possibility that the game is executed, and the special game starts from the start of the first suggestion effect (for example, T2 of the meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135). The number of cycle fluctuations performed until the possibility of execution is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) and the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135). From to suggesting the possibility that the special game is executed (for example, T5 of the meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135). Although different from the number of cycle fluctuations, from the start of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 in FIG. 135) until the stop display of the effect symbol is performed (for example, in FIG. 135). It is characterized in that the number of times of the cycle fluctuation of T8) is the same.
As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
In the conventional gaming machine, various production means are provided on the surface of the game board, and the production means are used to improve the game entertainment. As such an effect means, there is one provided with a movable effect means (so-called gimmick) and operating the movable effect means in a predetermined operation mode (so-called effect operation). Further, for example, when the power is turned on, the movable effect means is operated to be operated in the same mode as or substantially the same mode as the above-mentioned predetermined operation mode (so-called initial operation). The operation check is executed even when the player is playing a game (for example, during variable display) if the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236681). Gazette). By the way, when the operation check is executed during the variable display, some players misunderstand the operation check as the directing action, which causes a decrease in the interest of the game.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby positions (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and effects. With a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73, for example, a sub-display device 71) that can be moved to a position (for example, “B” and “C” in FIG. 60, for example, “G” in FIG. 62). In a gaming machine provided with a For example, the main CPU 110a) is provided with variable display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) that execute variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. As the variation display of the above, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped), and the effect control means corresponds to the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol (for example). For example, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect symbol 70a), and during the execution of the variable display, the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (act a) to (c) in FIG. 62) is performed. While making it feasible, if the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variation display and then the power supply is performed, the initial operation (for example, for example) by the movable body during the execution of the variation display performed after the power supply is performed. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62) can be executed, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the effect operation of the movable body, and the execution of the initial operation of the movable body. It is characterized in that it is different from the number of times the cycle fluctuation is performed during the process.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in a game machine provided with a movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby positions (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and effects. With a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73, for example, a sub-display device 71) that can be moved to a position (for example, “B” and “C” in FIG. 60, for example, “G” in FIG. 62). In a gaming machine provided with a For example, the main CPU 110a) is provided with variable display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) that execute variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. As the variation display of the above, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped), and the effect control means corresponds to the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol (for example). For example, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect symbol 70a), and during the execution of the variable display, the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (act a) to (c) in FIG. 62) is performed. While making it feasible, if the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variation display and then the power supply is performed, the initial operation (for example, for example) by the movable body during the execution of the variation display performed after the power supply is performed. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) of FIG. 62) can be executed, and in the effect operation of the movable body, the movement is performed until the movable body moves from the standby position to the effect position. It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed until the movable body moves from the standby position to the effect position in the initial operation of the movable body.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in a game machine provided with a movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby positions (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and effects. With a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73, for example, a sub-display device 71) that can be moved to a position (for example, “B” and “C” in FIG. 60, for example, “G” in FIG. 62). In a gaming machine provided with a For example, the main CPU 110a) is provided with variable display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60 and 61) that execute variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. As the variation display of the above, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a mode in which the special symbol is completely stopped), and the effect control means corresponds to the variation display of the special symbol. For example, it is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect symbol 70a), and during the execution of the variable display, the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (act a) to (c) in FIG. 62) is performed. While making it feasible, if the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variation display and then the power supply is performed, the initial operation (for example, for example) by the movable body during the execution of the variation display performed after the power supply is performed. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62) can be executed, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the effect position in the effect operation of the movable body. The initial operation of the movable body is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the effect position.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in a game machine provided with a movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. A means (for example, an effect control board 130), a power supply means for supplying power (for example, a power supply board 160), and a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "D" in FIG. 61, for example. A movable body that can be moved to the “F” in FIG. 62) and the effect position (for example, “B” and “C” in FIG. 60, for example, “E” in FIG. 61, for example, “G” in FIG. 62). (For example, in a gaming machine provided with a first movable effect device 73, for example, a second movable effect device 75, for example, a sub-display device 71), the main control means is a special game advantageous to the player (for example,). , A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) for whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and a variation for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. A display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) is provided, and the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as a variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol (for example, completely). The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect control means can execute the variation effect during the execution of the variation display. While enabling the effect operation by the movable body (for example, (act a) to (act c) of FIG. 61, for example, (act a) to (c) of FIG. 62), the above-mentioned When the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variation display and then the power supply is performed, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, FIG. 61) is performed during the execution of the variation display performed after the power supply. (First a) to (first c), for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62) can be executed, and the movable body is a first movable body (for example, a second movable effect device 75). The first movable body includes a second movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73, for example, a sub display device 71) different from the first movable body, and the first movable body is the said performed during the execution of the effect operation. The number of cycle fluctuations and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the initial operation are the same, but the second movable body has the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the effect operation. , The number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the initial operation is different.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in a game machine provided with a movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby positions (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and effects. With a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73, for example, a sub-display device 71) that can be moved to a position (for example, “B” and “C” in FIG. 60, for example, “G” in FIG. 62). In a gaming machine provided with a For example, the main CPU 110a), a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) that executes a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variation display according to the result of the determination. A variation display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining a variation display pattern (for example, the special figure variation pattern of FIG. 9) is provided, and the variation display means has a plurality of cycle variations as variation display of the special symbol. After the rotation, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a completely stopped mode), and the effect control means changes according to the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol. The effect can be executed, and while the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (act a) to (c) in FIG. 62) can be executed while the variable display is being executed, the effect is possible. When the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variation display and then the power supply is performed, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, FIG. 62) during the execution of the variation display performed after the power supply is performed. (First a) to (first c)) can be executed, and when the power supply is performed, a predetermined supply-time image (for example, "recovering") can be displayed on the display means (for example, the main display device 70). Yes, in the effect operation of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the effect position, and in the initial operation of the movable body, when the movable body is in the effect position. The number of cycle fluctuations is different from that of the cycle, and power is supplied at a predetermined timing (for example, T0 in FIG. 137) during execution of the fluctuation display according to a predetermined fluctuation display pattern (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern 01). Stopped, After that, when power is supplied (for example, T1 in FIG. 137) and the initial operation is executed, when the initial operation is terminated (for example, T9 in FIG. 137), the predetermined supply image is already displayed. It is characterized by being finished.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in a game machine provided with a movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 110) and an effect control for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Means (for example, effect control board 130), power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), standby positions (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62) and effects. With a movable body (for example, a first movable effect device 73, for example, a sub-display device 71) that can be moved to a position (for example, “B” and “C” in FIG. 60, for example, “G” in FIG. 62). In a gaming machine provided with a For example, the main CPU 110a), a variation display means (for example, special symbol indicators 60, 61) that executes a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variation display according to the result of the determination. A variation display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 110a) for determining a variation display pattern (for example, the special figure variation pattern of FIG. 9) is provided, and the variation display means has a plurality of cycle variations as variation display of the special symbol. After the rotation, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, a completely stopped mode), and the effect control means changes according to the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol. The effect can be executed, and while the effect operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (act a) to (c) in FIG. 62) can be executed while the variable display is being executed, the effect is possible. When the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variation display and then the power supply is performed, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, FIG. 62) during the execution of the variation display performed after the power supply is performed. (First a) to (first c)) can be executed, and when the power supply is performed, a predetermined supply-time image (for example, "recovering") can be displayed on the display means (for example, the main display device 70). Yes, in the effect operation of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the effect position, and in the initial operation of the movable body, when the movable body is in the effect position. The number of such cycle fluctuations is different from that of the cycle variation, and a predetermined timing (for example, for example) is performed during execution of the variation display according to a specific variation display pattern (for example, special figure variation pattern 05, for example, special figure variation pattern 08). FIG. 13 When the power supply is stopped at T0) of 8 and then the power supply is performed (for example, T1 of FIG. 138) and the initial operation is executed, when the initial operation is terminated (for example, T7 of FIG. 138). Is still continuing to display the predetermined supply-time image.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in a game machine provided with a movable effect means.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
Here, in a conventional gaming machine, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means are generally provided. In such a gaming machine, the variation display of the special symbol is executed according to the determination result of the determination information, and the effect sound is output from the sound output unit during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. There is. Further, there is a device in which the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined set value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, with such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the gaming production, and there is a problem that the interest of the gaming is poor.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (voice output device 9) for outputting an effect sound according to the progress of the effect, the main control means satisfies the acquisition condition ( Based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by (winning a prize at the start opening), a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and according to the result of the judgment. The variation display means is provided with a variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the effect control means , The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the predetermined sound (predetermined sound) from the sound output unit during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to audibly output fluctuation BGM such as normal BGM, sound effect, etc., and set the volume value when the cycle fluctuation is started from the customer waiting state in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not executed. However, when the audible output of the predetermined sound is started in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, there are restrictions on the setting of the volume value (regulate the setting of the volume value, delete the volume value image, and the volume value image. Is changed to the back layer of the production pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure the period during which the player can adjust the volume as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable effect.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (voice output device 9) for outputting an effect sound according to the progress of the effect, the main control means satisfies the acquisition condition ( Based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by (winning a prize at the start opening), a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and according to the result of the judgment. The variation display means is provided with a variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the effect control means , The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player. It is possible to execute a variation effect that displays variations, and when the cycle variation is started from the customer waiting state, the setting of the volume value is not restricted, but the variation of the special symbol is made according to the start of the cycle variation. When the display is started, there are restrictions on the setting of the volume value (regulation of the setting of the volume value, deletion of the volume value image, change of the volume value image to the rear layer of the effect pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure the period during which the player can adjust the volume as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable effect.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (voice output device 9) for outputting an effect sound according to the progress of the effect, the main control means satisfies the acquisition condition (the effect control board 130). Depending on the determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (winning a prize at the start port), and the result of the determination. The variable display means includes a variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a hold storage, and the variable display means displays the cycle variation as the variable display of the special symbol. After performing the special symbol a plurality of times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can set the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player. The hold information (hold icon, number hold, hold LED) is increased (additional display, increase, etc.) according to the increase in the hold memory, and the hold information is reduced (shifted) according to the decrease in the hold memory. (Display, reduction, etc.) is possible, and when the cycle fluctuation is started from the customer waiting state, the setting of the volume value is not restricted, but the holding information is reduced and displayed according to the start of the cycle fluctuation. Is performed, there are restrictions on the setting of the volume value (regulation of the setting of the volume value, deletion of the volume value image, change of the volume value image to the rear layer of the effect pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure the period during which the player can adjust the volume as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the decrease in the number of holds.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (voice output device 9) for outputting an effect sound according to the progress of the effect, the main control means satisfies the acquisition condition ( Based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by (winning a prize at the start opening), a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and according to the result of the judgment. The variation display means is provided with a variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the effect control means , The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the predetermined sound (predetermined sound) from the sound output unit during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to audibly output (variable BGM, sound effect, etc.), and there are no restrictions on the setting of the volume value when the cycle fluctuation is started from the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. , When the audible output of the predetermined sound is started in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, there are restrictions on the setting of the volume value (the setting of the volume value is restricted, the volume value image is deleted, and the volume value image is produced. It is designed to be changed to the rear layer, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure the period during which the player can adjust the volume as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, it is possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the predetermined sound.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (voice output device 9) for outputting an effect sound according to the progress of the effect, the main control means satisfies the acquisition condition ( Based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by (winning a prize at the start opening), a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and according to the result of the judgment. The variation display means is provided with a variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the effect control means , The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the variation display of the effect symbol is displayed in response to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the variation effect to be performed, and when the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped in response to the stop of the cycle variation, there are restrictions on the setting of the volume value (the setting of the volume value is restricted, the volume value image is deleted). , The volume value image is changed to the back layer of the production pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure the period during which the player can adjust the volume as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize the stop display (the variation effect is completed) of the effect symbol or the special symbol.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control board 130) and a sound output unit (voice output device 9) for outputting an effect sound according to the progress of the effect, the main control means satisfies the acquisition condition ( A judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by (winning a prize at the starting port), and according to the result of the above judgment. The variable display means is provided with a variable display means for executing the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display means performs cycle variation a plurality of times as the variable display of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means is used. , The volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the execution display (the icon, etc.) is executed according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Is possible, and when the execution display is erased in response to the stop of the cycle fluctuation, there are restrictions on the volume value setting (the volume value setting is restricted, the volume value image is erased, and the volume value image is produced. It is designed to be changed to the back layer of the design, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure the period during which the player can adjust the volume as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player recognize that the execution display (the icon) is erased, that is, the variation effect is completed.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6)
Here, in a conventional gaming machine, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means are generally provided. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute the variable display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, execute the variable effect during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and output the effect sound. (For example, see JP-A-2018-043025). However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the interest of the game may be lowered without considering the case where the progress of the production is stagnant.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of, and it is possible to output an effect sound (normal BGM such as a variable BGM, a sound effect, etc.) during the execution of the variable effect. , If the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the variation effect (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received), the effect symbol When the temporary stop period and the output period of the effect sound are extended and the effect sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even in the absence state, the effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that performs a variable display of the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the above, and it is possible to output an effect sound (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. If the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received), the special symbol changes. When the period and the output period of the effect sound are extended and the effect sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the variation period of the special symbol, even when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed. The effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of, and a specific sound (zone BGM, jackpot warning sound, etc.) that is expected to execute the special game during the execution of the variable effect. ) Can be output, and the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the variation effect (the stop command, the next start command, and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received. ), When the temporary stop period of the effect symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, the special symbol Even when the variation display is not executed, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that performs a variable display of the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Sounds (zone BGM, jackpot warning sound, etc.) can be output, and the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (stop command, next start command, customer waiting state specification command). Is not normally received), the fluctuation period of the special symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and when the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the above Even when the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variation effect of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variation display of the above, and it is possible to execute a predetermined notification effect (fixed effect, etc.) based on the result of the determination during the execution of the variation effect. If the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the effect (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state specification command cannot be normally received), the effect symbol is temporarily stopped. The period is extended, and the predetermined notification effect is not started during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, but the predetermined notification effect started before the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol is performed. It can be continuously executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that performs a variable display of the effect symbol and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined notification based on the result of the determination during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. The effect (fixed effect, etc.) can be executed, and the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the stop command, the next start command, and the customer waiting state specification command are normally received. (Cannot), the variation period of the special symbol is extended, and the predetermined notification effect is not started during the extension of the variation period of the special symbol, but is started before the extension of the variation period of the special symbol. The predetermined notification effect can be executed even during the extension of the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effect of the effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 7)
Here, in a conventional gaming machine, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means are generally provided. In such a gaming machine, a variation display of a special symbol is executed according to a determination result of the determination information, and a variation effect is executed. Further, the hold display corresponding to the determination information that the variation display of the special symbol has not been executed is displayed, or the execution display is displayed according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025 (see). However, such a gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is poor.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means can display a number of hold displays (hold icons, etc.) corresponding to the hold storage, and can display the effect symbols in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variation effect that displays the variation of the above, and it is possible to execute an operation display (rotation, swing) of the hold display while the variation effect is being executed, and the hold display is not displayed during the execution of the variation effect. When the specific effect to be displayed (start effect effect, mode change effect SP reach effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) can be executed and the hold display is displayed according to the end of the specific effect, a predetermined operation state is displayed. It is possible to display the motion from (the initial posture, the posture in which the motion display would have continued even during the specific effect). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the hold display (hold icon), and it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player when redisplaying the hold display, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means can display an execution display (the icon, etc.) according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect that displays variations in the effect symbol, and it is possible to execute an operation display (rotation, swing) of the execution display during the execution of the variable effect, and the execution is performed during the execution of the variable effect. When a specific effect (mode change effect, SPSP development effect, decision success effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) that hides the display can be executed and the execution display is displayed according to the end of the specific effect, a predetermined effect is specified. It is possible to display the motion from the motion state (initial posture, posture in which the motion display would have continued even during the specific effect). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the execution display (the icon), and it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player when redisplaying the execution display, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means can display a number of hold displays (hold icons, etc.) corresponding to the hold storage, and the hold display from which the variable display of the special symbol is started. Can be displayed as an execution display (the icon, etc.), and a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be executed. It is possible to execute the display and the operation display (rotation, rocking) of the execution display, and the specific effect (mode change effect, SPSP development effect, SPSP reach effect, decision success effect, eye-catching effect, etc.) can be executed, and when the hold display and the execution display are displayed according to the end of the specific effect, a predetermined operation state (initial posture, during the specific effect) is displayed. It is possible to display the motion from the posture) that the motion display would have continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the hold display (hold icon), and it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player when redisplaying the hold display, which improves the interest of the game. Is possible.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The storage means for storing and the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the determination information prior to the determination means are provided, and the effect control means displays a number of hold displays (hold icons and the like) corresponding to the hold storage. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the hold display to a special mode (blinking white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax type, etc.) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the preliminary determination. Yes, it is possible to execute a variable effect that displays the variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the hold display is displayed in the first state (initial posture) and the second state during the execution of the variable effect. When it is possible to execute an operation display (rotation, rocking) that is repeatedly changed to a state (changing posture), and the holding display of the normal mode is changed to the special mode when the second state is set. It is possible to display the operation of the hold display changed to the special aspect from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold display (hold icon). In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means can display an execution display (the icon, etc.) according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the execution display is a normal mode (white). It is possible to execute a change effect that changes to a different special mode (blinking white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax type, etc.), and a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Is possible, and an operation display (rotation, rocking) that repeatedly changes the execution display between the first state (initial posture) and the second state (changing posture) during the execution of the variation effect is possible. When the execution display of the normal aspect is changed to the special aspect when the second state is set, the execution display changed to the special aspect is displayed in operation from the first state. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, when the display mode of the execution display is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The storage means for storing and the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the determination information prior to the determination means are provided, and the effect control means displays a number of hold displays (hold icons and the like) corresponding to the hold storage. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the hold display to a special mode (blinking white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax type, etc.) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the preliminary determination. Yes, it is possible to execute a variable effect that displays the variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the hold display is displayed in the first state (initial posture) and the second state during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to execute an operation display (rotation, rocking) that is repeatedly changed to a state (changing posture), and the special modes include a first special mode (white blinking, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, etc.). When the hold display of the first special aspect is changed to the second special aspect when the hold display is in the second state, the change to the second special aspect is included. It is possible to display the hold display from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold display (hold icon). In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means can display an execution display (the icon or the like) according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the execution display is a normal mode (white). It is possible to execute a change effect that changes to a different special mode (blinking white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax type, etc.), and a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Is possible, and an operation display (rotation, rocking) that repeatedly changes the execution display between the first state (initial posture) and the second state (changing posture) during the execution of the variation effect is possible. , The special aspect includes a first special aspect (white flashing, etc.) and a second special aspect (blue, red, rainbow color, ax type, etc.), and the execution display of the first special aspect is the first. When changing to the second special mode when the two states are set, it is possible to display the operation of the execution display changed to the second special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, when the display mode of the execution display is changed, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8)
Here, in a conventional gaming machine, a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means are generally provided. In such a gaming machine, a variation display of a special symbol is executed according to a determination result of the determination information, and a variation effect is executed. Further, the customer waiting effect is executed when a predetermined period elapses after the customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the production when the variable production is started while the customer waiting production is being executed, and there is a problem that the game is not interesting.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that performs a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols by a display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the above, and in the variable effect, a start operation (floating) is performed on the effect symbol. , Scale, etc.) can be changed and displayed, and a customer waiting effect can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state. The variable effect starts with the same display result of the plurality of effect symbols and the plurality of special symbols, and ends with the same display result of the plurality of effect symbols and the plurality of special symbols. When the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out, and the plurality of effect symbols and the plurality of special symbols are combined so as to be visible during the fade-out of the specific image. Although it is displayed, the time until the plurality of effect symbols are variablely displayed is longer than the time until the plurality of special symbols are variablely displayed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variation effect. In addition, the effect of the effect at the start of the fluctuation can be improved by the effect symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the variable display of the effect symbol and the variable display of the special symbol are performed by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the above. It is possible to change the display of the effect symbol after performing the above, and it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect of displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state. When the variable effect is started during the execution of the effect, the specific image can be faded out, the special symbol is started to be variablely displayed before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, and the effect symbol is displayed. , The variable display (scrolling, updating the symbol) is started after the fade-out of the specific image is completed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variation effect. In addition, the effect of the effect at the start of the fluctuation can be improved by the effect symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game), a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and a determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means additionally displays a hold display (hold icon, etc.) according to an increase in the hold storage, and reduces the hold display according to a decrease in the hold storage. It is possible to execute a variable effect of displaying the variable display of the effect symbol and the variable display of the special symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect of displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means, and when the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out. The special symbol has a variable display started before the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the hold display ends the reduced display after the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game), a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and a determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means additionally displays a hold display (hold icon, etc.) according to an increase in the hold storage, and reduces the hold display according to a decrease in the hold storage. It is possible to execute a variable effect of displaying the variable display of the effect symbol and the variable display of the special symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect of displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means, and when the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out. Yes, the special symbol starts variable display before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, the hold display is visually displayed during the fade-out of the specific image, and the reduction display ends after the end of the fade-out. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that the reserved memory has decreased while immediately recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means additionally displays a hold display (hold icon, etc.) according to an increase in the hold storage, and reduces the hold display according to a decrease in the hold storage. It is possible to execute a variable effect of displaying the variable display of the effect symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable effect, the start operation (floating, floating, It is possible to display the effect symbol in a variable manner after performing scaling, etc.), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state. When the variation effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out, and the hold display is started to be reduced before the end of the fade-out of the specific image. As for the effect symbol, variable display (scrolling, updating the symbol) is started after the fade-out of the specific image is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The determination means for determining whether or not to execute the game (big hit game), the variation display means for executing the variation display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been executed are stored as pending storage. The effect control means additionally displays a hold display (hold icon, etc.) according to an increase in the hold storage, and reduces the hold display according to a decrease in the hold storage. It is possible to execute a variable effect of displaying the variable display of the effect symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable effect, the start operation (floating, floating, It is possible to display the effect symbol in a variable manner after performing scaling, etc.), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state. When the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out, and the hold display ends the reduction display after the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the effect is displayed. As for the symbol, the variable display (scrolling, updating the symbol) is started after the reduction display of the hold display is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to display an execution display (the icon, etc.) according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and it is possible to execute a variation effect in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed by the display means in response to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. In the variable effect, it is possible to display the effect symbol in a variable manner after performing a start operation (floating, scaling, etc.) on the effect symbol, and the display means can display a specific image (customer waiting demo) during the customer waiting state. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect for displaying the image), and when the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image can be faded out, and the execution display is the specific. The display is completed after the fade-out of the image is completed, and the variable display (scrolling, updating the symbol) of the effect symbol is started after the display of the execution display is completed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the hold memory has decreased before the effect symbol starts the variable display, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (main control unit 110) for controlling the effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The variable display means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is the special symbol. As the variation display of the above, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control means displays the variation of the effect symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect of displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state, and the variable effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect. In this case, it is possible to fade out the specific image, and the display change in the cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times before the fade-out of the specific image is completed. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demo production in a natural flow while recognizing that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (main control means) for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect of displaying the variable display of the effect symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the above, and the customer waiting effect of displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state. When the variation effect is started during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out and the effect symbol is displayed so as to be visible during the fade-out. ing. Therefore, it is possible to end the demo production waiting for customers in a natural flow and start the variable production without delay, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means (main control board 110). In the gaming machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning to the starting port). The effect control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game) and a variation display means for executing a variation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect that displays the variable display of the effect symbol by the display means in response to the execution of the variable display of, and the advance notice effect (effect effect at the start) that expects the execution of the special game according to the start of the variable effect. , Mode change effect), it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect for displaying a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during the customer waiting state, and the variation during the execution of the customer waiting effect. When the effect is started, the specific image is faded out, the effect symbol is displayed so that it can be visually recognized during the fade-out, and the appearance of the effect symbol is restricted after the effect symbol becomes visible. The advance notice production is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific advance notice production has been started due to the start of the fluctuation production while confirming the stop result of the previous fluctuation production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second. The variable display of the special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the small hit game is not executed because there is no small hit as a result of the big hit determination. Then, regardless of the set value, it is determined as a small hit with the same first probability (for example, 1/300), and in the big hit determination when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, any setting is made. Even if it is a value, it may be determined as a small hit with the same second probability (for example, 1/7). In this case, a specific area is provided inside the first variable winning unit 49, and the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 50 passes through the specific area during the small hit game, so that the big hit game is executed. It may be a +2 type of gaming machine.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, the game shall be shifted to the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game, and the jackpot game (via the small hit game) based on the winning of the first starting port 45. (Including) is executed, the normal game state and the time-saving game state shall be shifted at a ratio of 1: 1 and the big hit game (including via the small hit game) based on the winning of the second starting port 47. When is executed, it is advisable to shift to the time-saving gaming state with a 100% probability. In this case, if the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is completed, the number of time-saving games is set to one, and the jackpot game based on the winning of the second starting port 47 is set. When the game shifts to the time saving game state after the end, it is preferable to set the number of time saving times to 5 times and 10 times at a ratio of 1: 1.

Further, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, if a small hit is determined by the look-ahead determination (preliminary determination) during the normal gaming state, the big hit game is used as the final icon display mode in the icon change effect. The rainbow icon whose execution is confirmed is not determined, and when it is determined as a small hit by the look-ahead determination (preliminary determination) during the time-saving game state, the rainbow icon is determined as the icon final display mode in the icon change effect. You may do it.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the game using the medal (game medium) (giving condition is satisfied), a predetermined amount is obtained. It can also be used for a rotating body type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a prize medal (prize medal data) to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 General gate 45 1st starting port 47 2nd starting port 50 1st big winning opening 56 2nd big winning opening 70 Main display device 71 Sub display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means, and an operation means that can be operated by a player.
The main control means
A determination means for determining determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
A variable display means for executing variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination is provided.
The variable display means is
As the variation display of the special symbol, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in response to the variable display of the special symbol.
The variation display of the effect symbol in the variation effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time, and after the start, the stop display for stopping the effect symbol is executed.
It is possible to notify the result of the determination according to the operation of the operation means in a predetermined operation valid period, and to display a specific image after the notification.
The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification to the display of the specific image when the operating means is operated at the first timing in the predetermined operation valid period, and
The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification to the display of the specific image when the operating means is operated at a second timing different from the first timing during the predetermined operation valid period is different. but,
The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of display of the specific image to the stop display of the effect symbol is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images